Jalapeño Pimento Cheese Recipe (Creamy & Spicy)

October 1, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

There aren't many things more Southern than homemade pimento cheese, and this Jalapeño Pimento Cheese recipe gives the classic Southern spread a little kick.

This recipe actually came together after I made my friend Trey's Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon. Trey had put me onto his version of pimento cheese, and after making it, I started thinking about what other variations I could come up with.

One that kept coming to mind was pimento cheese with jalapeño.

At the same time, I was thinking about an old-fashioned pimento cheese recipe my mother-in-law makes. It's one of those family recipes that's been around for years, and I'll eventually share that recipe here, too—but that's for another day.

For this recipe, I started experimenting with ideas from both.

borrowed the softened cream cheese idea from my buddy Trey’s smoked Gouda pimento cheese recipe and brought in the pepper jack cheese from my mother-in-law’s family recipe, along with sharp cheddar. Then I added my own twist with pickled jalapeños and just a little of their juice for extra tang and flavor.

After playing around with it, I landed on this version.

And of the pimento cheese recipes I've made so far, I think this may be the best one yet.

Why You'll Love This Jalapeño Pimento Cheese

What I like about this recipe is that the jalapeños don't overpower the pimento cheese.

There's definitely a little kick, but I wouldn't call it overly spicy. The sharp cheddar and pepper jack give it plenty of cheese flavor, while the cream cheese and mayonnaise make everything rich and creamy.

I chose pickled jalapeños instead of fresh jalapeños for a reason. Besides adding some heat, they bring acidity and tanginess that help cut through the richness of all that cheese and mayonnaise.

I even add about a teaspoon of the pickled jalapeño juice to the mixture.

If you're not normally a fan of spicy food, I'd still give this one a try. Pickled jalapeños aren't overwhelmingly hot, and the cheese, cream cheese, and mayonnaise help mellow out some of that heat.

It's creamy, tangy, cheesy, a little spicy, and loaded with bits of pimento and jalapeño in every bite.

Ingredients You'll Need

You don't need a long list of ingredients to make homemade jalapeño pimento cheese. Most of the flavor comes from the cheeses, pimentos, and pickled jalapeños.

Here's what you'll need:

Sharp cheddar cheese: I use one 8-ounce block and shred it myself. Sharp cheddar gives you that familiar flavor you expect from Southern pimento cheese.

Pepper jack cheese: You'll also need one 8-ounce block of pepper jack. It adds another layer of pepper flavor and a little extra kick without making the finished spread too spicy.

Cream cheese: I use 8 ounces. I prefer softened cream cheese because it's much easier to combine with the mayonnaise, pimentos, jalapeños, and seasonings before adding the shredded cheese. That's a trick I picked up from Trey.

Mayonnaise: I prefer Duke's mayonnaise. It has a tang that works really well in pimento cheese, but use whichever mayonnaise you prefer.

Pimentos: One 4-ounce jar is just right. I drain off some of the juice but intentionally leave a little behind.

Pickled jalapeños: I use ¼ cup of chopped pickled jalapeños. They add heat, acidity, and tang without overwhelming the other ingredients.

Pickled jalapeño juice: About 1 teaspoon of juice from the jar adds even more flavor and helps loosen the creamy base before the shredded cheese goes in.

Black pepper: Just ¼ teaspoon is enough.

Salt: This is optional and should be added to taste. The cheese, mayonnaise, pimentos, and pickled jalapeños already bring plenty of flavor, so taste it before adding salt.

The complete measurements and instructions are in the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

I’ve picked up quite a few favorite kitchen tools over the years, along with certain brands I’ve come to trust. If you’re curious about what I use in my own kitchen, I keep them all together on my Kitchen Essentials page.

Freshly Grated Cheese Makes a Difference

You can make pimento cheese with pre-shredded cheese, but I prefer buying blocks of cheese and grating them myself.

For this recipe, I use equal amounts of sharp cheddar and pepper jack.

Freshly grated cheese has a texture that works especially well in homemade pimento cheese. You can still see and taste those individual strands of cheese instead of everything disappearing into one smooth spread.

And honestly, grating two blocks of cheese doesn't take very long.

I use a simple box grater to shred both cheeses. You don't need anything fancy, but a good sharp grater makes quick work of two 8-ounce blocks of cheese.

Don't worry about making every strand perfectly uniform. This is homemade pimento cheese. A little texture is exactly what we're after.

Why I Use Pickled Jalapeños in Pimento Cheese

This was one of the decisions I made early on when developing the recipe.

Fresh jalapeños would certainly work, but I wanted more than just heat.

Pickled jalapeños have that vinegary tang and acidity that work especially well against rich ingredients like cheddar, pepper jack, cream cheese, and mayonnaise. They still give you jalapeño flavor and a little heat, but that acidity helps balance everything out.

That's also why I add about 1 teaspoon of the jalapeño juice from the jar.

It's a small amount, but don't overlook it.

Along with the little bit of liquid I leave in the pimentos, it adds flavor and helps the cream cheese, mayonnaise, pimentos, jalapeños, and seasonings come together before I fold in all that freshly shredded cheese.

The mixture may seem a little loose at first, but don't worry. The cheese absorbs some of that moisture as the pimento cheese rests in the refrigerator.

How to Make Jalapeño Pimento Cheese

Making this jalapeño pimento cheese recipe is easy, but I like to mix the creamy ingredients together first and add the shredded cheese afterward.

1. Shred the cheese

Grate 8 ounces of sharp cheddar cheese and 8 ounces of pepper jack cheese.

Set the shredded cheese aside while you make the creamy base.

2. Make the pimento cheese base

Add the softened cream cheese and mayonnaise to a large mixing bowl.

Add the lightly drained pimentos, chopped pickled jalapeños, about 1 teaspoon of pickled jalapeño juice, and black pepper.

Mix until everything is well combined.

I like making the base first because the extra liquid from the pimentos and jalapeños helps loosen the cream cheese and makes it easier to distribute everything evenly.

3. Fold in the shredded cheese

Add the freshly shredded sharp cheddar and pepper jack to the bowl.

Fold everything together until both cheeses are evenly coated and the pimentos and jalapeños are distributed throughout.

Taste and add salt if you think it needs it.

4. Refrigerate before serving

You can eat it right away—and I'm certainly not going to stop you—but I think this recipe is better after it has had some time in the refrigerator.

Cover the pimento cheese and refrigerate it for at least 2 hours before serving.

That gives everything time to come together, allows the cheese to absorb some of the extra moisture, and lets all those flavors get acquainted.

And in my opinion, it gets even better the next day.

What Does Jalapeno Pimento Cheese Taste Like?

This isn't what I'd call an extremely hot pimento cheese.

You get the sharpness from the cheddar first, along with the creamy richness of the cream cheese and mayonnaise. The pepper jack brings a mild pepper flavor, and then the pickled jalapeños give you a tangy little kick on the back end.

The pimentos add their familiar mild sweetness, while the pickling liquid brings enough acidity to keep the spread from feeling too heavy.

There's a lot going on, but it still tastes like pimento cheese.

That's important to me.

I wasn't trying to make something so spicy that the jalapeños covered up everything else. I wanted a spicy pimento cheese that still had the creamy, cheesy character of the Southern classic.

And because the cheddar and pepper jack are freshly grated and folded into the creamy base rather than blended smooth, there's plenty of texture in every bite.

Let Your Pimento Cheese Rest Before Serving

This may be the hardest part of the whole recipe.

Wait.

I recommend refrigerating the finished pimento cheese for at least two hours before serving it.

That resting time does two things. First, the flavors have a chance to blend together. Second, the shredded cheese absorbs some of the moisture from the pimentos and jalapeño juice, which helps everything settle into the right consistency.

This is also a great recipe to make the day before you need it.

I've found that the flavor gets even better after sitting overnight.

What to Serve With Jalapeno Pimento Cheese

Crackers are probably the easiest answer—and there's absolutely nothing wrong with keeping it that simple.

Pile the pimento cheese into a bowl, put out a sleeve of your favorite crackers, and let everybody dig in.

You could also serve it with toasted baguette slices, crostini, pretzels, celery, or other fresh vegetables.

And don't think of it only as an appetizer.

Spread it between two slices of bread for a jalapeño pimento cheese sandwich, add it to a burger, or use it anywhere you'd normally use traditional pimento cheese.

Once I publish my family's old-fashioned pimento cheese recipe, I'll link it here as another option for anyone who wants the more traditional version.

How to Store Homemade Pimento Cheese

Keep your pimento cheese covered in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

Since it contains cheese, cream cheese, and mayonnaise, keep it refrigerated until you're ready to serve, and return leftovers to the fridge afterward.

The texture will firm up when it's cold. If you prefer your pimento cheese a little softer, let it sit out briefly before serving and give it a good stir.

I actually think this recipe tastes better after a day in the refrigerator, so don't be afraid to make it ahead.

More Southern Sandwich Spreads to Try

If you enjoy this jalapeño pimento cheese, I've got a few more Southern sandwich spreads worth trying. My Southern-Style Egg Salad Recipe is an easy classic that's great for sandwiches or crackers, while my Southern Tuna Salad Recipe is another simple lunch favorite.

And if you're looking for another twist on pimento cheese, don't miss my Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon. It's smoky, cheesy, loaded with bacon, and very different from the tangy jalapeño version here.

Jalapeño Pimento Cheese FAQs

Is jalapeño pimento cheese spicy?

It has a little kick, but I wouldn't consider this recipe extremely spicy. Pickled jalapeños tend to have a more mellow heat, and the cheddar, pepper jack, cream cheese, and mayonnaise help balance it.
If you normally shy away from spicy foods, I'd still give this one a try.

Can I use fresh jalapeños instead of pickled jalapeños?

Yes, but the flavor will be different. Fresh jalapeños give you a fresher pepper flavor and more crunch. I specifically prefer pickled jalapeños in this recipe because their acidity and tang help balance the richness of the cheese and mayonnaise.

Do I need to drain the pimentos completely?

No. I drain off some of the liquid, but I intentionally leave a little behind. That extra liquid adds flavor and helps loosen the cream cheese mixture.

Why add jalapeño juice?

I add about a teaspoon of the pickling liquid because it brings extra acidity and jalapeño flavor to the spread. It also helps the creamy ingredients mix together before adding the shredded cheese.

Can I use pre-shredded cheese?

You can, but I prefer freshly grated cheese for this recipe. I like the flavor and texture better, and you get those visible strands of cheddar and pepper jack throughout the finished pimento cheese.

Can I make jalapeño pimento cheese ahead of time?

Absolutely. In fact, I recommend it. Give it at least two hours in the refrigerator before serving, or make it the day before. The flavors continue to come together as it rests.

A New Favorite Pimento Cheese Recipe

This recipe started with two different pimento cheeses.

There was my friend Trey's Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon, which gave me the idea of using softened cream cheese, and there was my mother-in-law's old-fashioned family recipe that got me thinking about taking pimento cheese in another direction.

I borrowed a little inspiration from each, added pepper jack and pickled jalapeños, and eventually landed here.

And I think this may be my favorite one yet.

I'll share that old-fashioned family pimento cheese recipe another day. Until then, if you like pimento cheese but want something with a little more kick and tang, give this one a try.

If you make it, let me know what you think in the comments.

Jalapeno Pimento Cheese

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Additional Time: 2 hours

Total Time: 2 hours 15 minutes

This easy Jalapeno Pimento Cheese combines sharp cheddar, pepper jack, cream cheese, pimentos, mayonnaise, and pickled jalapenos for a creamy, tangy Southern spread with just the right amount of kick.

No Ratings

Ingredients

8 ounces sharp cheddar cheese, shredded
8 ounces pepper jack cheese, shredded
8 ounces cream cheese, softened
½ cup mayonnaise
1 (4-ounce) jar diced pimentos, lightly drained
¼ cup pickled jalapeños, chopped
1 teaspoon pickled jalapeno juice
¼ teaspoon black pepper
Salt, to taste, optional

Instructions

Shred the sharp cheddar and pepper jack cheese and set aside.
Add the softened cream cheese, mayonnaise, lightly drained pimentos, chopped pickled jalapenos, jalapeno juice, and black pepper to a large mixing bowl. Mix until well combined.
Add the shredded sharp cheddar and pepper jack cheese. Fold together until the cheeses are evenly coated and the pimentos and jalapenos are distributed throughout.
Taste and add salt if desired.
Cover and refrigerate for at least 2 hours before serving to allow the flavors to come together and the cheese to absorb some of the moisture.
Stir before serving and enjoy with on as a sandwich, crackers, toasted bread, vegetables, or your favorite accompaniments.

Notes

Taste the pimento cheese before adding any salt. The cheese, pimentos, and pickled jalapeños (along with their brines) already contain salt, so you may find that no additional salt is needed.

prefer Duke's mayonnaise for its tangy flavor, but your favorite mayonnaise will work.
Don't completely dry the pimentos. Leaving a little liquid behind adds flavor and helps the creamy base come together.
Freshly grated cheddar and pepper jack give the finished pimento cheese a great texture, although pre-shredded cheese can be used for convenience.
For the best flavor, refrigerate the pimento cheese for at least two hours before serving. It's even better after resting overnight.

Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon

September 12, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

There aren't many things more Southern than homemade pimento cheese, but this Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon puts a smoky twist on the classic.

I was given this recipe by my good friend Trey Cauthen, who I go to church with. Trey and I both love food, so naturally, food comes up in conversation from time to time.

Smoked Gouda pimento cheese with bacon served with toasted bread.

Not long ago, Trey saw a commercially made smoked Gouda pimento cheese that I had shared a picture of and told me I needed to make his recipe instead. Once he shared the recipe with me, I asked if he'd mind if I shared it with the Southern Food Junkie family.

Thankfully, he said yes.

And I'm glad he did.

Trey's version combines sharp cheddar and smoked Gouda with cream cheese, Duke's mayonnaise, pimentos, and bacon. The smoked Gouda adds a great smoky flavor without overpowering the pimento cheese, while the bacon adds another savory layer.

Best of all, there's no cooking involved. Grate the cheese, mix everything together, and you're ready to dig in.

Why You'll Love This Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese

What I like most about this recipe is that it still tastes like pimento cheese. The smoked Gouda and bacon don't take over—they just give the familiar Southern spread a little something extra.

It's creamy, smoky, cheesy, and savory, with pieces of pimento and bacon throughout. And because it uses cream cheese spread along with mayonnaise, it has a rich, creamy consistency that's perfect for spreading on crackers or toasted bread.

It's also an easy appetizer you can make ahead of time, which makes it a good choice for church gatherings, holidays, parties, tailgates, game days, or just keeping in the refrigerator for snacking.

SFJ Tip: Don't judge the final consistency until you've mixed in all the freshly grated cheese. If it's thicker than you like, follow Trey's advice and mix in a little more mayonnaise.

Ingredients You'll Need

Ingredients for smoked Gouda pimento cheese with bacon.

One thing I like about this smoked Gouda pimento cheese recipe is the short ingredient list. You don't need a bunch of seasonings or add-ins to get plenty of flavor.

You'll need:

Sharp cheddar cheese: Trey says you can use pre-shredded cheddar if you want to save some time. I grated mine fresh.

Smoked Gouda: This is what separates this recipe from traditional pimento cheese. Smoked Gouda can be difficult to find already shredded, so plan on grating a block yourself.

Mayonnaise: Duke's, of course. We're making Southern pimento cheese here.

Cream cheese spread: Trey recommends using the cream cheese that comes in the tub rather than a block. It's softer and easier to mix.

Pimentos: A 4-ounce jar is just right. Drain off a little of the liquid, but you don't have to squeeze them completely dry.

Real bacon bits: Trey normally uses Oscar Mayer Real Bacon Bits. You can also fry and crumble your own bacon if you want to put in the extra work.

Onion powder and black pepper: Just enough seasoning to complement the cheeses without covering up their flavor.

The complete measurements are in the recipe card at the bottom of the post.

Why Smoked Gouda Works So Well in Pimento Cheese

Traditional Southern pimento cheese is generally built around cheddar cheese, mayonnaise, and pimentos. In this version, we're not getting rid of the sharp cheddar—we're replacing half of it with smoked Gouda.

That's important.

You still get the sharpness and familiar cheddar flavor you expect from pimento cheese, while the Gouda brings in that smoky flavor.

Then there's the bacon.

Bacon and smoked cheese already work well together, so adding bacon to the mixture makes this taste like an intentional variation rather than simply swapping one cheese for another.

And because the smoky flavor comes directly from the cheese, there's no need for liquid smoke or smoked paprika.

Grate the Cheese for the Best Texture

Blocks of smoked Gouda and sharp cheddar ready to be grated.

Trey told me that buying shredded sharp cheddar is perfectly fine for this recipe. The problem is finding shredded smoked Gouda.

You're probably going to have to grate that one yourself anyway.

I decided to grate both cheeses when I made it because I prefer to grate my cheese for the best taste and texture. I use a box grater to shred the cheese, and you can find the kitchen tools and brands I use and recommend on my Kitchen Essentials page.

Fresh smoked Gouda being grated on a box grater.

I like the texture you get from freshly grated cheese. More importantly, don't grate it so finely that it disappears into the spread. You want those little strands of cheese throughout the finished pimento cheese.

Freshly grated smoked Gouda and sharp cheddar cheese.

How to Make Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon

Making homemade pimento cheese couldn't be much easier.

1. Make the creamy pimento cheese base

In a large mixing bowl, combine the mayonnaise, softened cream cheese spread, onion powder, black pepper, pimentos, and bacon bits.

Cream cheese, mayonnaise, pimentos, bacon, and seasonings mixed in a bowl.

Mix everything together until the cream cheese and mayonnaise are combined and the pimentos and bacon are evenly distributed.

2. Grate and add the cheeses

Finely grate 8 ounces of smoked Gouda and 8 ounces of sharp cheddar.

Add both cheeses to the cream cheese and mayonnaise mixture.

Freshly grated Gouda and cheddar added to the pimento cheese mixture.

3. Mix everything together

Fold everything together until the cheeses are evenly coated with the creamy mixture and the pimentos and bacon are distributed throughout.

Homemade smoked Gouda pimento cheese after mixing.

Don't worry if it looks thicker than store-bought pimento cheese. That's easy to adjust.

If you'd like it creamier, add a little more mayonnaise and mix again until it's the consistency you prefer.

What Does Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese Taste Like?

The first thing you'll notice is the smoke from the Gouda, but this isn't an overwhelmingly smoky cheese spread.

The sharp cheddar still comes through, and the cream cheese and mayonnaise mellow everything out. Then you get little salty, savory bites of bacon and the mild sweetness of the pimentos.

Texture is a big part of this recipe, too. Because we're using grated cheese rather than trying to blend everything perfectly smooth, you can actually see and taste the individual strands of cheddar and Gouda.

That's how I would describe this recipe in one sentence:

Classic creamy Southern pimento cheese with a smoky, bacon-filled twist.

What to Serve With Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese

The easiest way to serve it is exactly how I photographed it: a bowl of pimento cheese surrounded by crackers and toasted bread.

But don't stop there.

Serve it with buttery crackers, toasted baguette slices or crostini, pretzels, celery sticks, or other fresh vegetables. You can also spread it onto a sandwich or use it anywhere you'd normally reach for pimento cheese.

And I'd absolutely try this stuff on a burger or my other favorite!

For a simple appetizer, though, put the bowl out with crackers and toasted bread and let everybody help themselves.

If you're putting together a Southern appetizer spread, serve this alongside my bacon-wrapped jalapeño poppers or slow cooker buffalo chicken dip. For another old-school Southern party favorite, you can't go wrong with homemade sausage balls.

Can You Make Pimento Cheese Ahead of Time?

Yes. In fact, this is the kind of recipe I like making ahead because you can mix it, cover it, refrigerate it, and have it ready when you need it.

Because the cheese spread firms up when it's cold, you may want to let it sit out briefly before serving so it's easier to scoop and spread.

Give it a stir before serving and check the consistency. If it's still thicker than you prefer, stir in a little additional mayonnaise.

How to Store Homemade Pimento Cheese

Keep the pimento cheese covered in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

Because this recipe contains dairy products and bacon, don't leave it sitting at room temperature for extended periods. For serving at parties or gatherings, put out what you expect people to eat and keep the remainder refrigerated.

I wouldn't freeze this one. Mayonnaise and cream cheese-based spreads can change texture after freezing and thawing, and this recipe is easy enough to make fresh.

More Southern Sandwich Spreads to Try

If you enjoy this Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon, I've got a few more Southern sandwich spreads worth trying. My Southern-Style Egg Salad Recipe is an easy classic that's great for sandwiches or crackers, while my Southern Tuna Salad Recipe is another simple lunch favorite.

And if you're looking for another twist on pimento cheese, don't miss my Jalapeño Pimento Cheese. It's creamy and tangy with sharp cheddar, pepper jack cheese, and pickled jalapeños that give it just the right amount of kick.

Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese FAQs

Can I use pre-shredded cheese?

Yes. Pre-shredded cheddar works fine in this recipe. Smoked Gouda is harder to find shredded, so you'll most likely need to grate it yourself. I grated both cheeses when I made mine and liked the texture.

Can I use regular Gouda instead of smoked Gouda?

You can, but you'll lose the smoky flavor that makes this particular recipe different. If you're making smoked Gouda pimento cheese, I'd stick with smoked Gouda.

Can I use fresh bacon instead of bacon bits?

Absolutely. Trey says his aunt has made it with cooked and crumbled bacon, and it's a nice touch. It just requires more work than opening a bag of real bacon bits.

Why is my pimento cheese too thick?

Different cheeses and mayonnaise amounts can affect the consistency. Trey's solution is simple: add a little more mayonnaise until it's as creamy as you want it.

Do I need to drain the pimentos?

Drain some of the liquid, but you don't need to get them completely dry. Trey intentionally leaves a little pimento juice in his recipe.

A Southern Classic With a Smoky Twist

I have a feeling this one is going to show up at more than a few gatherings around our house.

I love a recipe that comes with a story, and I especially love getting to share recipes that friends and family have passed along to me. So a big thank-you to my friend Trey Cauthen for sharing his Smoked Gouda Bacon Pimento Cheese recipe and letting me pass it along to the Southern Food Junkie family.

If you make it, let me know what you think in the comments. And I'm curious—which are you grabbing first: a cracker or a piece of toasted bread?

Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Total Time: 15 minutes

This easy Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon combines sharp cheddar, smoked Gouda, cream cheese, pimentos, mayonnaise, and bacon for a creamy, smoky twist on classic Southern pimento cheese.

No Ratings

Ingredients

8 ounces sharp cheddar cheese, shredded
8 ounces smoked Gouda cheese, finely grated
½ cup mayonnaise, plus more as needed
8 ounces cream cheese spread
¼ teaspoon onion powder
¼ teaspoon black pepper
1 (4-ounce) jar diced pimentos, lightly drained
1 (2.8-ounce) bag real bacon bits

Instructions

Add the mayonnaise, cream cheese spread, onion powder, black pepper, pimentos, and bacon bits to a large mixing bowl. Mix until well combined.
Finely grate the smoked Gouda and sharp cheddar cheese.
Add the grated cheeses to the mayonnaise mixture and fold together until evenly combined.
Check the consistency. If the pimento cheese is thicker than desired, stir in additional mayonnaise a little at a time.
Serve with crackers, toasted bread, or your favorite accompaniments, or cover and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Notes

Pre-shredded sharp cheddar can be used. Smoked Gouda is often difficult to find pre-shredded and may need to be grated by hand. Cooked and crumbled bacon can be substituted for real bacon bits.

Easy Instant Pot Pot Roast with Black Beans

September 11, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

This easy Instant Pot pot roast with black beans is tender, hearty, and packed with beef, beans, potatoes, carrots, celery, and onions. I created it as a high-protein meal prep for my work lunches, and it turned out so good that by day five, I still wasn't tired of eating it.

The black beans aren't something you normally find in a traditional pot roast, but that's what makes this recipe a little different. They add fiber and plant-based protein while soaking up all that flavorful broth from the roast.

Why I Made This Instant Pot Pot Roast

Recently, I've been meal planning my lunches each week. I'm doing it partly to save money because, as we all know, eating out is getting expensive.

But the bigger reason is that meal prepping gives me more control over what I eat and what goes into my food. I've been trying to eat better while getting more protein, vegetables, and fiber into my diet.

That's where the beans come in.

I Fell Down the BeanTok Rabbit Hole

Have you heard of BeanTok?

I fell down that rabbit hole recently. Haha! And now that you've read this, if you're on TikTok, I'm sure it'll probably start showing up in your feed.

Basically, there's a whole community of people talking about eating more beans and finding ways to incorporate them into everyday meals.

Beans are a source of fiber and plant-based protein, so they caught my attention. Instead of just eating beans as a side dish, I started thinking about different ways I could add them to meals I already enjoy.

That's ultimately what led to this recipe.

How This Beef and Black Beans Recipe Came Together

When it came time to meal prep my lunches for the week, I started looking around the kitchen to see what I already had.

I had a 2.5-pound chuck roast, a can of black beans, baby carrots, celery, onions, and some baby potatoes my wife had bought me the week before.

That's when I thought, why not throw all of this together and see what happens?

I wanted plenty of protein from the beef, more fiber and protein from the black beans, lots of vegetables, and just enough potatoes to make it still feel like a traditional pot roast.

I pulled out the Instant Pot and started experimenting.

The result was this easy Instant Pot pot roast with black beans, and it made the perfect amount for five work lunches.

Why You'll Love This Recipe

One of the things I like most about this meal is how practical it is. It's made with simple ingredients you can find at just about any grocery store, and the Instant Pot does most of the work.

It's also filling. You've got tender chuck roast, black beans, vegetables, and a few potatoes all in one bowl.

If you're looking for high-protein Instant Pot recipes that also work well for meal prep, this is one I'd put on the list.

Ingredients You'll Need

For this Instant Pot pot roast, you'll need a chuck roast, black beans, baby potatoes, carrots, celery, onion, beef broth (you can use chicken broth if that is what you have), Worcestershire sauce, and a few simple seasonings. I also like adding a little tomato paste and Dijon mustard for extra flavor.

I used a 2.5-pound boneless chuck roast for this recipe, which gave me enough for five meal-prep lunches. You'll find the exact measurements in the printable recipe card below.

Why Add Black Beans to Pot Roast?

I'll admit that black beans aren't exactly a traditional pot roast ingredient.

But hear me out.

Black beans have a fairly mild flavor, so they work surprisingly well with the beef and vegetables. They soak up some of that rich cooking liquid without taking away from the pot roast flavor.

They're also an easy way to add more fiber to the meal. I've been looking for ways to make more high-fiber meals, and adding beans to foods I'm already cooking has become one of the easiest ways for me to do it.

If you're trying to eat more beans, you don't necessarily have to start making completely different meals. Look at meals you already enjoy and see where beans might fit.

Pot roast with black beans, baby potatoes, carrots and celery

If you like hearty meals that combine beef and beans, try my Easy Slow Cooker Beef & Bean Chili, too. It's another filling recipe that's great when you want leftovers for another meal.

What Cut of Beef Is Best for Instant Pot Pot Roast?

I used a 2.5-pound boneless chuck roast for this recipe.

Chuck roast works especially well for pot roast because the longer cooking time helps it become tender and easy to pull apart.

I cut mine into three or four large pieces before cooking. That gives you more surface area for seasoning and browning and also helps the beef cook evenly in the Instant Pot.

Chuck roast cut into large pieces for Instant Pot pot roast

Should You Brown a Chuck Roast Before Pressure Cooking?

You don't absolutely have to brown a chuck roast before pressure cooking it, but I recommend it.

Browning the beef first gives you more flavor, especially from the browned bits that collect on the bottom of the Instant Pot.

When you add the broth, scrape those bits from the bottom and incorporate them into the cooking liquid. Just make sure the bottom of the pot is scraped clean before pressure cooking so you don't trigger the Instant Pot's burn warning.

How Long Do You Cook a 2.5-Pound Chuck Roast in the Instant Pot?

For the 2.5-pound chuck roast I used in this recipe, 50 minutes on High Pressure followed by a 15-minute natural pressure release worked well.

After the 15-minute natural release, I released the remaining pressure. The beef was tender and pulled apart easily.

Keep in mind that the size and thickness of your roast can affect cooking time. I cut mine into three or four large pieces rather than pressure cooking the roast whole.

The complete cooking directions are included in the recipe card below.

Should You Cook the Potatoes and Carrots With the Roast?

I don't recommend cooking the potatoes and carrots for the entire 50 minutes with the chuck roast. By the time the beef is tender, your vegetables could be way overcooked.

Instead, I cook the beef first and add the baby potatoes, carrots, and celery afterward.

This also lets you control the tenderness of the vegetables without affecting the beef.

How Long Do Potatoes and Carrots Take in the Instant Pot?

This is one part of the recipe I changed after actually making it.

I originally gave the vegetables 4 minutes on High Pressure, thinking that would be enough after the pot was already hot. It wasn't.

My potatoes and carrots were still hard. I left them sitting in the hot broth on Keep Warm, and it took nearly two hours before they finally started getting as tender as I wanted.

Because of that test, I increased the vegetable cooking time to 8 minutes on High Pressure followed by a quick release.

If you're using larger baby potatoes, cut them in half so they cook more evenly.

When Should You Add Black Beans to Pot Roast?

Add the canned black beans after pressure cooking is finished.

Canned black beans are already cooked, so they don't need another round under pressure. I drain and rinse them, stir them into the hot pot roast, and let them warm in the broth for about 5 to 10 minutes.

That heats the beans and gives them a chance to pick up some of the flavor without cooking them until they're mushy.

Black beans mixed with tender Instant Pot pot roast and vegetables.

An Easy High-Protein Meal Prep for Work

This is really why I made the recipe in the first place.

My 2.5-pound chuck roast made five good-sized lunches, which was exactly what I needed for the workweek.

I divided the beef and black beans among five meal-prep containers and added carrots, celery, onions, and a few baby potatoes to each one.

One tip: add some of the cooking liquid to every container.

That broth helps keep the chuck roast moist when you reheat it and gives the meal an almost beef-stew-like consistency.

Most importantly, this passed my meal-prep test.

By Friday, I was eating this for the fifth day in a row and still wasn't tired of it.

That's when I decided I needed to share the recipe.

If you're looking for another beef recipe that reheats well for lunch, my Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie is another good one to add to your meal-prep rotation.

Is This a Low-Carb Pot Roast?

I wouldn't call this a low-carb recipe.

Black beans, carrots, onions, and potatoes all contain carbohydrates. My goal wasn't to eliminate carbs but to build a filling lunch around protein, fiber, vegetables, and reasonable portions.

I use fewer potatoes than I normally would in a traditional pot roast and let the beef, beans, and vegetables make up most of the meal.

If you want fewer carbs, you can reduce the number of potatoes and add more non-starchy vegetables.

Personally, I'd keep the black beans. Finding ways to eat more beans was one of the reasons I created the recipe in the first place.

Can I Use Chicken Broth Instead of Beef Broth?

Absolutely. I originally planned to make this pot roast with beef broth, but when I started cooking, I realized I didn't have any on hand. I did have chicken broth, so that's what I used.

The chicken broth worked great and still gave me a flavorful cooking liquid for the beef and vegetables. If you have beef broth, you can certainly use it for a slightly richer beef flavor, but don't be afraid to use chicken broth as I did.

How to Store Pot Roast for Meal Prep

Allow the pot roast to cool before transferring it to airtight containers and refrigerating it.

I portion mine into individual containers with the beef, beans, potatoes, and vegetables together. I also spoon some of the broth into every container to help keep the beef moist when reheated.

Reheat each serving until it's hot throughout.

If you're planning to freeze the pot roast, keep in mind that potatoes can change texture somewhat after freezing and thawing.

Easy Instant Pot Pot Roast Recipe

The complete ingredient amounts and step-by-step directions are in the recipe card below.

Easy Instant Pot Pot Roast with Black Beans

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Cook Time: 1 hour 10 minutes

Additional Time: 15 minutes

Total Time: 1 hour 40 minutes

No Ratings

Ingredients

2.5 lb Boneless Chuck Roast
1 tablespoon Olive Oil
1 ½ teaspoons Salt
1 ½ teaspoons Garlic Powder
1 teaspoon Black Pepper
1 teaspoon Onion Powder
1 teaspoon Smoked Paprika
1 teaspoon Dried Thyme
½ teaspoon Dried Rosemary
1 Large Onion Chopped
1 ½ cups of low-sodium beef broth (chicken broth may be substituted)
1 tablespoon Worcestershire Sauce
1 tablespoon tomato paste
1 teaspoon of Dijon mustard, optional
12-15 baby potatoes
1 lb of baby carrots
4 celery stalks
1 (15 ounce) can of black beans, drained and rinsed

Instructions

Prepare the chuck roast. Cut the roast into 3–4 large pieces and pat dry with paper towels.
Season the beef. Combine the salt, garlic powder, black pepper, onion powder, and smoked paprika. Season the chuck roast generously on all sides.
Brown the chuck roast. Set the Instant Pot to Sauté and add the olive oil. Once hot, brown the beef for about 2–3 minutes per side. Work in batches if needed. Remove the browned beef and set aside.
Sauté the onion. Add the chopped onion to the Instant Pot and cook for about 2 minutes, stirring occasionally.
Deglaze the pot. Pour in the beef broth and use a wooden spoon to scrape up all the browned bits from the bottom of the pot. Make sure the bottom is clean to help prevent a burn warning.
Build the cooking liquid. Stir in the Worcestershire sauce, tomato paste and Dijon mustard, if using, along with the dried thyme and rosemary.
Pressure cook the beef. Return the chuck roast to the Instant Pot. Secure the lid, set the valve to Sealing, and cook on High Pressure for 50 minutes.
Natural release. When the cooking time is complete, allow the pressure to release naturally for 15 minutes. Carefully release any remaining pressure and open the lid.
Add the vegetables. Add the baby potatoes, carrots, and celery to the pot. Cut any larger baby potatoes in half so they cook evenly.
Pressure cook the vegetables. Secure the lid again and cook on High Pressure for 8 minutes. When finished, carefully perform a quick release.
Add the black beans. Stir in the drained and rinsed black beans. Leave the Instant Pot on Keep Warm for 5–10 minutes, or until the beans are heated through.
Serve. Break the tender chuck roast into large pieces or shred it, then serve with the black beans, potatoes, carrots, celery, and some of the cooking liquid spooned over the top.

Notes

I tested this recipe using a 2.5-pound boneless chuck roast cut into several large pieces. The 50-minute pressure cook followed by a 15-minute natural release worked well for getting the beef tender.

When I first tested the vegetables, I pressure-cooked them for 4 minutes, but the potatoes and carrots were still too firm. I increased the second pressure cook to 8 minutes, which worked much better.

I used low-sodium chicken broth because that's what I had on hand, but beef broth is what I recommend.

Add the black beans after pressure cooking. Since canned black beans are already cooked, they only need enough time in the hot broth to warm through.

For meal prep, this made five good-sized work lunches for me. Spoon some of the cooking liquid into each container to help keep the beef moist when reheating.

More Easy Meal Prep Recipes

You can also browse all of my Meal Prep Recipes for more ideas to help make planning your week easier.

Final Thoughts

This recipe started because I was trying to save some money, meal plan my work lunches, eat more protein, and find ways to add more beans and fiber to my diet.

I grabbed what I already had—a chuck roast, black beans, vegetables, and some baby potatoes—and let the Instant Pot do most of the work.

Five lunches later, I still wasn't tired of it.

For me, that's about as good an endorsement for a meal-prep recipe as you can get.

If you're looking for an easy Instant Pot pot roast that's a little different from the traditional version, give the black beans a try. You might just find yourself adding beans to a lot more meals, too.

Best Restaurants in Maggie Valley, NC: My Favorite Places to Eat

September 4, 2026 by Ronnie Williams 2 Comments

I love Maggie Valley. Visiting this little mountain town takes me back to a simpler time and place that I don't really feel anywhere else. It doesn't matter if I visit in the spring, summer, fall, or even winter; I always feel at peace here.

Over the years, I've also found some of the best restaurants in Maggie Valley, NC, and many of them have become just as much a part of our trips as the mountains themselves.

If you're looking for…	My pick
Breakfast	Joey's Pancake House
Lunch	Maggie Valley Sandwich Shop
Barbecue	Pop's Butts on the Creek
Italian	Frankie's Italian Trattoria
Steak	J. Arthur's Restaurant
Old-fashioned breakfast	Maggie Valley Restaurant
Pizza	BrickHouse Burgers & Pizza

Where to Eat in Maggie Valley, NC

That's what this guide is all about.

These are some of my favorite restaurants in Maggie Valley, based on places I've personally eaten over the years. This isn't meant to be a ranking of every restaurant in town. Instead, it's a collection of places that I've enjoyed and would recommend to someone visiting the valley.

This will also be a living guide. Restaurants come and go, and I'm always finding somewhere else to eat, so I'll continue adding restaurants and more detailed reviews as I make my way around Maggie Valley.

If you're planning a trip and want ideas for what to do between meals, I also have a complete guide to my favorite things to do in Maggie Valley, NC, including scenic drives, waterfalls, hiking, shopping, and some of the attractions my family and I enjoy visiting.

Joey's Pancake House

Address: 4309 Soco Rd, Maggie Valley, NC 28751

If I had to pick the restaurant that I associate most with Maggie Valley, it would probably be Joey's Pancake House.

I honestly couldn't tell you how many times I've eaten here over the years. It's one of those places that has become part of our Maggie Valley tradition.

Joey's Pancake House sign in Maggie Valley, NC

And here's something else I always tell people: I think Joey's has the best regular cup of restaurant coffee in the area. There's nothing fancy about it. It's just a good cup of coffee that goes perfectly with a mountain breakfast.

Eating breakfast at Joey's Pancake House during our trip to Maggie Valley, NC.

Although Joey's changed ownership a while back, I think the new owners have done a great job of keeping that tradition alive. The food still tastes the way I remember it, and it still has that classic Maggie Valley breakfast experience that keeps us coming back.

I've eaten here enough times that Joey's deserves more than a couple of paragraphs in a roundup, so I wrote an entire article about it.

Read my full Joey's Pancake House, Maggie Valley, NC review →

Maggie Valley Sandwich Shop

If you're looking for a good place to grab lunch in Maggie Valley, Maggie Valley Sandwich Shop is definitely worth checking out.

My son Bentley and I were spending some time together in Maggie Valley on a father-son trip while my wife and one of our daughters were over in Pigeon Forge for a women's retreat with our church.

While we were in town, we decided to give Maggie Valley Sandwich Shop a try, and I'm glad we did.

They're known for their pressed sandwiches, and they also have some really good sides to go along with them. We both enjoyed our meal, and it's the kind of place I'd recommend if you're looking for something a little different from the usual burger or barbecue while visiting Maggie Valley.

One of my favorite things about traveling is finding little local places like this, especially when I get to share the experience with one of my kids.

I plan to put together a full review of Maggie Valley Sandwich Shop soon, including more details about what we ordered, pictures of the food, and our overall experience.

Until then, if you're looking for a tasty lunch in Maggie Valley, this is one place I'd suggest giving a try. Keep an eye out for our full Southern Food Junkie review!

Pop's Butts on the Creek

Address: 1584 Soco Rd, Maggie Valley, NC 28751

When I'm in Maggie Valley and craving barbecue, Pop's Butts on the Creek is one of my go-to spots.

I've eaten here many times over the years, and I've always enjoyed the barbecue. I've only ever ordered the chopped barbecue, but that's because I like it enough that I have a hard time ordering anything else.

The pork has great flavor, stays moist, and, to me, one of the signs of good barbecue is being able to eat the meat without covering it in sauce. I can do that here.

The sides have always been good too, making it a solid choice when you're looking for barbecue without leaving Maggie Valley.

I eventually want to go back, take more pictures, try a few more things, and write a full article about Pop's Butts on the Creek. Until then, it definitely deserves a spot on my list of favorite places to eat in Maggie Valley.

If you’re planning to stop by, you can check out Pop’s Butts on the Creek online for their menu, hours, and more information.

Frankie's Italian Trattoria

Address: 1037 Soco Rd, Maggie Valley, NC 28751

If you're craving Italian food in Maggie Valley, Frankie's Italian Trattoria is one of my favorites.

I've eaten here twice, and both times I ordered the chicken Parmesan. I know I should probably branch out and try something different next time, but it's hard when something is that good.

The sauce is amazing, and I really like the cheese they use on the chicken Parmesan. Everything just works together.

One thing you need to know about Frankie's is that it can get crowded. We've found that getting there early is usually a good idea because this is a popular place.

There's a reason people keep coming back, though. Based on my experiences here, Frankie's has earned a permanent spot on my Maggie Valley restaurant list.

If Italian food sounds good while you’re in the valley, check out Frankie’s Italian Trattoria for their menu and current hours.

J. Arthur's Restaurant

Address: 2843 Soco Rd, Maggie Valley, NC 28751

J. Arthur's is another Maggie Valley restaurant we've eaten at many times.

When I'm in Maggie Valley and I'm in the mood for a steak, this is usually where I'm headed.

Steak isn't the only option, though. Their menu also includes dishes like ribs, chicken Marsala, chicken Parmesan, and even North Carolina rainbow trout, so there's a pretty good variety if everyone in your group isn't looking for the same thing.

For me, though, J. Arthur's has always been one of those dependable local places where I know I can go for a good steak while we're in town.

It's another restaurant I plan to cover in more depth on a future visit.

You can check out J. Arthur’s Restaurant to see their current menu and hours before you go.

Maggie Valley Restaurant

Address: 2804 Soco Rd, Maggie Valley, NC 28751

Maggie Valley Restaurant is another place I've eaten at quite a few times over the years, although I've only been here for breakfast.

It has been a while since my last visit, but I always enjoyed eating here.

This is more of the traditional breakfast I grew up eating: eggs, bacon, grits, omelets, French toast, pancakes, and the other familiar breakfast favorites.

That's part of what I like about places like this. Sometimes you don't need anything complicated. You just want to sit down and eat a good old-fashioned breakfast before heading out to explore the mountains.

I don't know who owns the restaurant today, so I won't comment on the current ownership, but based on my past experiences, Maggie Valley Restaurant remains one of the places I'd consider for breakfast when I'm in town.

If you’re thinking about stopping in for breakfast, check out Maggie Valley Restaurant for their current hours and information.

BrickHouse Burgers & Pizza

Address: 3914 Soco Rd, Maggie Valley, NC 28751

Sometimes when we're visiting Maggie Valley, especially during college football season in the fall, we don't want a big night out.

We want to grab some food, head back to wherever we're staying, turn on a football game, and relax.

That's where BrickHouse comes in.

We've ordered pizza from here quite a few times and have also eaten inside a time or two. The pizza has always been good, which is why we've continued going back.

They serve other food as well, but so far I've only had the pizza, so that's all I can personally recommend.

Like several popular Maggie Valley restaurants, BrickHouse can get pretty crowded. But if we're looking for pizza—especially something to take back and eat while watching a game—it's one of our regular choices.

If you’re in the mood for pizza while you’re in town, check out BrickHouse Burgers & Pizza for their menu and current hours.

Why Maggie Valley Is So Special to Me

I've been coming to Maggie Valley since some of my earliest childhood memories. I was around four years old on my first trip. I don't remember much about it, but I do remember my parents buying me a stuffed bear and staying at a motel across a creek. That motel is still there today, although now it's known as the Route 19 Inn.

As I've gotten older, Maggie Valley has become even more special to me. I come back to relive those childhood memories, but I've also made plenty of new ones here. My wife and I started visiting after we got married, and we made trips here with my mom and dad because they loved Maggie Valley too.

I still enjoy riding by the old Ghost Town in the Sky property and thinking about what it was like when we could actually go up the mountain and spend the day there. I was even fortunate enough to visit one last time when the park reopened in 2007.

Ghost Town in the Sky in Maggie Valley, North Carolina

There's just something about Maggie Valley that keeps calling me back.

Of course, one of my favorite things to do while I'm here is eat. Haha.

What About Restaurants Near Maggie Valley?

One of the great things about staying in Maggie Valley is that you're also just a short drive from Waynesville.

We almost always make our way over there at least once while we're visiting. Downtown Waynesville is fun to walk around; there are plenty of shops to explore, and there are some excellent places to eat.

If you've got several days in the area and don't mind making the short drive, check out my guide to the Best Restaurants in Waynesville, NC. I've personally visited the restaurants on that list, and it's a great companion to this Maggie Valley guide if you're trying to decide where to eat during a Western North Carolina trip.

More Maggie Valley Restaurants Are Coming

This list isn't finished—and I don't really want it to be.

Maggie Valley has been part of my life since I was a kid, and I don't see myself stopping my trips here anytime soon. I'll continue adding to this list of the best restaurants in Maggie Valley, NC as we try new places and revisit some of our old favorites.

Some of the restaurants listed above will eventually get their own full Southern Food Junkie articles. When they do, I'll link those detailed reviews here so you can see more pictures, what we ordered, and what we thought about the experience.

For now, these are some of the places that have become part of our Maggie Valley memories.

And that's really what I love about this town.

It's not just Ghost Town, the mountains, the Blue Ridge Parkway, or even the food. It's remembering coming here with my parents, returning with my wife, making new memories, and somehow still feeling a connection to the little boy who came here all those years ago carrying a stuffed bear.

If you're planning your own trip, be sure to check out my guide to Things to Do in Maggie Valley, North Carolina, for more of our favorite places and activities around the valley.

And, of course, come hungry.

Let's Get Food Junked!

Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, NC: Texas-Style BBQ in the Mountains

August 31, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

We love visiting Western North Carolina any chance we get, whether it's to escape the hot, humid South Carolina weather or to see the fall colors in the mountains. I've been coming to this area since I was little, and now we typically visit once or twice a year.

A few weeks ago, Jess, our three kids, my mom, and I headed back to the mountains for a quick getaway. What started as a day trip to eat at one of our favorite breakfast spots in Maggie Valley turned into an overnight stay in Waynesville.

Back in 2017, I wrote about some of the best restaurants in Waynesville, NC, and several readers told me I needed to try Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, NC, so on this trip, we finally decided to see what all the fuss was about.

So, we headed to Haywood Smokehouse to try it for ourselves.

Our Visit to Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, NC

As soon as we pulled up to Haywood Smokehouse, something about the place looked familiar.

Front entrance and sign at Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, North Carolina

Then it hit me.

Jess and I had eaten at a restaurant in this same location sometime around 2007 or 2008. I couldn't remember what it was called back then or much about the meal, but I definitely recognized the building.

Since I didn't remember much else about it, I figured this would basically be a new experience anyway. Let's give Haywood Smokehouse a try!

Location and Parking

Haywood Smokehouse is located in the Hazelwood district of Waynesville. The restaurant is inside an old house in what feels like a residential neighborhood, which gives it a completely different feel from your typical barbecue restaurant.

Haywood Smokehouse
79 Elysinia Ave
Waynesville, NC 28786

See Map for more details:

There's ample parking behind the restaurant, but when we pulled in, the parking lot was already filling up — and we had arrived fairly early.

Side view of Haywood Smokehouse showing the restaurant and sign in Waynesville, NC

That's usually a pretty good sign!

There was also another house next door that appeared to be used by Haywood Smokehouse. As soon as we got out of the car, I could smell hickory smoke drifting through the air.

If I wasn't hungry before, I sure was then!

Wait Time and Seating

We added our names to the waitlist and grabbed some chairs outside.

We sat around talking until our name was called, which took about 20 minutes. Considering how busy they were, I didn't think that was bad at all.

Haywood Smokehouse has both indoor and outdoor seating. Once our table was ready, we headed inside and were seated in a booth.

Atmosphere and Service

One of the things I really liked about the Waynesville location was the atmosphere.

Since the restaurant is inside an old house, it has a comfortable, homey feel. It's casual and laid-back, which is exactly the kind of atmosphere I like in a barbecue joint.

Dining room inside Haywood Smokehouse with tables and booths in the old-house restaurant

There are booths and tables throughout the restaurant, and it felt very family-friendly. We had three kids with us and felt right at home.

Our waitress greeted us quickly, brought out the menus, and took our drink orders.

The service was great throughout our visit. Everyone was friendly, and despite the restaurant being busy, we never felt like we were waiting a long time for anything.

What Kind of BBQ Does Haywood Smokehouse Serve?

Haywood Smokehouse is known for its Texas-style brisket, but brisket isn't the only thing you'll find on the menu.

They also serve barbecue favorites such as chopped pork, dry-rubbed ribs, smoked turkey, andouille sausage, and other smoked meats, along with a variety of traditional barbecue sides.

I probably should have ordered the brisket since that's one of the things they're known for.

But I had ribs on my mind.

And when I get ribs on my mind, it's pretty hard to talk me out of them!

What We Ordered at Haywood Smokehouse

I ordered a half slab of dry-rubbed ribs with collard greens and mac and cheese.

Jess and all three of our kids ordered the chopped pork.

The food came out fairly quickly, and everything smelled awesome when it hit the table.

Dry-Rubbed Ribs

The ribs were easily the highlight of the meal for me.

The dry rub was peppery and slightly spicy with just a little sweetness to balance everything out. It had enough flavor that I ate most of the ribs without adding any barbecue sauce.

That's usually a good sign!

The texture was also just the way I like my ribs.

The meat came away from the bone easily with just a slight bite and pull, but it wasn't so tender that everything fell off the bone when you picked up a rib.

To me, that's about perfect.

The ribs also had a nice smoke ring and weren't dry at all.

Close-up of a dry-rubbed rib showing the smoke ring at Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville

I eventually added some of Haywood Smokehouse's ketchup-based barbecue sauce to a few pieces, and it paired really well with the dry rub.

I'd definitely order these ribs again.

Collard Greens

The collard greens were another standout.

They had plenty of flavor and went really well with the smoked ribs. Of the sides I tried during our visit, the collard greens were my favorite.

Mac and Cheese

The mac and cheese was probably the only thing I ordered that didn't quite hit the mark for me.

It was noodles in a cheese sauce, and something about it just wasn't my favorite.

That's completely personal preference, though, and it certainly wouldn't stop me from coming back.

I'd just try a different side next time.

Chopped Pork

Jess and all three of our kids ordered the chopped pork, and everyone seemed to really enjoy their meals.

I didn't eat enough of their food to give you a detailed review of the chopped pork, so I'll leave that judgment to them.

What I can tell you is nobody at our table left hungry!

BBQ Sauces at Haywood Smokehouse

If you're somebody who likes trying different barbecue sauces, Haywood Smokehouse gives you plenty of choices.

They have the familiar styles you'd expect, including ketchup-based, mustard-based, and vinegar-based sauces.

They also have some more unique flavors, including Strawberry Chipotle, a hot SOB sauce made with habanero and jalapeño peppers, and Chipotle Ranch.

I didn't try all of them on this visit, but I plan on changing that next time.

I mainly used the ketchup-based sauce because that's the style I prefer with ribs. It had a unique flavor of its own and paired nicely with the peppery dry rub.

What Should You Order at Haywood Smokehouse?

If this is your first visit, you may want to consider the Texas-style brisket since that's one of the meats Haywood Smokehouse is known for.

I can't personally tell you how good the brisket is yet because I didn't order it.

That's one mistake I plan on correcting on my next visit!

If you want to sample several different meats, I'd consider trying a combination of brisket, pork, and either ribs or sausage.

Based strictly on what I personally ate, though, I can definitely recommend the dry-rubbed ribs.

The ribs were the star of my meal, the collard greens were my favorite side, and I enjoyed the ketchup-based barbecue sauce with the ribs.

How Expensive Is Haywood Smokehouse?

I thought the prices at Haywood Smokehouse were right in line with what I'd expect from a good barbecue restaurant — maybe even slightly less than some places we've visited.

At the time of our visit, my half slab of ribs was $20.99 and came with two sides.

For the amount of food I received, I thought that was a good deal.

The portion sizes were what I'd expect from a barbecue restaurant. I left completely full and still had food left over.

Of course, restaurant prices can change, so I'd recommend checking the current Haywood Smokehouse menu before your visit.

Things to Know Before Visiting Haywood Smokehouse

If you're planning to eat at Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, here are a few things I learned from our visit.

Get There Early

I'd recommend getting there early, especially if you're visiting on a weekend.

We arrived fairly early and the parking lot was already filling up. Our wait was only around 20 minutes, but I could see the wait getting longer during peak dinner hours.

Parking

There's parking behind the restaurant. Even though it was busy when we arrived, we were able to find a spot without a problem.

Indoor and Outdoor Seating

Haywood Smokehouse offers both indoor and outdoor seating.

We ate inside during our visit and were seated in a booth.

Is Haywood Smokehouse Family-Friendly?

Based on our experience, absolutely.

We visited with our three kids, my mom, Jess, and me, and the casual atmosphere worked great for our family.

This isn't a place where you need to get dressed up. Come hungry and ready to eat some barbecue.

Taking a bite of a dry-rubbed rib during our visit to Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, NC

Check the Current Hours

I always recommend checking the restaurant's website for current hours before making a special trip.

Hours can change depending on the season, holidays, or other circumstances, so it's better to check before heading out.

Is Haywood Smokehouse Worth Visiting?

In my opinion, yes.

I'd definitely go back to Haywood Smokehouse, and I'm already looking forward to trying more of the menu.

The service was friendly, the restaurant had a relaxed and homey atmosphere, and smelling that hickory smoke in the air before we even walked through the door was a pretty good way to start the experience.

But the ribs and collard greens were what really stood out to me.

The ribs had a unique peppery dry rub that I really enjoyed, and the tenderness was right where I like it — tender enough to pull cleanly from the bone without simply falling apart.

Now I understand why so many people recommended Haywood Smokehouse in the comments of my original Waynesville restaurant article.

It just took me a few years to finally listen to them!

If you're visiting Waynesville, Maggie Valley, or traveling through Western North Carolina and love good barbecue, Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, NC is definitely a restaurant I'd add to your list of places to try.

And next time?

I'm getting that brisket!

More Places to Eat in Waynesville, NC

Haywood Smokehouse is just one of several restaurants we’ve visited around Waynesville over the years. If you’re in the mood for homestyle Southern food instead of barbecue, Clyde’s Restaurant is another local spot we’ve really enjoyed. I had the open-faced roast beef with mashed potatoes and gravy on our visit, and those homemade rolls were hard to forget.

If you’re planning a trip to the area and looking for even more places to eat, check out our guide to the Best Restaurants in Waynesville, NC for more of our favorite local restaurants.

More Places to Eat Near Waynesville

If you're spending a few days in the area, Maggie Valley is just a short drive from Waynesville and is another place we love visiting when we're in Western North Carolina.

I've eaten at quite a few restaurants there over the years, including places for breakfast, barbecue, Italian food, pizza, and steaks. If you're looking for more places to eat while you're in the area, check out my guide to the Best Restaurants in Maggie Valley, NC.

Let's get food junked!

Rainbow Springs State Park: A Florida Hidden Gem

August 19, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Sometimes the best places you visit are the ones you never planned on visiting in the first place.

Back in March, my wife and I were headed to Florida for an anniversary cruise. Instead of driving the entire way in one shot, we decided to stop for the night in Dunnellon, Florida.

While we were in Dunnellon, we also stopped by Ellianos Coffee for a cup of coffee, one of a few local places we got to check out during our short stay.

Neither of us knew much about Dunnellon, so naturally, we started looking around to see what there was to do nearby. That's when we stumbled across Rainbow Springs State Park.

The pictures online looked incredible. Crystal-clear water, lush Florida vegetation, waterfalls, and hiking trails—it looked like our kind of place.

Both of us love being outdoors, hiking and exploring somewhere new, so we figured, why not?

What we didn't realize was just how interesting Rainbow Springs State Park would be.

And I'll go ahead and tell you this: the pictures don't do this place justice.

Where Is Rainbow Springs State Park?

Rainbow Springs State Park is located in Dunnellon, Florida, northwest of Orlando and west of Ocala.

The main headsprings entrance is located at:

19158 SW 81st Place Road
Dunnellon, FL 34432

This is the entrance you'll want if you're coming to see the famous springs, gardens, waterfalls, swimming area, and hiking trails.

One important thing to know when planning a visit is that Rainbow Springs State Park has separate entrances for different activities. The campground and tubing area are not at the same location as the main headsprings entrance.

Our First Impression of Rainbow Springs State Park

When we first arrived at Rainbow Springs State Park in Dunnellon, we drove down what seemed like a pretty long road toward the parking area.

There wasn't much to see at first.

I'll admit, we were starting to wonder if this place was going to be a letdown.

Boy, were we wrong.

After parking, one of the first things we noticed was that we weren't exactly dressed like everyone else.

Remember, we had left South Carolina that morning in March. We were wearing pants.

Meanwhile, people walking into the park were wearing shorts and bathing suits.

It was definitely warmer in Florida, but swimming wasn't really on our agenda. We had come to explore.

So we started walking toward the signs for the springs.

Our First Look at the Rainbow Springs Headwaters

The first thing we came across was a small pond, which was pretty cool, but it still didn't prepare us for what was ahead.

We continued down the path, crossed the hill, and passed by the building.

That's when we saw it.

Below us was this absolutely beautiful body of water filled with shades of turquoise, blue, and green.

It's hard to describe exactly what that water looks like.

Honestly, it's one of those sights you just have to see in person.

This is the headsprings area of the Rainbow River. The crystal-clear spring water bubbling up here eventually becomes the Rainbow River, which flows through Dunnellon before joining the Withlacoochee River.

Later that evening, we actually ate at a really cool restaurant called Swampy's along the Rainbow River—but I'll save that experience for another blog post.

We Stumbled Into the History of Rainbow Springs

From the overlook, we hung a left and followed a concrete walkway.

At this point, we really didn't know where we were going or what was supposed to be down this path.

That's part of what made it fun.

The walkway took us through beautiful Florida vegetation and past what appeared to be springs and several waterfalls.

But something didn't quite add up.

The waterfalls looked almost too perfect.

That's when I started wondering:

Was Rainbow Springs some kind of tourist attraction in the past?

Turns out, it was.

According to Florida State Parks, Rainbow Springs has a fascinating history. The area was once mined for phosphate, and piles of leftover phosphate material helped form some of the hills you see today.

Later, the property was transformed into a private tourist attraction. Waterfalls were constructed over some of those old phosphate tailings, and the attraction eventually included gardens, a zoo, a rodeo, and even a monorail.

Suddenly, everything we were looking at started making sense.

The Rainbow Springs State Park Waterfalls

The Rainbow Springs State Park waterfalls are one of the most interesting parts of the park because they look like they should naturally belong there.

But they're actually man-made.

The waterfalls date back to Rainbow Springs' days as a roadside tourist attraction, and today you can still walk through the gardens and see several of them.

With all the tropical-looking vegetation growing around the rocks and water, it's easy to forget you're looking at something people created decades ago.

In a strange way, I think knowing the history makes them even more interesting.

They're remnants of an entirely different era of Florida tourism.

Remnants of the Old Rainbow Springs Attraction

We kept following the path to the left and eventually entered an area that looked like it had once contained animal pens.

Again, curiosity got the best of us.

After looking into it, we discovered that the old Rainbow Springs attraction once had a zoo featuring animals such as deer, foxes, and otters.

There were also remnants of the area's phosphate mining days and what appeared to be an old fort or stone structure.

The more we walked, the more this place surprised us.

What started as a stop to see a pretty Florida spring had turned into a combination of nature, hiking, and Florida history.

Then we found the hiking trail.

Naturally, I said, "Let's do it."

Hiking at Rainbow Springs State Park

The trail we picked was around two miles, which sounded perfect.

The last time we visited the Orlando area, we found another park with hiking trails and came across a coral snake right beside the trail. It was the first one I'd ever seen in the wild, and I actually caught the encounter on video if you want to see the coral snake we found while hiking in Florida.

That was the first one I'd ever seen in the wild, and seeing something like that in its natural habitat was pretty awesome.

So naturally, I was wondering what we might find this time.

Unfortunately—or fortunately, depending on how you feel about snakes—we didn't see any snakes on this hike.

But I really enjoyed the trail.

The terrain was mostly flat and reminded me a lot of the Sandhills region back home in South Carolina.

There were longleaf pines, sandy trails, oaks, and other hardwoods.

The trail meandered through the pines and woods before occasionally popping out along open fields and meadows.

It was peaceful.

One of my favorite parts was simply listening to all the birds as we walked.

If you enjoy hiking without needing a strenuous mountain trail, this is a great place for it.

Rainbow Springs State Park actually has several miles of unpaved nature trails, so you could spend quite a bit of time exploring beyond the gardens and springs.

Back to the Springs

Eventually, our trail loop brought us back around to where we had started.

From there, we finished exploring the gardens and the rest of the man-made waterfalls.

The pathway eventually worked its way back down toward that incredible turquoise water we had seen from above.

By this point, there were plenty of people swimming.

Keep in mind—this was March.

Coming from South Carolina that morning, swimming wasn't exactly the first thing on our minds.

But the water was so clear and inviting that I could understand why everyone else was in it.

The water at Rainbow Springs stays around 72 degrees year-round, so while it may feel chilly when you first jump in, people swim here throughout much of the year.

Looking out across that clear water, it finally clicked that we were standing at the beginning of the Rainbow River.

And that makes this place even more impressive.

Things to Do in Rainbow Springs State Park

There's a lot more to Rainbow Springs State Park than simply walking down to look at the water.

Whether you're coming for a couple of hours or spending several days around Dunnellon, here are some of the best things to do at Rainbow Springs State Park.

1. Swim in Rainbow Springs

Swimming is probably one of the most popular activities at the park.

The designated swimming area is located at the headsprings, where the water remains around 72 degrees throughout the year.

And yes, the water really does look that clear.

The natural swimming area is deep—generally around 10 to 18 feet—so this isn't your typical shallow swimming hole. There is also no lifeguard on duty, so keep that in mind, especially if you're visiting with children or inexperienced swimmers.

2. Go Kayaking in Rainbow Springs

If we come back, Rainbow Springs State Park kayaking is high on my list.

You can rent kayaks and canoes at the park and paddle out onto the Rainbow River.

With the crystal-clear water, aquatic vegetation, birds, and possibility of seeing wildlife along the banks, paddling looks like one of the best ways to experience the river.

You can also launch your own canoe or kayak at the headsprings, although you'll need to carry it a considerable distance from the parking area to the launch.

3. Try Tubing at Rainbow Springs State Park

Rainbow Springs State Park tubing is another extremely popular summertime activity.

One thing you need to know is that tubing does not start at the main headsprings swimming area.

Rainbow Springs has a separate tubing entrance in Dunnellon. Tubing operates seasonally, and visitors can rent tubes and use the shuttle service for a relaxing float down the Rainbow River.

The float is roughly two hours, making this something you could easily build an afternoon around.

If tubing is the main reason you're visiting, make sure you check the current operating dates and rules before heading to the park.

4. Snorkel the Headsprings

With water this clear, it shouldn't be surprising that snorkeling is popular.

Snorkeling is allowed within the designated swimming area at the Headsprings. Beneath the surface, you may see fish, turtles, aquatic grasses, and other underwater life.

If you're already planning to swim, bringing snorkeling gear could give you a completely different perspective on the springs.

5. See the Rainbow Springs State Park Waterfalls

Don't skip the waterfalls.

Even though the Rainbow Springs State Park waterfalls are man-made, they're a fascinating part of the park's history.

The waterfalls, gardens, and old pathways are remnants of the property's days as a private tourist attraction.

Learning the history behind them made walking through this section one of my favorite parts of our visit.

6. Walk Through the Gardens

Take your time walking through the ornamental gardens around the headsprings.

You'll find mature trees, flowering plants, old pathways, and plenty of shaded areas.

If you're visiting in early spring as we did, you may also catch some of the azaleas blooming.

The gardens combined with the waterfalls give this part of Rainbow Springs a completely different feel from the natural hiking areas.

7. Go Hiking

If you like hiking, don't stop at the paved garden paths.

Rainbow Springs State Park has miles of natural hiking trails that take you through oak hammocks and Florida sandhill habitat.

This was the part that reminded me so much of South Carolina.

The sandy trails, longleaf pines, hardwoods, open fields, and wildlife made for an easy and enjoyable hike.

You don't need to be an experienced hiker to enjoy these trails, either. The terrain we covered was relatively flat and easy to navigate.

8. Look for Wildlife and Go Birding

Keep your eyes and ears open while you're exploring.

Rainbow Springs is part of the Great Florida Birding and Wildlife Trail, and you may encounter woodpeckers, wading birds, hawks, owls, and songbirds.

Other wildlife around the park can include river otters, fox squirrels, and gopher tortoises.

We didn't encounter the snake I was secretly hoping to find, but we heard and saw plenty of birds along our hike, including a nice Red-shouldered Hawk that allowed us a close look.

Sometimes slowing down and listening is half the fun.

9. Camp Overnight at Rainbow Springs State Park

If one day isn't enough, you can camp at Rainbow Springs State Park.

The campground is located along the Rainbow River at a separate entrance a few miles away from the main headsprings area.

The campground accommodates both RV and tent camping and provides access to the river for swimming, paddling, and fishing.

Canoe and kayak rentals are also available from the campground.

If we were planning a return trip specifically around kayaking and exploring the Rainbow River, camping here would definitely be worth considering.

Is Rainbow Springs State Park Worth Visiting?

Absolutely.

Rainbow Springs State Park wasn't even part of our original anniversary trip.

It was basically a place we found because we needed somewhere to stay overnight in Dunnellon and decided to see what was nearby.

Those spontaneous stops sometimes turn into the places you remember the most.

Our first impression driving toward the parking lot was that there wasn't much here.

Then we walked over that hill.

Suddenly, we're staring down at some of the clearest turquoise water I've ever seen, wandering through waterfalls from an old Florida tourist attraction, finding remnants of an old zoo and phosphate mine, and hiking through longleaf pines and Florida sandhills.

We went into Rainbow Springs State Park not really knowing what to expect.

We left wishing we'd had more time.

If you're traveling through this part of Florida or looking for things to do near Dunnellon, I would absolutely put Rainbow Springs State Park on your list.

And next time?

I'm bringing shorts.

Know Before You Go to Rainbow Springs State Park

Before heading to Rainbow Springs State Park in Dunnellon, Florida, here are a few important things to know:

Day-use reservations are required. As of April 29, 2026, visitors to the main headsprings entrance must have a reservation.
The main headsprings area is open from 8 a.m. to sunset, 365 days a year, unless otherwise noted.
The park gets busy. Weekends and holidays can be especially popular, so plan ahead.
Tubing has a separate entrance and operates seasonally.
The campground has its own entrance several miles from the headsprings.
The spring water stays around 72 degrees year-round.
Kayak and canoe rentals are available.
Snorkeling is allowed in the designated headsprings swimming area.
There is no lifeguard at the swimming area.
Check current conditions, fees, and rules before visiting, since park policies and operations can change.

For the latest information and the fascinating story behind the old attraction, visit the Florida State Parks history of Rainbow Springs.

Strawberry Hill Cafe Chesnee, SC: Our Visit & What We Ate

July 31, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Strawberry Hill Café in Chesnee, SC is one of those places I'd driven past for years without ever stopping. Nestled along Scenic Highway 11 in the foothills of Upstate South Carolina, it's known for its homemade ice cream, Strawberries, fresh peaches, Lunch, and country breakfast. After finally visiting, I can honestly say it's a stop I'll be making every time I'm in the area.

A loaded grilled chicken quesadilla filled with peppers and onions, served with crinkle-cut fries and Daisy sour cream packets on a plate outside Strawberry Hill USA Cafe in Chesnee, South Carolina.

Where Is Strawberry Hill USA Located?

Strawberry Hill USA is located in Chesnee, South Carolina, along Scenic Highway 11 in the northeastern corner of Spartanburg County. Nestled in the foothills of the Blue Ridge Mountains, it's an easy stop whether you're traveling from Greenville, Spartanburg, Gaffney, or making your way toward Asheville, Maggie Valley, or Pigeon Forge.

Its location makes it one of those hidden gems that's easy to miss—but once you've visited, you'll probably find yourself stopping every time you pass through.

If your journey continues into the North Carolina mountains, especially to Maggie Valley, be sure to check out my guide to 19 Things to Do in Maggie Valley for even more ideas to make the most of your trip.

The red-roofed exterior and outdoor picnic tables of the Strawberry Hill USA Cafe in Chesnee, South Carolina.

Why Strawberry Hill Has Been on My Bucket List for Years

If you've spent much time traveling through Upstate South Carolina, chances are you've driven along Scenic Highway 11. Long before GPS sent everyone down the interstate, this was one of our family's favorite routes whenever we were headed toward Western North Carolina, Maggie Valley, or Pigeon Forge, TN.

Instead of staying on Interstate 85, we'd cut across Highway 11 to Interstate 26. It's one of those roads where you actually enjoy the drive. Rolling farmland stretches for miles, the Blue Ridge Mountains peek out in the distance, and small communities remind you of what South Carolina looked like years ago.

Another local restaurant we've found while traveling Scenic Highway 11 is The Junction in Landrum, SC, a country restaurant where we stopped for some good old-fashioned Southern cooking.

Every trip, we'd pass a place called Strawberry Hill. I'd look out the window hoping we'd stop one day, but we never did.

Fast forward a few years, and now I work throughout the Chesnee area. I've had the chance to eat at Strawberry Hill USA more times than I can count, and today it's one of the places I recommend anytime someone asks where to grab lunch along Highway 11.

If you're planning a mountain trip or simply exploring the Upstate, this is one stop you shouldn't pass by.

More Than Just a Restaurant

One thing I didn't realize as a kid was that Strawberry Hill is much more than a place to eat.

The family-owned farm, operated by Cooley Farms, has become one of the most popular seasonal destinations in the Upstate.

As you drive in, you'll see acres of strawberry fields, peach orchards, blackberry patches, and other crops growing throughout the property. During strawberry season, the parking lot fills up quickly with people coming to pick up fresh berries, homemade baked goods, and local produce.

On one side of Highway 11 is The Shed, their farm market where you'll find fresh fruits and vegetables, jams, jellies, local products, baked goods, gifts, and seasonal produce grown right on the farm.

It honestly reminds me a lot of McLeod Farms in McBee, South Carolina. If you've ever been there, you'll notice a very similar family farm atmosphere.

Across the road is The Café, where visitors gather for breakfast, lunch, homemade desserts, and one of the biggest reasons people make the trip—the ice cream.

The side exterior building of Strawberry Hill U.S.A. Cafe and Ice Cream Parlor showing a blue welcome sign above the parking lot in Chesnee, South Carolina.

In the fall, Strawberry Hill transforms once again with one of the area's favorite corn mazes, making it a fun destination for families looking for things to do in Upstate South Carolina.

If your travels take you east across South Carolina, be sure to stop by Big's Meats & More in McBee, SC. It's another one of my favorite hidden gems for great food and Southern hospitality.

My Experience at Strawberry Hill Café

The indoor dining area and wooden welcome counter featuring a handwritten lunch specials sign at Strawberry Hill USA Cafe in Chesnee, South Carolina.

Since I work in the Chesnee area fairly often, I've eaten here several times over the years.

I've worked my way through quite a bit of the menu, including the Club Sandwich, the burgers, and a few daily specials. Honestly, I've never had a bad meal.

A stacked double-decker club sandwich with turkey, ham, cheese, lettuce, and tomato, served with a side of crispy tater tots at Strawberry Hill USA Cafe in Chesnee, South Carolina.

A grilled Philly cheesesteak sandwich with shaved beef, melted cheese, peppers, and onions on a hoagie roll at Strawberry Hill USA Cafe in Chesnee, South Carolina.

While I've been told the breakfast is excellent, I usually find myself stopping in around lunchtime.

Every visit has been consistent. The staff has always been friendly, the food comes out quickly, and everything tastes fresh.

When I come here now, though, there's one meal I almost always order.

loaded double cheeseburger with melted cheddar, jalapeños, lettuce, and tomato served with crinkle-cut fries at Strawberry Hill USA Cafe in Chesnee, South Carolina.

The Chicken Quesadilla Is My Favorite

If you've never tried the Chicken Quesadilla, that's where I'd start.

The grilled chicken is cooked just right and mixed with sautéed peppers and onions. But what really stands out is the cheese. It's incredibly creamy and melts into every bite, creating one of the best quesadillas I've had anywhere.

Everything is folded inside a perfectly grilled flour tortilla that's crispy on the outside while staying soft inside.

It comes with salsa and sour cream on the side, and I almost always add an order of fries because, well...why not?

Every time I've ordered it, it's been just as good as the last.

Save Room for the Ice Cream

A napkin holder menu insert displaying homemade ice cream flavors like strawberry and peach at Strawberry Hill USA Cafe and Ice Cream Parlor in Chesnee, South Carolina.

Even if you're coming just for lunch, don't skip dessert.

Strawberry Hill serves a selection of homemade ice cream along with several additional flavors from a commercial creamery, giving you plenty of choices no matter what you're craving.

You can order:

Homemade ice cream
Milkshakes
Banana Splits
Root Beer Floats
Sundaes
Hand-dipped cones

The fresh homemade ice cream counter and menu boards inside Strawberry Hill U.S.A. Cafe and Ice Cream Parlor in Chesnee, South Carolina.

On a warm South Carolina afternoon, it's hard to beat sitting outside with a scoop of homemade strawberry ice cream while looking across the farm. They have some rocking chairs just for that!

Wooden rocking chairs and outdoor picnic tables lined up on the patio at Strawberry Hill USA Cafe in Chesnee, South Carolina.

It's easy to see why so many people stop here just for dessert.

A Great Stop Any Time of Year

One thing I appreciate about Strawberry Hill USA is that every season offers something different.

Spring brings fresh strawberries and one of the busiest times of the year.

Summer is all about South Carolina peaches, blackberries, fresh vegetables, and homemade ice cream.

Fall brings pumpkins, hayrides, and the popular corn maze that has become a tradition for many Upstate families.

No matter when you visit, there's usually something happening.

Nearby Attraction: Cowpens National Battlefield

If you're already making the drive to Strawberry Hill, I'd also recommend stopping by Cowpens National Battlefield, which is only a short drive away.

This Revolutionary War battlefield is one of my favorite historic sites in the Upstate.

There's a paved driving loop that winds through mature hardwood forests and open fields where the Battle of Cowpens took place in 1781. Along the route, you'll find interpretive signs, preserved historic home sites, picnic tables, and public restrooms about halfway through the drive.

It's peaceful, well-maintained, and makes for a relaxing stop before grabbing lunch or ice cream at Strawberry Hill.

If you're looking for a simple day trip in Spartanburg County, pairing these two stops together makes for a great afternoon.

Final Thoughts

There are plenty of restaurants you can eat at, but not many become part of the trip itself.

For me, Strawberry Hill USA is one of those places.

What started as a place I always wanted to visit as a kid has become somewhere I stop regularly whenever I'm working nearby. Between the fresh food, homemade ice cream, friendly atmosphere, and beautiful farmland surrounding the property, it's easy to understand why locals love it just as much as travelers passing through.

Whether you're headed to the North Carolina mountains, exploring Scenic Highway 11, or simply looking for one of the best local restaurants in Chesnee, South Carolina, I think Strawberry Hill USA deserves a spot on your list.

Does Strawberry Hill Café serve breakfast all day?

Breakfast hours may vary depending on the day and season. It's always a good idea to check their current hours before making the trip if you're specifically coming for breakfast.

Is Strawberry Hill Café family-friendly?

Yes. Strawberry Hill is a popular stop for families thanks to its casual atmosphere, country store, ice cream, and outdoor areas to explore.

Does Strawberry Hill Café have vegetarian options?

While the menu focuses on Southern favorites, there are lighter and meat-free options available. Menu offerings may change seasonally.

Can you buy fresh peaches and strawberries at Strawberry Hill?

Yes. During the appropriate seasons, Strawberry Hill is well known for selling fresh South Carolina peaches, strawberries, and other locally grown produce.

Is Strawberry Hill Café open year-round?

Yes, but seasonal products, menu items, and operating hours can change throughout the year. It's best to verify current hours before visiting.

Have You Been to Strawberry Hill Café?

Have you visited Strawberry Hill Café in Chesnee, SC? I'd love to hear about your experience! Share your favorite menu item or memory in the comments below.

If you're planning a road trip through the Upstate or heading toward the North Carolina mountains, be sure to check out my other restaurant reviews and travel guides for more hidden gems across the Southeast.

Salsarita's Rock Hill, SC Review: Why I Keep Coming Back

June 19, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Some restaurants become part of your routine for a reason.

You might try them once because they're convenient, but you keep coming back because they consistently get the little things right. That's exactly how Salsarita's Fresh Mexican Grill in Rock Hill became one of my favorite lunch spots.

I've been eating here since they first opened, and while I've enjoyed plenty of meals at other Mexican restaurant chains over the years, Salsarita's in Rock Hill, SC has remained my personal favorite. I recently stopped by during my lunch break and decided it was finally time to share why this place continues to earn my business.

From the friendly staff to the fresh ingredients and some of the best chips around, Salsarita's has built a loyal customer in me.

Where Is Salsarita's Fresh Mexican Grill in Rock Hill, SC?

The Rock Hill location is conveniently located on Herlong Avenue right down from Piedmont Medical Hospital, making it an easy stop whether you're grabbing lunch during the workday or looking for a quick and flavorful meal.

Salsarita's Fresh Mexican Grill
295 Herlong Ave, Suite 404
Rock Hill, SC 29732

For current menu items, hours, catering information, and online ordering, visit the official Salsarita's Fresh Mexican Grill website.

If you're exploring more places to eat in the area, check out my reviews of the Shrimp Boat and Captain Steve's Family Seafood.

Why I've Been Eating at Salsarita's for Years

There are plenty of fast-casual Mexican restaurants these days, and I've eaten at most of them.

Salsarita's Fresh Mexican Grill is a Charlotte-based restaurant chain that has grown to dozens of locations across the United States. While the company has expanded beyond the Carolinas, it still feels like a regional favorite, especially here in the Charlotte metro area.

Places like Moe's, Chipotle, and QDOBA all offer customizable meals where you can build burritos, tacos, quesadillas, nachos, or burrito bowls just the way you like them. While I enjoy those restaurants too, Salsarita's has always been the one I find myself returning to most often.

I do realize that food is subjective, and everyone has their own preferences. What I enjoy may not be what someone else enjoys. For me, though, Salsarita's consistently delivers a meal that tastes fresh, fills me up, and leaves me looking forward to my next visit.

The Friendly Service Sets This Location Apart

One thing I've always appreciated about the Rock Hill location is the people.

As soon as you walk through the door, you're usually greeted with a smile and a friendly welcome. The employees often strike up a little conversation while moving customers through the line, which creates a more personal experience than what you find at many fast-casual restaurants today.

Good customer service doesn't always get the attention it deserves, but it's one of the reasons I enjoy stopping here.

Why I Think Salsarita's Has the Best Chips

If you've eaten at Salsarita's before, you probably know exactly what I'm talking about.

Their chips are one of my favorite things on the menu.

They're crispy, well-seasoned, and packed with flavor. The seasoning blend gives them a taste that stands out from other Mexican restaurant chains. Whether you're pairing them with salsa, queso, or guacamole, they're hard to stop eating once you get started.

Honestly, I'd be happy with a basket of chips and queso alone.

What I Ordered During My Latest Visit

On this visit, I decided to go with a burrito bowl.

One thing I like about Salsarita's is the number of ways you can customize your meal. I started with cilantro rice and black beans before adding chicken and several fresh toppings.

Whether you prefer tacos, burritos, quesadillas, nachos, or bowls, there are plenty of options to make your meal exactly the way you want it.

That's one of the reasons Salsarita's works so well for families and groups. Everyone can order something a little different while still enjoying the same meal together.

I really love the Aguas Frescas at Salsarita's Rock Hill, SC

How Salsarita's Compares to Other Mexican Restaurant Chains

Whenever I mention Salsarita's, someone inevitably asks how it compares to Moe's or Chipotle.

The truth is, I enjoy all of them.

But if I'm choosing where to grab lunch in Rock Hill, Salsarita's is usually my first choice. The combination of friendly service, fresh ingredients, customizable meals, and those seasoned chips keeps me coming back.

That's not a knock on the others. It's simply a reflection of what I personally enjoy most.

What You Should Order On Your First Visit

Then recommend:

Burrito Bowl
Chips & Queso
Tacos
Quesadilla

Final Thoughts on Salsarita's Rock Hill SC

After eating here for years, Salsarita's remains one of my favorite places to grab lunch in Rock Hill.

The food is fresh, the employees are friendly, and the menu offers plenty of options, whether you're craving a burrito, tacos, a quesadilla, or a burrito bowl.

If you're in the Charlotte metro area and near Rock Hill, I think Salsarita's Fresh Mexican Grill is worth checking out. It has become one of my go-to lunch spots, and I have a feeling it might become one of yours too.

Frequently Asked Questions About Salsarita's Rock Hill, SC

Does Salsarita's offer catering?

Yes. Salsarita's offers catering options for meetings, parties, and special events. Check their website for current catering menus and ordering information.

Can you order online from Salsarita's Rock Hill?

Yes. Customers can place orders online for pickup through the Salsarita's website or participating delivery services.

Does Salsarita's have vegetarian options?

Yes. Guests can customize burritos, bowls, tacos, and salads with rice, beans, vegetables, cheese, and other toppings to create a vegetarian meal.

Is Salsarita's good for a quick lunch?

Absolutely. Since meals are prepared as you move through the line, it's a great option when you're short on time but still want a fresh meal.

Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill: Waterfront Dining in Southport

June 13, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

If you're looking for great waterfront dining near Oak Island, North Carolina, Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill needs to be on your list.

We discovered Rusty Hooks last year while vacationing at Oak Island and enjoyed it so much that we made it a point to come back this year. In fact, I even made a YouTube video about our first visit. Last year, I ordered the grilled chicken sandwich and it was excellent. This time around, I wanted to dive into some local seafood and see if the restaurant could impress me a second time.

Spoiler alert—it absolutely did.

Where is Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill Located?

Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill is located at:

4907 Fish Factory Road SE
Southport, NC 28461

Tucked away at the end of Fish Factory Road, Rusty Hooks is one of those places that feels like a hidden gem. Unless you're a local or have done a little exploring around Southport, you might never know it's there.

What's interesting is that there are several great restaurants clustered around the Fish Factory area. Many visitors drive right past them on their way to Oak Island without realizing some of the best waterfront dining in the area is hidden down this road.

I've been coming to Oak Island since I was a kid because my aunt owned a place here, and somehow I never discovered Rusty Hooks until last year. Now it's become one of our favorite stops whenever we're in town.

One of the things I enjoy most about traveling across North Carolina is finding these lesser-known local restaurants. Whether it's a waterfront seafood spot in Southport or a family-owned restaurant in the mountains, some of the best meals are found off the beaten path. If you're planning a mountain getaway, be sure to check out my guide to 7 Restaurants to Try in Waynesville, NC.

Before we go too far, watch our YouTube video that details our visit here:

One of the Best Waterfront Views in Southport

The setting is a huge part of what makes Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill special.

The restaurant sits directly on the Intracoastal Waterway overlooking the marsh and water. Boats cruise up and down the channel while diners enjoy some of the best views around.

If the weather is nice, I highly recommend sitting outside on the deck. It's the perfect place to relax and take in everything that makes coastal North Carolina so beautiful.

You also get a great view of the G.V. Barbee Bridge, which many locals still refer to as the "old bridge." The bridge carries traffic across the Intracoastal Waterway into Oak Island and serves as a beautiful backdrop while you're enjoying dinner.

There is plenty of outdoor seating available, and on many weekends you'll find live music playing outside. The combination of the waterfront setting, local atmosphere, and live entertainment creates the kind of dining experience that keeps people coming back.

If you prefer to stay cool during the summer months, Rusty Hooks also offers screened porch seating along with indoor air-conditioned dining upstairs and in the bar area.

Beating the Crowd

One thing we've learned over the years is that if a restaurant is really good, showing up between 4:00 and 5:00 PM is usually a smart move.

We arrived early and still ended up waiting about 10 to 15 minutes, which wasn't bad at all considering how popular this place has become.

Before long, more people started arriving and the restaurant began filling up. That's usually a pretty good sign.

Don't Skip the Fried Pickles

After being seated upstairs, we ordered drinks and started looking over the Southport menu.

My mother-in-law decided to order the fried pickles as an appetizer, and I'm glad she did.

If you've never tried fried pickles before, Rusty Hooks is a great place to start.

The tang from the pickle brine combined with the crispy seasoned batter creates the perfect balance of flavors. Dip them into the cool ranch dressing and it's easy to see why they're such a popular appetizer.

They disappeared from the table pretty quickly.

A Southport Menu Full of Seafood Favorites

One thing I appreciate about Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill is the variety on the menu.

Whether you're craving burgers, chicken sandwiches, shrimp tacos, fish tacos, or fresh local seafood, there's something here for almost everyone.

As I looked over the menu, our server mentioned that the catch of the day was blackened flounder. She also told me I could get it in the fish tacos.

That immediately got my attention.

The Best Fish Tacos I've Had in Years

It's been close to ten years since I've had a fish taco that really impressed me.

The last memorable ones I had were at Cabo Fish Taco in Charlotte's NoDa district. Since then, I've tried fish tacos at several restaurants, but none of them stood out enough to remember.

That changed at Rusty Hooks.

When the food arrived, the tacos were loaded with blackened flounder and topped with jicama slaw, cotija cheese, mango salsa, and fresh cilantro. They were served with tortilla chips and Texas caviar on the side.

After the first bite, I knew these were something special.

The blackened flounder was perfectly cooked and packed with flavor. The sweetness from the mango salsa paired beautifully with the fresh slaw and salty cotija cheese. Every ingredient worked together.

Honestly, if these fish tacos weren't better than the ones I had at Cabo Fish Taco years ago, they were right there with them.

That's about as high of a compliment as I can give.

Why We Keep Coming Back

This was our second visit to Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill, and both experiences have been excellent.

The first visit was all about the grilled chicken sandwich.

The second visit was all about the fish tacos.

When a restaurant consistently delivers great food, friendly service, beautiful waterfront views, and a relaxed atmosphere, it's easy to understand why it continues to receive strong reviews from locals and visitors alike.

Final Thoughts on Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill

If you're searching for a seafood restaurant in Southport that offers great food, waterfront views, live music, and a laid-back coastal atmosphere, Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill is well worth the visit.

The combination of fresh local seafood, beautiful dockside views, and friendly service makes it one of our favorite restaurants near Oak Island.

Whether you're a local looking for a great meal or a visitor exploring the Southport area, Rusty Hooks is the kind of place you'll want to visit more than once.

After two excellent meals in two different years, I can confidently say we'll be back again.

And next time, I may have an even harder time deciding what to order.

More Places We Enjoy Near Oak Island

While Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill has become one of our favorite seafood restaurants in the area, it's not the only local spot we enjoy. If you're looking for a great cup of coffee or a light breakfast before a day at the beach, be sure to check out our review of Island Jo Coffee and Cafe in Oak Island, NC.

Frequently Asked Questions About Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill

Where is Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill located?

Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill is located at 4907 Fish Factory Road SE, Southport, NC 28461. The restaurant sits along the Intracoastal Waterway in South Harbour Village Marina and offers beautiful waterfront dining near Oak Island.

Does Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill have waterfront seating?

Yes. Rusty Hooks is known for its waterfront location overlooking the Intracoastal Waterway. Guests can enjoy outdoor deck seating with views of the marsh, boats passing by, and the G.V. Barbee Bridge leading into Oak Island.

What type of food does Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill serve?

The menu features fresh local seafood, crab cakes, oysters, fish tacos, shrimp dishes, burgers, sandwiches, salads, and other coastal favorites. They also offer gluten-free options.

Is there parking available at Rusty Hooks Dockside Grill?

Yes. Rusty Hooks offers free off-street parking for guests visiting the restaurant.

Island Jo Coffee & Cafe: A Hidden Gem Coffee Shop on Oak Island, NC

June 12, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

If you're looking for a great coffee shop on Oak Island, North Carolina, Island Jo Coffee & Cafe deserves a spot on your list.

For the last couple of years, we've driven past Island Jo while vacationing on Oak Island. You know how it goes—you get into a routine of visiting your favorite restaurants and coffee spots, and before long, another vacation has come and gone. This year, we finally decided to stop in for an afternoon coffee run, and I'm glad we did.

What we discovered was more than just another coffee shop on Oak Island.

Before we dive into the full review, take a quick look at the video we made at Island Jo Coffee & Cafe on Oak Island, North Carolina.

Where Is Island Jo Coffee & Cafe Located?

Address:
8601 E Oak Island Dr, Oak Island, NC 28465

Island Jo Coffee & Cafe is located on Oak Island, North Carolina, just a short drive from Caswell Beach and the Southport ferry area. Its convenient location makes it an easy stop whether you're spending the day on the beach, exploring the Brunswick Islands, or heading into nearby Southport.

If you're looking for a local coffee shop on Oak Island to grab a specialty coffee, breakfast, lunch, or an afternoon pick-me-up, Island Jo Coffee & Cafe is worth adding to your list.

More Than Just Coffee

Before visiting, I assumed Island Jo was simply a place to grab a quick cup of coffee before heading to the beach. Once inside, I quickly realized they offer much more than that.

In addition to specialty coffee drinks, Island Jo Coffee & Cafe serves sandwiches, wraps, and fresh salads, making it a convenient stop for breakfast, lunch, or an afternoon pick-me-up.

If you're spending the day exploring Oak Island, Caswell Beach, or nearby Southport, it's the kind of place that's easy to overlook but well worth a visit.

My Iced Caramel Macchiato

I'm a simple coffee drinker. If a coffee shop can make a good iced caramel macchiato, that's usually a pretty good sign.

The iced caramel macchiato I ordered had a strong espresso flavor without being bitter, balanced by just the right amount of sweet caramel. It wasn't overly sugary like some chain coffee shops tend to be, which allowed the espresso to shine through.

For me, it was exactly what I wanted on a warm afternoon near the beach.

While I enjoy stopping at local coffee shops during vacation, I also make iced coffee at home using my favorite iced coffee maker. If you're interested, check out what I think is the best Iced Coffee Makers for home use.

A Great Stop While Visiting Oak Island

One thing I appreciate about local coffee shops is that they often become part of the community. Island Jo has that welcoming feel that encourages you to slow down for a few minutes before heading back to the beach.

Whether you're looking for a morning coffee before watching the sunrise, a quick lunch, or an afternoon caffeine boost, Island Jo Coffee & Cafe offers a relaxed atmosphere and quality drinks that make it worth stopping by.

Planning a trip to Oak Island? Save this guide to Island Jo Coffee & Cafe on Pinterest so you can easily find it later.

Best coffee shop on Oak Island NC featuring Island Jo Coffee & Cafe, specialty coffee drinks, breakfast, lunch, wraps, and salads.

Final Thoughts

After driving past Island Jo Coffee & Cafe for years, I'm kicking myself for not stopping sooner.

The coffee was excellent, the menu offered more variety than I expected, and it's another reminder that some of the best local restaurants and coffee shops are often the ones you've passed a hundred times.

If you're planning a trip to Oak Island, NC, and searching for a local coffee shop, put Island Jo Coffee & Cafe on your list. Whether you're staying near Caswell Beach, Southport, or anywhere on Oak Island, it's a great place to grab a coffee and a bite to eat.

Have you visited Island Jo Coffee & Cafe? Let me know your favorite drink or menu item in the comments below.

Frequently Asked Questions About Island Jo Coffee & Cafe

Where is Island Jo Coffee & Cafe located?

Island Jo Coffee & Cafe is located on Oak Island, North Carolina, making it a convenient stop for both locals and visitors staying on the island or nearby Caswell Beach.

Does Island Jo Coffee & Cafe serve food?

Yes. In addition to specialty coffee drinks, Island Jo Coffee & Cafe serves sandwiches, wraps, and fresh salads, making it a great option for breakfast or lunch on Oak Island.

What coffee drinks does Island Jo Coffee & Cafe offer?

Island Jo offers a variety of coffee drinks, including espresso-based beverages, iced coffee drinks, lattes, and flavored coffee creations. During our visit, the iced caramel macchiato was a standout.

Is Island Jo Coffee & Cafe a good place for breakfast on Oak Island?

Yes. Many visitors stop by for coffee and a quick breakfast before heading to the beach. The menu includes food options that make it more than just a coffee shop.

Is The Shack Cherry Grove SC Worth Visiting?

June 9, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

When you're looking for a good local restaurant at North Myrtle Beach, sometimes the best places are the ones that have been around for years. That's exactly what we found when we decided to return to The Shack Restaurant in Cherry Grove Beach, South Carolina.

I had eaten here years ago, long before Southern Food Junkie was ever a thing. Back then, I wasn't taking pictures of every meal or writing reviews. I was simply enjoying good food. Since we were spending time in the area with family and friends, we decided it was time to see if The Shack was still as good as we remembered.

Where Is The Shack Located?

If you're headed to Cherry Grove Beach, you'll find The Shack at:

1128 Sea Mountain Highway
North Myrtle Beach, SC 29582

Now technically the address is North Myrtle Beach, but it's located in the Cherry Grove section of town. That's why you'll hear people refer to it as both a Cherry Grove restaurant and a North Myrtle Beach restaurant.

Speaking of local restaurants, if you're making the drive toward Myrtle Beach, be sure to check out my review of Big's Meats & More, located right behind McLeod Farms in McBee.

Before continuing to read the post, check out my Youtube video of my experience of The Shack:

Returning to The Shack in Cherry Grove Beach

We pulled into the parking lot around 3:50 p.m. on a Monday afternoon. The restaurant didn't reopen for supper until 4:00 p.m., and honestly, we figured we'd be the first ones there.

We were wrong.

There were already a few people standing outside waiting for the doors to open. We had a large group of about twelve family members and friends, so we checked in with the hostess and got our name on the waiting list.

As we stood there talking, car after car kept pulling into the parking lot. Before long, there were probably thirty people or more waiting outside. That's usually a pretty good sign when you're looking for a restaurant. Locals know where the good food is.

Right at 4:00 p.m., they started calling names. We were third on the list and were seated almost immediately.

Hush Puppies That Didn't Taste Like Hush Puppies

Not long after we sat down, a basket of hush puppies hit the table.

Now let me tell you something.

These weren't your traditional hush puppies.

Instead of being dense and savory, they reminded me more of a donut with a little cornmeal mixed in. They came with a honey butter that was absolutely incredible. The combination was sweet, warm, and downright addictive.

I had to slow myself down because I knew if I kept eating them, I wasn't going to have room for my meal.

If you visit The Shack, do yourself a favor and don't skip the hush puppies.

If you're a fan of Southern seafood and comfort food like we are, be sure to check out my homemade Catfish Stew recipe, another Southern favorite that's packed with flavor.

A Menu Full of Southern Comfort Food

One thing I really liked about The Shack was the variety on the menu.

Whether you're craving seafood, burgers, salads, chicken, or Southern comfort food, there's something for just about everybody.

What really caught my eye was their meat and three option. If you're from the South, you already know there's something special about walking into a restaurant and seeing a meat and three on the menu.

The regular meats appeared to be fried chicken, grilled chicken, and fried or grilled fish. They also rotate daily specials. On our visit, the featured meats included beef stew and rice along with chicken and dumplings.

The side selections were exactly what you'd hope to find in a Southern restaurant:

Mac and cheese
Lima beans
Coleslaw
French fries
Rice and gravy
Mashed potatoes
Cabbage
Squash casserole
Corn
Green beans
Tomato pie
Black-eyed peas

They also had homemade soups including clam chowder and potato soup.

One thing I thought was pretty neat was that you could choose a dessert as one of your sides with the meat and three plate. That's a dangerous option for someone like me.

On this particular night, the dessert choices included Oreo pie, peach cobbler, and cheesecake.

Want to experience the flavors that define our state? Several of these dishes are considered iconic South Carolina foods.

My Meat and Three: Beef Stew, Black-Eyed Peas, and Squash Casserole

After looking over the menu, I settled on the beef stew and rice with black-eyed peas, squash casserole, and Oreo pie for dessert.

The portion size was generous, and there was more food on the plate than I expected.

The beef stew was rich, savory, and full of flavor. It tasted like something that had been simmering all day.

The black-eyed peas were cooked exactly the way I like them. They were thick and cooked down just right. If you're Southern, you know exactly what I'm talking about.

The squash casserole was loaded with cheddar cheese and had that homemade flavor that reminds you of church potlucks and family gatherings.

By the time I got to the Oreo pie, I was already getting full. Looking back, I probably should have stopped halfway through, but it was too good to leave sitting there.

No regrets.

What the Rest of Our Group Ordered

One of the advantages of dining with a large group is getting to see a lot of different plates come out of the kitchen.

Several people in our group ordered fish and talked about how good it was. Others went with the fried chicken and were equally happy with their meals.

I didn't hear any complaints from anyone at the table, which is pretty impressive when you're dining with twelve people.

Everything looked fresh, hot, and well prepared.

Is The Shack in Cherry Grove Worth Visiting?

Absolutely.

The Shack isn't trying to be fancy, and that's part of its charm. It's the kind of place where locals and visitors gather for good Southern cooking, seafood, and comfort food served in generous portions.

The fact that dozens of people were lined up before the doors even opened on a Monday afternoon tells you everything you need to know.

Between the addictive hush puppies, the homemade sides, and the comforting Southern flavors, our visit reminded me why this restaurant has remained so popular over the years.

If you're visiting Cherry Grove Beach, North Myrtle Beach, or the Grand Strand area and you're looking for a local restaurant with Southern charm and great food, The Shack deserves a spot on your list.

And yes, I'd definitely go back.

Frequently Asked Questions About The Shack in North Myrtle Beach, SC

Where is The Shack located?

The Shack is located at 1128 Sea Mountain Highway in North Myrtle Beach, South Carolina. While the physical address is in North Myrtle Beach, it's located in the Cherry Grove area that many visitors know and love.

Does The Shack serve breakfast, lunch, and dinner?

Yes. The Shack serves breakfast, lunch, and dinner throughout the week. The restaurant is especially known for its Southern-style breakfasts, daily meat-and-three specials, and Calabash-style seafood.

Does The Shack take reservations?

No. The Shack does not accept reservations or call-ahead seating. Guests are seated on a first-come, first-served basis, and the entire party must be present before being seated.

What are the most popular menu items at The Shack?

Many guests visit for the daily meat-and-three specials, fried chicken, seafood platters, shrimp and grits, and homemade Southern sides. During our visit, the beef stew and rice, black-eyed peas, and squash casserole were standouts.

What are The Shack's dinner hours?

The Shack serves dinner Monday through Saturday beginning at 4:00 p.m. While the restaurant's official website lists dinner hours as "4:00 p.m. until," dinner service typically runs until around 8:00 p.m. The restaurant is closed on Sundays.

Old-Fashioned Watergate Salad Recipe (Just Like Grandma Made)

June 5, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Some recipes have a way of taking you right back to childhood, and this Old-Fashioned Watergate Salad Recipe does exactly that for me.

Growing up in South Carolina, I saw Watergate Salad as a regular sight at family gatherings, church suppers, potlucks, and holiday celebrations. My mom made it, my aunts made it, and it always seemed to show up whenever our family got together. While some folks call it Pistachio Pudding Salad, Green Fluff, or Pistachio Delight, we knew it as Watergate Salad.

Old fashioned Watergate salad topped with maraschino cherries, mini marshmallows, and chopped pecans in a serving bowl.

One of my favorite memories is eating a big bowl of this cool and creamy dessert salad at our family Fourth of July gatherings. The South Carolina summer heat would be in full force, and this sweet green salad was always a welcome treat. The creamy pistachio pudding mixed with juicy pineapple, fluffy marshmallows, crunchy pecans, and whipped topping created a combination of flavors and textures that was hard to resist.

Even today, one bite brings back memories of family, laughter, and those hot summer afternoons spent with people I love.

What Is Watergate Salad?

Watergate Salad is a classic American dessert salad that became popular during the 1970s. It's made with pistachio pudding mix, crushed pineapple or pineapple tidbits, whipped topping, marshmallows, and nuts. Despite the name, it's really more of a dessert than a salad. The recipe first gained popularity as "Pistachio Pineapple Delight" before becoming widely known as Watergate Salad.

Today, it's still a favorite at family reunions, church gatherings, holiday meals, and summer cookouts throughout the South.

Why You'll Love This Recipe

Only 5 simple ingredients
No baking required
Ready in minutes
Perfect make-ahead dessert
Great for potlucks and church dinners
Cool and refreshing for summer gatherings
Full of nostalgic flavor

Ingredients

1 (3.4-ounce) package pistachio pudding mix
1 (20-ounce) can Pineapple tidbits, undrained
2 cups mini marshmallows
½ cup chopped pecans
1 (8-ounce) container extra creamy Cool Whip, thawed

How To Make Watergate Salad

For a printable recipe, click the recipe card below.

Step 1: Mix the Base

In a large mixing bowl, combine the dry pistachio pudding mix, pineapple with its juice, and chopped pecans. Stir until everything is evenly combined.

Pouring pineapple with juice into a mixing bowl to make Watergate Salad.

Adding pistachio pudding mix to crushed pineapple and juice in a mixing bowl for Watergate Salad.

Adding chopped pecans to the pineapple and pistachio pudding mixture for Watergate Salad.

Mixing crushed pineapple, pistachio pudding mix, and pecans together for Watergate Salad.

Step 2: Fold in the Cool Whip

Gently fold in the thawed extra creamy Cool Whip until fully incorporated, and the mixture becomes light, fluffy, and creamy. Finally, fold in the mini marshmallows.

Adding Cool Whip to the pistachio pudding and pineapple mixture while making Watergate Salad.

Adding mini marshmallows to the creamy pistachio pudding mixture while making old fashioned Watergate Salad.

Step 3: Chill

Cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least one hour before serving. This allows the flavors to blend and the salad to thicken.

A bowl of old fashioned Watergate Salad topped with maraschino cherries, mini marshmallows, and chopped pecans.

Tips for the Best Watergate Salad

Be sure not to drain the pineapple. The juice helps activate the pudding mix and creates the creamy texture.
Extra creamy Cool Whip gives the salad a richer flavor.
Let the salad chill for at least an hour before serving for the best consistency.
For extra crunch, lightly toast the pecans before adding them.
Make it a day ahead for family gatherings and holidays.

Variations

Add Cherries

Many families like to stir in maraschino cherries for additional sweetness and color.

Try Different Nuts

Walnuts work great if you don't have pecans on hand. You can also use Pistachio nuts as well.

Add Coconut

A handful of sweetened shredded coconut adds another layer of flavor and texture. Highly recommended!

Storage

Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Because of the whipped topping and pineapple, Watergate Salad is best enjoyed fresh and chilled.

Frequently Asked Questions

Why is it called Watergate Salad?

The exact origin isn't completely clear. The recipe became popular during the 1970s and was originally called Pistachio Pineapple Delight. Over time, the name Watergate Salad stuck, likely due to its connection to the similarly named Watergate Cake and the era in which it became popular.

Can I make Watergate Salad ahead of time?

Yes! Watergate Salad is actually one of those desserts that tastes even better when made ahead of time. Preparing it a few hours in advance gives the pistachio pudding mix time to thicken and allows all the flavors to blend together.

Can you freeze Watergate Salad?

I don't recommend freezing Watergate Salad. The whipped topping and pineapple can separate when thawed, resulting in a watery texture. It's best enjoyed fresh from the refrigerator.

What can I serve with Watergate Salad?

Easter dinner
Thanksgiving meals
Christmas gatherings
Church potlucks
Family reunions
Fourth of July cookouts
BBQs and picnics

What holidays is Watergate Salad traditionally served?

Watergate Salad has been a favorite at Southern holiday tables for decades, especially during Easter, Thanksgiving, Christmas, and Fourth of July celebrations. It's also a staple at church homecomings and family reunions

More Old-Fashioned Southern Dessert Recipes

If you love this old-fashioned Watergate Salad, I've got a few more Southern desserts that are just as good for family gatherings, church potlucks, and holiday dinners!

For another cool and creamy favorite, try my Easy Fruit Fluff Recipe. It's a simple, no-bake dessert made with just a handful of ingredients, and it's always a great option when you need something easy to bring to a get-together.

If you're looking for something a little richer, my Easy No-Bake Blueberry-Banana Cream Pie is another delicious choice. It's cool, creamy, and especially good during those hot Southern summers.

For a dessert that's about as easy as it gets, give my Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake a try. It's packed with fruity flavor and makes a great dessert for Sunday dinner or your next family gathering.

And if you're craving something warm and homemade, you can't beat a good Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler. It's especially good when blackberries are in season, and even better with a scoop of vanilla ice cream!

Final Thoughts

If you've never had Watergate Salad before, you're in for a treat. This old-fashioned recipe has stood the test of time for good reason. It's simple, creamy, refreshing, and packed with nostalgic flavor.

For me, it's more than just a recipe. It's a reminder of family gatherings, church potlucks, summer holidays, and the people who made those memories special. Every spoonful takes me right back to those Fourth of July celebrations where a bowl of this green fluff salad was always waiting on the dessert table.

If you make this recipe, I'd love to hear about it. Did your family make Watergate Salad growing up too?

8 Servings

Old Fashioned Watergate Salad Recipe (Just Like Grandma Made)

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Additional Time: 1 hour

Total Time: 1 hour 10 minutes

This Old-Fashioned Watergate Salad is a cool, creamy dessert made with pistachio pudding, crushed pineapple, marshmallows, pecans, and Cool Whip. A classic Southern favorite that's perfect for church potlucks, family gatherings, holidays, and summer cookouts.

No Ratings

Ingredients

1 3.4 ounce package of Pistachio pudding mix
1 20 Ounce can of Pineapple tidbits , Do not drain
2 cups mini marshmallows
½ cup chopped pecans
1 8 ounce Container of Extra Creamy Cool Whip

Instructions

In a large mixing bowl, combine the dry pistachio pudding mix, pineapple (with the juice), and chopped pecans. Stir until well combined.
Gently fold in the thawed extra creamy Cool Whip until the mixture is smooth and creamy. Then fold in the marshmallows.
Cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 1 hour to allow the salad to thicken and the flavors to blend together.
Stir gently before serving and enjoy chilled.

Notes

Optional: Garnish with additional chopped pecans, a few marshmallows before serving, and a Maraschino Cherry on top.

Nutrition Information:

Yield:

Serving Size:

1
Amount Per Serving: Calories: 116Total Fat: 7gSaturated Fat: 1gUnsaturated Fat: 5gCholesterol: 4mgSodium: 221mgCarbohydrates: 15gFiber: 1gSugar: 11gProtein: 1g

Easy Fruit Fluff Recipe (No Bake Southern Dessert)

May 25, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Fruit Fluff is one of those old-fashioned Southern desserts that always seemed to show up at church dinners, family reunions, summertime cookouts, and holiday gatherings when I was growing up. My mom has made this recipe for years, and it originally came from one of those classic church recipe books from the small country church where I was raised. I believe my aunt shared the recipe nearly 25 years ago, and it quickly became a family favorite.

Easy fruit fluff recipe made with mandarin oranges, pineapple, Cool Whip, and cheesecake pudding.

What I love about this easy Fruit Fluff recipe is that it tastes rich and creamy while still feeling light and refreshing thanks to the fruit. The best part? There’s absolutely no cooking involved. Just mix everything together, chill it in the refrigerator, and you’ve got an easy no-bake dessert that’s perfect for potlucks, BBQs, church gatherings, summer cookouts, or anytime you need something quick and crowd-pleasing.

Why You’ll Love This Fruit Fluff Recipe

No baking required
Ready in just minutes
Perfect make-ahead dessert
Great for potlucks and church dinners
Light and refreshing for summertime
Only a few simple ingredients

To see how I made this simple recipe, check out my YouTube video down below:

Ingredients Needed for Fruit Fluff

You only need a handful of simple ingredients to make this old-fashioned fruit fluff recipe.

Ingredients

2 cups low-fat vanilla yogurt
1 (8 ounce) container extra creamy Cool Whip
1 can mandarin oranges, drained
1 can crushed pineapple, drained
1 package instant cheesecake pudding mix

How to Make Fruit Fluff

Check the recipe card below for a printable recipe!

Step 1: Mix the Yogurt and Pudding

In a large mixing bowl, combine the vanilla yogurt and cheesecake pudding mix. Stir until smooth and creamy. I like using a large mixing bowl for this recipe because it gives me plenty of room to fold everything together without making a mess.

Mixing vanilla yogurt and cheesecake pudding mix for fruit fluff recipe.

Step 2: Fold in the Cool Whip

Gently fold the Cool Whip into the pudding mixture until fully combined. A good silicone spatula works great here because you can gently fold everything together without breaking up the fruit or knocking too much air out of the Cool Whip.

Step 3: Add the Fruit

Fold in the drained mandarin oranges and crushed pineapple. Be gentle so the oranges stay intact.

All the ingredients mixed together in a white bowl to make fruit fluff recipe.

Step 4: Chill and Serve

Refrigerate the fruit fluff until chilled and ready to serve.

Close-up spoonful of creamy fruit fluff dessert.

Tips for the Best Fruit Fluff

Make sure to drain the fruit well so the fluff doesn’t become watery.
Chill for at least 1 hour before serving for the best texture.
Garnish with cherries or extra mandarin oranges for a prettier presentation.
This dessert tastes even better the next day after the flavors have blended together.

Can You Make Fruit Fluff Ahead of Time?

Absolutely. In fact, this easy fruit fluff recipe is even better after it sits in the refrigerator for a few hours. That makes it perfect for making ahead for church gatherings, family reunions, cookouts, and holiday dinners.

Store leftovers covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

What to Serve with Fruit Fluff

This creamy no-bake dessert pairs perfectly with:

BBQ plates
Fried chicken
Hamburger steaks
Hot dogs and hamburgers
Pulled pork
Summer cookout foods

It’s one of those Southern side desserts that fits just about any gathering.

More Southern Dessert Recipes

If you love old-fashioned Southern desserts like this Fruit Fluff, I've got a few more family favorites I think you'll enjoy!

My Old-Fashioned Watergate Salad Recipe is another creamy, no-bake classic made with pistachio pudding, pineapple, marshmallows, and Cool Whip. It's always a great choice for church potlucks, family gatherings, and holiday dinners.

If you're in the mood for something a little different, give my Easy No-Bake Blueberry-Banana Cream Pie a try. It's a cool, creamy dessert that's especially good during the warmer months.

For another easy crowd-pleaser, check out my Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake. It uses crushed pineapple, just like this Fruit Fluff, and is perfect when you need something simple to throw together.

And if you're craving a good old-fashioned baked dessert, you can't go wrong with my Southern Blackberry Cobbler, especially when fresh blackberries are in season.

Frequently Asked Questions

Can you make Fruit Fluff ahead of time?

Yes. Fruit Fluff is actually better when made ahead because the flavors have time to blend. I recommend making it at least 1 hour before serving and storing it covered in the refrigerator.

How long does Fruit Fluff last in the refrigerator?

Fruit Fluff will stay fresh in the refrigerator for about 3 days when stored in an airtight container.

Do you have to drain the fruit?

Yes. Make sure to drain both the mandarin oranges and crushed pineapple well so the dessert does not become watery.

Can you use regular yogurt instead of low fat?

Absolutely. You can use regular vanilla yogurt if you prefer a richer and creamier texture.

Can you freeze Fruit Fluff?

I do not recommend freezing Fruit Fluff because the texture can become watery once thawed.

Easy Fruit Fluff Recipe (No Bake Southern Dessert)

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Chill Time: 1 hour

Total Time: 1 hour 10 minutes

Creamy, light, and refreshing, this easy Fruit Fluff Recipe is a classic no bake Southern dessert made with vanilla yogurt, Cool Whip, mandarin oranges, pineapple, and cheesecake pudding. Perfect for church potlucks, summer cookouts, BBQs, and family gatherings.

No Ratings

Ingredients

2 cups Vanillia Yogurt , Low Fat
1 ounce Extra Creamy Whip Cream
1 (15 ounce) Can Mandarin Oranges , Drained
1 (20 ounce) can Crushed Pineapple , drained
1 (3.4 ounce) package Cheesecake Jello instant Pudding

Instructions

In a large mixing bowl, combine the vanilla yogurt and cheesecake pudding mix. Stir until smooth and creamy.
Fold in the Cool Whip until fully combined.
Add the drained mandarin oranges and crushed pineapple.
Gently fold everything together until evenly mixed.
Refrigerate for at least 1 hour before serving.
Garnish with cherries or extra mandarin oranges if desired and serve cold.

Final Thoughts

This easy Fruit Fluff Recipe is one of those simple old-fashioned desserts that never goes out of style. It’s creamy, fruity, refreshing, and incredibly easy to make. Recipes like this remind me of growing up in the South and flipping through those old church cookbooks filled with recipes that brought families together around the table.

If you make this recipe, let me know what you think in the comments below. And as always… let’s get food junked!

Crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

May 23, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Southern style breakfast potatoes made in the air fryer

If you are looking for an easy side dish that turns out crispy on the outside and fluffy on the inside, these Crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes are hard to beat. They make a perfect breakfast side with eggs, bacon, and cheese grits, but they also pair well with dinner dishes like steak, chicken, or pork chops. Best of all, they are healthier than deep frying and naturally gluten free.

Low angle view of crispy seasoned air fryer red potatoes served on a breakfast plate

Why You’ll Love These Crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes

Crispy texture without deep frying
Simple ingredients
Ready in about 25 minutes
Great for breakfast or dinner
Gluten free

A Simple Side Dish That Always Hits the Spot

There is just something comforting about crispy potatoes served alongside a good Southern breakfast. Growing up in the South, breakfast was more than just a quick meal before school or work. It was often a full plate with eggs, bacon, biscuits, grits, and some kind of potatoes cooked in a cast iron skillet. These Air Fryer Red Potatoes bring back that same comfort food flavor but in an easier and healthier way.

What I love most about this recipe is how simple it is. You do not need fancy ingredients or a lot of prep work. Just a few red potatoes, some seasoning, and an air fryer can turn into crispy golden potatoes that taste like they came from a restaurant. The outside gets slightly crispy while the inside stays soft and fluffy.

The air fryer also makes cleanup easier and uses less oil than traditional frying. That means you still get that crispy texture without all the grease. These potatoes have become one of my favorite quick breakfast sides because they are filling, affordable, and easy to customize with different seasonings.

These crispy potatoes pair perfectly with my creamy Southern cheese grits for an easy breakfast.

Ingredients for Air Fryer Red Potatoes

7 medium red potatoes
1 tablespoon olive oil
½ teaspoon sea salt
¼ teaspoon black pepper

Optional Seasonings

½ teaspoon dried rosemary
¼ teaspoon garlic powder

How to Make Air Fryer Red Potatoes

Start by washing and rinsing the potatoes well, then dry them off. Dice the potatoes into about ½-inch pieces. Rinse the diced potatoes a second time to help remove excess starch, then drain and dry them again.

Fresh diced red potatoes prepared for air frying

Rinsing diced potatoes to remove starch before air frying

Add the potatoes to a mixing bowl. Pour in the olive oil and season with sea salt, black pepper, and any optional seasonings you want to use. Toss everything together until the potatoes are evenly coated.

Olive oil and seasoning added to diced red potatoes

Black pepper being added to diced red potatoes in a mixing bowl before air frying

Adding sea salt to diced red potatoes in a mixing bowl before air frying

Seasoning red potatoes for the air fryer — Adding Rosemary

Preheat your air fryer for at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 3 minutes. Remove the basket and lightly coat it with spray oil such as olive oil or avocado oil spray.

Spraying air fryer basket with olive oil before cooking potatoes

Add the potatoes to the air fryer basket in an even layer.

Seasoned diced red potatoes inside air fryer basket

Cook at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes.

Remove the basket and shake or stir the potatoes to flip them over. Cook for another 10 minutes, or until the potatoes are golden brown and cooked to your desired crispiness.

Golden brown crispy red potatoes cooked in an air fryer

If you love hearty Southern breakfasts, these potatoes also go great alongside homemade sausage gravy and biscuits.

Serving Suggestions

These crispy air fryer potatoes go great with:

Cheese grits
Eggs
Bacon or sausage
Burgers and sandwiches
Grilled chicken or steak

Tips for Crispy Potatoes

Rinsing the potatoes twice helps remove starch and improves crispiness.
Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket.
Spray the basket lightly with oil to help prevent sticking.
Cook a few extra minutes if you like them extra crispy.

If you enjoy crispy potato recipes, be sure to try my Air Fryer Hash Browns recipe for another easy breakfast side dish made right in the air fryer.

Frequently Asked Questions

Do I have to peel red potatoes?

No. The skin helps add texture and flavor, and red potato skins crisp up nicely in the air fryer.

Can I use different potatoes?

Yes. Yukon Gold or russet potatoes will also work, but cooking times may vary slightly.

Are air fryer potatoes healthy?

Air fryer potatoes use much less oil than deep frying, making them a lighter option while still getting crispy.

Crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Cook Time: 20 minutes

Total Time: 30 minutes

These Crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes are golden brown on the outside, fluffy on the inside, and packed with simple Southern flavor. Made with red potatoes, olive oil, and seasonings, this easy gluten-free side dish is perfect for breakfast or dinner.

No Ratings

Ingredients

7 Medium Red Pototes
1 tablespoon Olive Oil
½ Teaspoon Sea Salt
¼ Teaspoon Blackpepper

Optional Ingredients

¼ Teaspoon Garlic Powder
½ Teaspoon Rosemary

Instructions

1. Wash and rinse the red potatoes well, then dry them with a towel. Dice the potatoes into about ½-inch pieces.
2. Rinse the diced potatoes a second time to help remove excess starch, then drain and dry them again.
3. Add the potatoes to a large mixing bowl. Pour in the olive oil, sea salt, black pepper, and any optional seasonings you want to use. Toss until the potatoes are evenly coated.
4. Preheat your air fryer to 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 3 minutes. Lightly spray the air fryer basket with olive oil or avocado oil spray.
5. Add the potatoes to the air fryer basket in an even layer. Cook at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes.
6. Remove the basket and shake or stir the potatoes to flip them over. Cook for an additional 10 minutes, or until the potatoes are golden brown and crispy to your liking.
7. Serve hot with eggs, bacon, cheese grits, or your favorite breakfast or dinner dishes.

Notes

Rinsing the potatoes twice helps remove excess starch and makes the potatoes crispier in the air fryer.
Try not to overcrowd the air fryer basket so the potatoes cook evenly and get crispy.
Cooking times may vary slightly depending on the size of your potato pieces and your air fryer model.
For extra crispy potatoes, cook an additional 2 to 5 minutes.
These potatoes taste great with cheese grits, eggs, bacon, sausage, burgers, grilled chicken, or steak.
Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
Reheat leftovers in the air fryer at 375 degrees Fahrenheit for 3 to 5 minutes to crisp them back up.
This recipe is naturally gluten free.

Final Thoughts

These Crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes are one of the easiest side dishes you can make in the air fryer. They are packed with flavor, simple to prepare, and perfect for breakfast, lunch, or dinner. Once you make them, they may become a regular part of your weekly meals.

Air fryer breakfast potatoes served with eggs bacon and grits

Why The Smoke Pit in Monroe, NC Is Still One of My Favorite BBQ Spots Around Charlotte

May 17, 2026 by Ronnie Williams 2 Comments

If you’ve followed Southern Food Junkie for very long, then you already know I take barbecue seriously. Living in the Carolinas means there’s no shortage of BBQ restaurants, but every once in a while you find a place that keeps pulling you back in. For me, The Smoke Pit is one of those places.

This Monroe location is one of several Smoke Pit locations around the Charlotte metro area. The original restaurant started in Concord, NC, and they’ve continued expanding with locations in Monroe, Gastonia, Charlotte, Salisbury, and Mooresville.

Where Is The Smoke Pit Located?

Address:
1507 W Roosevelt Blvd
Monroe, NC 28110

The Smoke Pit is conveniently located on West Roosevelt Boulevard in Monroe, North Carolina, making it an easy stop for both locals and visitors traveling through Union County.

The restaurant sits just minutes from downtown Monroe and is easily accessible from US-74, making it a popular destination for barbecue lovers from Charlotte, Indian Trail, Matthews, Waxhaw, and the surrounding areas.

If you're looking for authentic North Carolina barbecue, smoked meats, and Southern comfort food in Monroe, The Smoke Pit is worth the drive.

A BBQ Spot Worth Driving To

The first thing I noticed pulling up to The Smoke Pit in Monroe was how clean and inviting the restaurant looked. It has that modern Carolina barbecue restaurant feel while still keeping that local BBQ atmosphere.

Inside, the restaurant has a warm wood interior with plenty of seating and a laid-back atmosphere that makes you want to slow down and enjoy your food.

This feels like the kind of place you could stop by after church on Sunday, grab lunch with family, or meet up with friends for barbecue and sweet tea.

The Pulled Pork Is Incredible

I’ve eaten at a lot of BBQ restaurants over the years, and honestly, the pulled pork here is still some of the best I’ve had around North Carolina.

The pork had a smoky flavor without being overpowering, and it stayed juicy and tender the entire meal. You can tell they take their time smoking it low and slow.

One thing I really appreciated was that the barbecue didn’t need to be covered in sauce to taste good. That’s usually how I judge good BBQ.

The sides were also excellent. On this visit I had potato salad and collard greens, and both had that homemade flavor you hope to find at a real Southern barbecue restaurant.

But one of my favorite little touches was the pickled red onions and pickles served on the side. That tangy flavor mixed perfectly with the smoky pork.

Here is another great BBQ restaurant that is in the Charlotte, NC

Don’t Skip The Sauces

If you love trying different barbecue sauces, The Smoke Pit has several options sitting right at the table.

They had sweet sauces, vinegar-based sauces, and even some with a little heat. I found myself trying different combinations throughout the meal.

The sauces added flavor without overpowering the meat, which I always appreciate.

The Story Behind The Smoke Pit

One thing I thought was really interesting was reading the story behind the restaurant.

The Smoke Pit originally opened in Concord, NC in 2014 with one smoker and a passion for real barbecue. Over the years, it has grown into multiple locations around North Carolina while still keeping that local barbecue feel.

I always enjoy supporting restaurants that grow from small beginnings into something bigger while staying true to their roots.

best restaurants around Charlotte NC

Final Thoughts

If you’re anywhere near Monroe, Concord, Charlotte, Gastonia, or just traveling through the area looking for good Carolina barbecue, I definitely think The Smoke Pit is worth checking out.

For me personally, it’s easily one of my top BBQ spots around the Charlotte metro area.

And if you go… don’t skip the pulled pork and those pickled onions.

Southern Food Junkie restaurant reviews

Frequently Asked Questions About The Smoke Pit in Monroe NC

Where is The Smoke Pit located in Monroe NC?

The Smoke Pit is located in Monroe, North Carolina, just outside the Charlotte metro area.

What is The Smoke Pit known for?

The Smoke Pit is best known for its Carolina-style barbecue, especially the pulled pork, brisket, ribs, smoked meats, homemade sides, and variety of barbecue sauces.

Does The Smoke Pit have multiple locations?

Yes. The Smoke Pit has locations in Concord, Monroe, Gastonia, Salisbury, Charlotte, and Mooresville, North Carolina.

What sides are good at The Smoke Pit?

Some popular sides include collard greens, potato salad, mac and cheese, baked beans, and coleslaw. I personally loved the collard greens and potato salad.

Is The Smoke Pit worth visiting?

If you enjoy Carolina barbecue and smoked meats, I definitely think The Smoke Pit is worth trying. For me personally, it’s one of my favorite BBQ spots around the Charlotte area.

Big's Meats and More in McBee SC Review: Is It Worth the Stop?

May 14, 2026 by Ronnie Williams 2 Comments

If you have ever traveled through McBee, SC, then you already know this small South Carolina town is famous for peaches, country charm, and hidden local gems. One place that keeps coming up in conversations is Big's Meats and More in McBee, SC.

After finally stopping in myself, I can honestly say this place feels like one of those classic Southern spots that people love telling their friends about.

Located right beside the famous McLeod Farms area, Big's Meats and More combines a local restaurant, butcher shop, and country market all into one place. From the moment you walk in, you can tell this is not your typical chain restaurant experience.

Where Is Big's Meats & More Located?

Address:
29241 Highway 151
McBee, SC 29101

Big's Meats & More is located in McBee, South Carolina, along Highway 151 in the heart of Chesterfield County. The restaurant sits just behind McLeod Farms, one of the area's most popular roadside markets and peach destinations, making it a favorite stop for travelers heading to or from the South Carolina coast.

Its location provides easy access for visitors coming from Hartsville, Florence, Pageland, Cheraw, and the surrounding Pee Dee region. If you're exploring McBee during peach season or looking for a local restaurant known for fresh-cut meats, burgers, and Southern favorites, Big's Meats & More is worth adding to your itinerary.

A True Small-Town Southern Restaurant in McBee, SC

One thing I immediately noticed about Big's Meats and More was the atmosphere. It has that authentic Southern small-town feel that is getting harder and harder to find these days.

You will see locals stopping in for lunch, families grabbing food together, and travelers pulling off Highway 151 looking for a good meal while passing through McBee, South Carolina.

The restaurant has a relaxed, hometown vibe, with a focus on good food and friendly service.

The Food at Big's Meats and More

The food was what really stood out to me.

Everything tasted fresh, homemade, and cooked with care instead of feeling rushed or mass-produced. The portions were generous, and the flavors reminded me of the type of food you would expect from a local Southern restaurant rather than fast food.

One thing that makes Big's Meats and More unique is that it is not only a restaurant. They also have a meat market where you can purchase fresh meat to take home and cook yourself.

If you enjoy Southern comfort food, barbecue, burgers, sandwiches, homemade sides, or fresh-cut meats, there is a good chance you will find something here you enjoy.

Why People Love Big's McBee SC

Places like Big's Meats and More in McBee, SC, are becoming rare.

In a world filled with cookie-cutter chain restaurants, this place feels authentic and local. That is probably why so many people traveling through Chesterfield County or heading toward the beach make a stop here.

There is just something about finding a local restaurant in South Carolina that still feels personal.

Whether you are traveling through peach country, spending time in McBee, SC, or simply looking for local restaurants in McBee, South Carolina, this place is worth checking out.

If you're heading toward the Grand Strand, another restaurant worth checking out is The Shack in Cherry Grove Beach, known for its Southern comfort food, seafood, and meat-and-three plates.

Is Big's Meats and More Worth Visiting?

In my opinion, absolutely.

Big's Meats and More is one of those restaurants that reminds you why local restaurants still matter. Good food, friendly people, and a true Southern atmosphere are hard to beat.

If you enjoy discovering hidden gems across South Carolina, then Bigs Meats and More in McBee, SC, deserves a spot on your list.

Big's Meats and More, McBee, SC Information

Address:
29241 Highway 151
McBee, SC 29101

Known For:
Southern food, fresh-cut meats, burgers, barbecue, sandwiches, homemade sides, and local small-town atmosphere.

If you want to see more local South Carolina restaurant reviews, Southern food spots, and hidden gems across the Carolinas, make sure to check out more reviews here on Southern Food Junkie.

Frequently Asked Questions About Bigs Meats and More in McBee, SC

Where is Bigs Meats and More located?

Bigs Meats and More is located in McBee, South Carolina, on Highway 151 near McLeod Farms, McBee, SC, and the famous peach orchards area.

What kind of food does Bigs Meats and More serve?

Bigs Meats & More in McBee, SC, is a popular local restaurant and butcher shop located near McLeod Farms on Highway 151. Known for its fresh Black Canyon Angus beef burgers, Southern comfort food, homemade sides, sandwiches, barbecue, and fresh-cut meats, it has become a favorite stop for both locals and travelers passing through the area.

Is Bigs Meats and More worth visiting?

If you enjoy local restaurants, hidden gems, and Southern food in South Carolina, Bigs Meats and More is definitely worth stopping at while traveling through McBee, SC.

Does Bigs Meats and More have a butcher shop?

Yes. In addition to the restaurant, Bigs Meats and More also has a meat market where customers can purchase fresh meats to take home.

Raising Cane's In Rock Hill, SC My Honest First Visit Review

February 28, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Raising Cane’s has officially opened in town, and folks around Rock Hill, SC have been lining up to try it. In this Raising Cane’s Rock Hill SC review, I’m breaking down the chicken tenders, Cane’s sauce, the sides, and whether this new spot really lives up to the hype in York County.

Is it just another fast food chicken place?
Or is it the best fast food chicken in Rock Hill, SC right now?

Here’s how my first visit went.

Raising Cane’s storefront in Rock Hill, SC

Where Is Raising Cane's Located?

Address:
520 John Ross Parkway
Rock Hill, SC 29730

Raising Cane's is located in the Manchester Village shopping area at the corner of John Ross Parkway and Dave Lyle Boulevard in Rock Hill, South Carolina. The restaurant sits just off Interstate 77 near Regal Manchester, HomeGoods, and other popular retail stores, making it a convenient stop for both locals and travelers passing through York County.

Its location provides easy access for visitors coming from Fort Mill, Tega Cay, Charlotte, and surrounding areas looking for Raising Cane's famous chicken fingers and Cane's Sauce.

Raising Cane’s Rock Hill, SC Location Review

First off — the place was packed. That’s expected when something new opens in York County. Folks around here show up when there’s chicken involved.

Service was solid. Friendly. Organized. But let’s be honest — it’s new. Corporate is still around. The real test will be how it holds up in six months.

And as much as I enjoyed it, Chick-fil-A is still the gold standard when it comes to service, but time will tell about Raising Cane's service at this Rock Hill location.

Now let’s talk food.

The Coleslaw – Sweet, But Heavy on the Mayo

I always start with the sides.

The slaw had:

Green cabbage
Red cabbage
Carrots

It was slightly sweet — which I liked — but for me, just a little too much mayo. Not bad. Just not my favorite slaw style. If you like creamy slaw, you’ll probably enjoy it more than I did.

Close-up of Raising Cane’s coleslaw with cabbage and carrots

The Crinkle-Cut Fries – Simple and Solid

These were classic crinkle fries with minimal seasoning. Just salt. Nothing fancy.

And sometimes simple is good.

They paired well with the sauce — which brings me to the real star.

Golden crinkle-cut fries served at Raising Cane’s Rock Hill location

Cane’s Sauce – The Secret Weapon

Let’s just go ahead and say it — Cane’s sauce makes the meal.

It looks like a mix of mayo and ketchup with garlic, black pepper, and some herbs mixed in. Slightly sweet, a little savory. When you dip that chicken in it? That’s where it shines.

Close-up of Raising Cane’s signature dipping sauce

Without the sauce, the chicken is good.
With the sauce, it’s great.

The Chicken – Tender, Juicy, and Reminded Me of Fatz Café or Shrimp Boat Chicken

Now this is where it got interesting for me.

The chicken had minimal seasoning on its own. But it was very tender and very juicy — probably the most tender fast food chicken I’ve had.

And I’m going to say something that might hit some of y’all right in the nostalgia:

It reminded me of the old calabash-style chicken at Fatz Café. And honestly, the tenders also reminded me a lot of the chicken tenders at Shrimp Boat in Rock Hill, SC — light breading, not overly seasoned, and really tender inside.

Chicken Tenders from Shrimp Boat in Rock Hill, SC for comparison

If you know, you know.

That light breading. That soft bite. That clean flavor. It’s not heavily spiced. It lets the chicken speak for itself.

Dipped in that Cane’s sauce? That’s the move.

The Texas Toast – Surprisingly Good

The Texas toast looked like that Italian bread loaf you can grab from the grocery store bakery.

But it was buttery, toasted just right, and honestly one of my favorite parts of the tray. I really enjoyed it.

Is Raising Cane’s the Best Fast Food Chicken in Rock Hill, SC?

Here’s my honest take as someone who writes Southern recipes and grew up on sweet tea, cat head biscuits, and Sunday lunches:

As far as chicken quality — tenderness and juiciness — this may be the best fast food chicken in Rock Hill right now.

Flavor-wise? It depends on what you like.

If you want bold seasoning in the breading, you may lean toward other spots, such as Zaxby's or Helen's Hot Chicken (which I love by the way).
If you want clean, tender chicken that shines when dipped in sauce — Cane’s does that very well.

Overall, my first experience at Raising Cane’s in Rock Hill, SC was great.

Will it stay that way once the newness wears off?
Time will tell.

Final Thoughts from a Rock Hill, SC Food Blogger

As a someone who regularly visits restaurants across York County, I don’t hype places up just because they’re new. I tell you exactly what I experienced.

And this one? It wasn’t just buzz. The chicken really was that tender.

If you landed here searching for:

Raising Cane’s Rock Hill SC review
Best chicken fingers in Rock Hill South Carolina
Is Raising Cane’s better than Chick-fil-A?
New restaurants in Rock Hill SC

Here’s my honest take:

It’s absolutely worth trying for yourself.

And if you appreciate juicy, simple chicken done right — you may find yourself pulling back through that drive-thru again.

If you’ve eaten at the Rock Hill Raising Cane’s location, let me know what you think.

And if there’s another Rock Hill, SC restaurant you want me to review next, drop it in the comments.

— Ronnie
Southern Food Junkie

How Much Coffee and Water for French Press Coffee (Beginner-Friendly Guide)

January 20, 2026 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

If you’ve ever wondered how much coffee and water for French press brewing is actually needed, you’re not alone. If your French press coffee has ever tasted too weak, too bitter, or just off, chances are it wasn’t the coffee—it was the ratio.

French press coffee is one of the simplest ways to brew great coffee at home, but it’s also easy to overthink. The good news? Once you understand the right coffee-to-water ratio, you’ll get a rich, bold cup every single time—without fancy equipment or guesswork.

Let’s break it down in a simple, practical way.

If you enjoy coffee shop-style drinks at home, you may also like my guide on making iced coffee at home with an iced coffee maker.

A freshly brewed French press coffee on a wooden table, with a rich golden crema and cozy morning setup

The Best French Press Coffee Ratio

The tried-and-true ratio for French press coffee is:

1:15 (coffee to water)

That means 1 gram of coffee for every 15 grams of water. This ratio strikes a great balance—strong enough to bring out the coffee’s natural oils and flavor, but smooth enough to avoid bitterness.

If you don’t have a scale, don’t worry. I’ll give you easy spoon and cup measurements too.

French Press Coffee Measurements by Size

Here are the most common French press sizes and exactly how much coffee and water to use:

8 oz Cup

Coffee: 15 grams (about 1 heaping tablespoon)
Water: 225 grams (about 8 oz)

Perfect for a single cup without waste.

12 oz Mug

Coffee: 24 grams (about 2 tablespoons)
Water: 360 grams (about 12 oz)

Great for a larger morning cup or travel mug.

32 oz French Press (1 Liter)

Coffee: 60–65 grams (about 8 tablespoons or ½ cup)
Water: 1,000 grams (1 liter)

This is my go-to size when brewing for more than one person—or when I know it’s going to be a long morning.

Use the Right Grind Size

Grind size matters just as much as the ratio.

For French press:

Use a coarse grind, similar to sea salt

Too fine a grind will slip through the filter and make your coffee muddy or bitter. A coarse grind keeps the coffee clean, bold, and smooth.

Using the right grind size is just as important as using quality brewing equipment.

Coarse coffee grounds suitable for French press brewing

Choosing a Coffee Roast for French Press

The roast you choose plays a big role in how your French press coffee tastes. Medium and medium-dark roasts are the most popular options because they deliver a smooth, balanced cup with rich flavor and low bitterness. They’re ideal for everyday brewing and work especially well with a coarse grind.

Light roasts offer brighter, more acidic flavors and can work in a French press if you enjoy a crisp cup, though they require careful brewing. Dark and French roasts produce bold, smoky coffee with lower acidity and a heavier body. These roasts shine in a French press but should be steeped closer to four minutes to avoid bitterness.

Quick tip: For consistent results, choose a medium or medium-dark roast, coarse ground. If you prefer a stronger, smoky flavor, French roast is a great option—just don’t over-steep it.

How to Make French Press Coffee: Step by Step

Boil Your Water – Heat 8 oz (or the amount you need) to 195–205°F. If you have a kettle, it is much easier.

Add Coffee to Your French Press – Use 1 tablespoon of coarse-ground coffee per 8 oz of water. (For more than one serving, see the chart above.) Coarse grind is key to keeping your coffee smooth and clean.

Pour the Hot Water – Slowly pour the water over the coffee grounds, making sure they’re evenly saturated.

Steep – Place the top on with the plunger up, and let your coffee steep for 4–5 minutes. This gives you rich flavor without bitterness.

Press and Serve – Slowly press the plunger down, pour your coffee into your favorite mug, and enjoy!

Quick Tips:

Adjust steep time slightly if you like your coffee stronger or milder.
Use medium or medium-dark roast for smooth, balanced flavor, or try French roast if you prefer bold, smoky coffee.

Watch this video for more info:

Southern Sweet Potato Pie Recipe With Condensed Milk (Easy)

October 22, 2024 by Ronnie Williams 4 Comments

Southern sweet potato pie recipe featuring condensed milk—rich, creamy, and simple to make any time of year.

Why This Southern Sweet Potato Pie Recipe with Condensed Milk Works

Minimal ingredients, maximum flavor – pantry staples you’ll likely have on hand.

Southern classic made simple – no piping bags or fancy techniques.

Ultra-creamy & sweet thanks to smooth condensed milk.

Flexible for all occasions, from holiday feasts to cozy weeknight desserts.

What You’ll Love

Flavor-packed – sweet potatoes, cinnamon, nutmeg, butter & vanilla combine for that perfect Southern taste.
Creamy & decadent texture from condensed milk, elevating it above standard versions.
Effortless prep – bake or microwave sweet potatoes, mix, and bake in just over an hour.
Versatile serving – enjoy warm, room temperature, or cold topped with whipped cream or ice cream.
Kid-friendly & nostalgic – fond family memories. Inspired by Grandma Mildred’s pie.

If you love Pumpkin Desserts, you have to try these Southern Food Junkie Pumpkin Squares. They are similar to Pumpkin Roll but in a very easy-to-make square form.

If you enjoy the rich, comforting flavors of sweet potato pie, you might also want to try another seasonal favorite: my Old-Fashioned Persimmon Pudding recipe. This delightful dessert offers a unique twist with its own set of warm, spiced flavors that perfectly capture the essence of fall.

This recipe was inspired by my Grandma Mildred, my dad always said she made the best Sweet Potato Pie. I can remember the day when my dad said that my mom's tasted like to hers. I know that made my mom's heart happy. Now, I am setting out to make Grandma's sweet potato pie but with my twist on it.

If you love sweet potatoes, you also have to try another one of my fall favorites: Old Fashioned Sweet Potato Casserole.

What You Need to Make This Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Ingredients for Southern Sweet Potato Pie with Condensed Milk

To make this rich and creamy Southern sweet potato pie recipe with condensed milk, you’ll need:

Sweet potatoes (freshly baked or microwaved)
Sweetened condensed milk
Salted butter
Large eggs
Vanilla extract
Ground cinnamon and nutmeg
Ground clove (optional, but adds depth)
A pinch of sea salt
9" deep dish pie crust (store-bought or homemade)
Optional: orange zest or whipped cream for topping

👉 See exact measurements and printable instructions down below.

Optional Ingredients:

Orange Zest: Adding orange zest to sweet potato pie imparts a bright, citrusy note that complements the pie’s rich sweetness and adds a refreshing twist. To me, it is a secret ingredient.

Toppings

Whipped Cream
Marshmallow Cream (fluff)
A scoop of vanilla ice cream

Equipment You'll Need

Large Mixing Bowl
Electric Mixer
Potato Masher or Food Processor
Measuring Cups and Spoons
Baking Sheet or microwave-safe plate
Wire rack
Pie Pan- If using a homemade crust
spoon

For a comprehensive list of recommended equipment and brands I love, check out my Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for Everyday Use.

How to Make this Recipe

Step-by-step instructions

First, start by preheating the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

Prepare Sweet Potatoes

Wash and scrub sweet potatoes. Using a fork, prick holes around the sweet potatoes. If using the oven to bake them, place sweet potatoes on a baking sheet and bake for 45 minutes to 1 hour. If you use my microwave method to bake a sweet potato, place the potatoes on a microwave-safe plate or dish. For a medium potato, cook for 5-6 minutes or until the center of the potato is fork-tender. For three potatoes, cook for roughly 10 minutes.
Once the sweet potatoes are fork-tender, you will remove the flesh from the skin. A spoon works great for removing the flesh. Use a food processor to process the flesh into a smooth pulp then add the mashed sweet potatoes to a large bowl. An alternative is to add the sweet potatoes to a large mixing bowl and mash the flesh up with a potato masher or fork.

Prepare the Pie Crust

Lay out frozen pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. If you have pie weights, you can use them. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown. After baking, brush the pie crust with a little of the melted butter.

Make the Sweet Potato Pie Filling

Add the eggs, condensed milk, vanilla extract, salt, cinnamon, nutmeg, and the rest of the melted butter to the mixing bowl. Mix with the electric mixer or a heavy whisk until smooth and creamy.

Bake the Pie

Pour the pie filling into the prepared crust and bake for 40 to 50 minutes. Remove the pie when the edges are set and the center is still slightly jiggly. Once the pie is done, remove it from the oven and place the pie on a wire cooling rack to cool.

Variations & Hacks

Make‑ahead: Refrigerate up to 4 days or freeze (wrapped) for up to 3 months.

Spiced twist? Add a dash of pumpkin pie spice instead of individual cinnamon + nutmeg.

Crust options: Use graham cracker crust for a sweeter contrast.

Serve & Store Like a Pro

Store: Refrigerate covered for up to 4 days. Freeze fully cooled in double wrap for up to 3 months.

Serve: Top with freshly whipped cream, marshmallow fluff, or vanilla ice cream.

FAQ's

Can I use canned sweet potatoes instead of fresh ones?

Yes, you can use canned sweet potatoes if fresh ones are not available. Just be sure to drain and mash them well before using.

How can I tell when the pie is done?

The pie is done when the edges are set and the center is still slightly jiggly. It will continue to firm up as it cools.

What can I do if my pie crust is getting too brown?

If your pie crust is browning too quickly, cover the edges with aluminum foil to prevent them from burning while the filling finishes baking.

Can I use Pumpkin Pie Spice instead of the spices you have listed?

Yes, you can use pumpkin-pie spice in sweet potato pie as a convenient alternative to individual spices like cinnamon, nutmeg, and cloves. It will add a warm, spiced flavor that complements the sweet potato filling. Just replace the combined spices in the recipe with an equal amount of pumpkin-pie spice.

2 pies

Southern Sweet Potato Pie Recipe With Condensed Milk (Easy)

Prep Time: 20 minutes

Cook Time: 35 minutes

Additional Time: 10 minutes

Total Time: 1 hour 5 minutes

Enjoy a classic Southern sweet potato pie with condensed milk. This rich, creamy dessert is perfect for any occasion and is easy to make from scratch.

No Ratings

Ingredients

3 Large Sweet potatoes
1 can (14 ounce) of Condensed Milk (sweetened)
6 tablespoons of salted butter
2 Eggs
1 Teaspoon of vanilla Extract
1 teaspoon of ground cinnamon
½ teaspoon of ground nutmeg
1 9-inch frozen unbaked pie crust (pie shell)

Instructions

Step-by-step Instructions

Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.

Prepare Sweet Potatoes

Wash and scrub sweet potatoes. Using a fork, prick holes around the sweet potatoes. If using the oven to bake them, place sweet potatoes on a baking sheet and bake for 45 minutes to 1 hour. If you use my microwave method to bake a sweet potato, place the potatoes on a microwave-safe plate or dish. For a medium potato, cook for 5-6 minutes or until the center of the potato is fork-tender. For three potatoes, cook for roughly 10 minutes.
Once the sweet potatoes are fork-tender, you will remove the flesh from the skin. A spoon works great for removing the flesh. Use a food processor to process the flesh into a smooth pulp then add the mashed sweet potatoes to a large bowl. An alternative is to add the sweet potatoes to a large mixing bowl and mash the flesh up with a potato masher or fork.

Prepare the Pie Crust (shells)

Lay out frozen pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. If you have pie weights, you can use them. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown. After baking, brush the pie crust with a little of the melted butter.

Make the Sweet Potato Pie Filling

Add the eggs, condensed milk, vanilla extract, salt, Cinnamon, Nutmeg, and melted butter to the mixing bowl. Mix with the electric mixer or a heavy whisk until smooth and creamy.

Bake the Sweet Potato Pie

Pour the pie filling into the prepared crust and bake for 35 to 45 minutes. Remove the pie when the edges are set and the center is still slightly jiggly. Once the pie is done, remove it from the oven and place the pie on a wire cooling rack to cool.

Easy Air Fryer Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe

September 10, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

If you're looking for a crowd-pleasing appetizer to highlight your next party or game day, these Easy Air Fryer Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers are the answer. With crispy bacon wrapped around spicy jalapenos and a zesty kick from Tajin, this recipe combines simple ingredients to create a mouthwatering treat that's both savory and satisfying.

The jalapenos are filled with a tangy cream cheese mixture that perfectly balances the heat, then wrapped in crispy bacon and topped with a zesty sprinkle of Tajin. Not only are these poppers one of my go-to appetizers, but they're also incredibly simple to make, so you can have a batch ready in no time.

They can also make a great side dish for almost any meal. Trust me, your guests will be coming back for seconds!

They are similar to baked Jalapeno Poppers, but what makes that recipe unique is that they are made in an air fryer for ease and convenience.

History of Jalapeno Poppers

Originally from the Southwestern United States, these bite-sized snacks have become a favorite at Super Bowl parties, barbecues, cookouts, tailgate events, holiday gatherings, housewarmings, game nights, Cinco de Mayo celebrations, and casual get-togethers.

According to Pitco, Many food historians surmise that what we call jalapeño poppers were also simply an alternate variation of chiles rellenos. Nobody is quite sure when or where the first modern jalapeño poppers were served, although popular opinion seems to agree that the dish originated in Texas sometime around 1972. Jalapeño Poppers have long been a favorite in the world of Party appetizers, and it's easy to see why, because they are such an easy appetizer to make.

Explore more mouthwatering appetizer recipes to enhance your party menu by visiting Southern Food Junkie!

Why You'll Love This Dish

Crispy Perfection: The air fryer delivers perfectly crispy bacon without the mess of frying, giving you a satisfying crunch in every bite.
Quick and Easy: With just a few simple ingredients and minimal prep time, you can whip up a batch of these jalapeno poppers in no time—perfect for last-minute gatherings or game-day snacks.
Balanced Flavor: The combination of spicy jalapenos, tangy cream cheese, smoky bacon, and a dash of Tajin offers a delicious balance of flavors that everyone will love.
Low Carb and Keto Friendly- Keto jalapeno poppers are a mouthwatering treat featuring spicy jalapenos wrapped in crispy bacon, making them a perfect appetizer.

What does this Dish taste like?

Air fryer bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers are a flavorful blend of spicy, creamy, smoky, and zesty. The jalapenos bring a mild heat, while the tangy cream cheese filling cools it down, creating a perfect balance.

The bacon adds a savory, smoky crunch, and the sprinkle of Tajin adds a bright, citrusy kick with a touch of chili spice. Each bite delivers a satisfying mix of textures and flavors, from crispy to creamy, with a delicious hint of heat and zest. Unlike traditional jalapeno poppers, these are usually baked instead of deep-fried.

Why Use the Air Fryer?

There are a few good reasons to use the air fryer when making bacon-wrapped air fryer jalapeño peppers. One of the best reasons is convenience. Using the air fryer is very convenient because it cooks food quickly and efficiently. Not only does this reduce the cooking time, but you are using a small appliance and not a big oven.

Another reason is clean-up. Using the air fryer makes cleaning up a breeze because all you have to clean is the air fryer basket.

The type of air fryer you use is not as important as most are made pretty much the same. The best air fryer is the one you have, but a few of the popular ones that I recommend:

Note: If you're using a new air fryer, be sure to clean it thoroughly before the first use. I also recommend running it through a few heat cycles to break it in properly.

Explore a world of delicious possibilities with our air fryer recipes—find easy, healthy, and crispy dishes that will elevate your cooking game and save you time!

What You Need to Make this Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Ingredients

See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

Fresh jalapeño peppers
Cream Cheese
Sharp Cheddar Cheese
Thin-cut bacon slices- Buy the regular bacon that you would see. I mention this to say not to get thick-cut bacon, as it takes longer to cook and crisp up.
Tajin Seasoning

Optional Ingredients

Garlic powder
Onion powder

Garnish

Fresh Cilantro
Green onions
Tajin- Sprinkle on top for extra flavor.

Equipment You'll Need

Air Fryer
Cutting board
Sharp Knife
Baking sheet
Parchment Paper or Aluminum Foil
Mixing bowl
Spoon or small scoop: To mix the filling ingredients, scoop out the jalapeño halves.
Toothpicks: to secure the bacon around the jalapenos for baking.

For a complete list of items that I use and recommend, visit our Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for Everyday Kitchen Use.

How to Make this Dish

Step-by-step instructions

Preheat the air fryer for 6 mins at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise.

Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane.

Rinse each jalapeno pepper half off to remove any remaining seeds, etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help, and make sure to wash your hands thoroughly after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes into contact with them.
Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again.

Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon.
Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers.
Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños.

I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end. I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking.
Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer in the air fryer basket.

Cook the jalapeno poppers for 13 to 15 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit or until the bacon is golden brown and crispy.

Garnish

Remove the poppers from the air fryer and sprinkle with additional Tajin seasoning. Garnish with fresh cilantro or green onions if desired.

Serving

Let the jalapeno poppers cool slightly before serving. Enjoy them warm as a delicious appetizer!

Tips for Sucess

Use Fresh Jalapenos: Choose firm, fresh jalapenos for the best flavor and texture. Avoid peppers that are soft or wrinkled.
Adjust Spice Level: If you prefer less heat, you can remove more of the seeds and membranes from the jalapenos. For extra heat, keep some seeds in the filling.
Soften Cream Cheese: Ensure the cream cheese is well-softened before mixing to achieve a smooth and creamy filling.
Season Generously: Don’t be shy with seasoning. The Tajin adds a great flavor, but you can also experiment with other spices or herbs.
Wrap Bacon Tightly: Wrap the bacon snugly around the jalapenos and secure it with toothpicks if necessary to prevent the bacon from unraveling during cooking.
Use Thin-Cut Bacon: Thin-cut bacon crisps up better and cooks more evenly, ensuring a great texture.
Preheat the Air Fryer Properly: Ensure your air fryer is fully preheated to achieve consistent cooking results.
Monitor Cooking Time: Keep an eye on the poppers to prevent overcooking or burning. The bacon should be crispy, and the cheese should be melted and bubbly.

Substitutions

For a slightly milder pepper, you can use Poblano peppers.
Mini sweet peppers or Banana peppers can also be used to lower the spice level.
You can also substitute the cheddar cheese for feta cheese for a tangier taste.
Goat cheese can be substituted for cream cheese.

How to Store Leftover Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

Bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers can be stored in an airtight container. Place them in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

FAQ's

Do I need to preheat the air fryer?

Yes. Preheat the air fryer for 6 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

Can I use different types of cheese?

Yes, you can substitute different types of cheese, like goat cheese for cream cheese, cheddar, or Monterey Jack, based on your preference.

Can I make these poppers ahead of time?

Yes, you can make them ahead of time. Store them in the refrigerator and cook them in the air fryer just before serving.

What can I serve with air fryer bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers?

They pair well with dipping sauces like ranch, blue cheese, or a simple aioli. They also make a great addition to a party platter with other appetizers.

20 Poppers

Easy Air Fryer Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Cook Time: 13 minutes

Additional Time: 2 minutes

Total Time: 30 minutes

For a game day hit or party favorite, try these Easy Air Fryer Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeño Poppers. Crispy bacon, spicy jalapeños, and a Tajin kick make them irresistible!

No Ratings

Ingredients

10 Fresh Jalapenos, cut in halve lengthwise with seeds and membrane removed
8 ounces of softened cream cheese
10 slices of thin-cut bacon, sliced in half (20 half pieces)
1 cup sharp cheddar cheese
1 teaspoon of Tajin

Optional Ingredients

½ Teaspoon of garlic powder
½ teaspoon of onion powder
½ teaspoon of sea salt or Kosher salt (only use if not using Tajin)
½ Teaspoon of ground black pepper

Garnish

Green onions
Cilantro

Instructions

Preheat the air fryer for 6 mins at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise.
Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane.
Rinse each jalapeno pepper half off to remove any remaining seeds etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help and make sure to wash your hands good after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes in contact with it.
Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again.
Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon.
Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers.
Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños.
I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end, I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking.
Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer in the air fryer basket.
Bake the jalapeno poppers for 13 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit or until the bacon is golden brown and crispy.

The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe

September 2, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Get ready to impress at your next party with this Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe. This easy buffalo chicken dip is a crowd-pleaser, perfect for any occasion, whether it's a casual get-together, a baby shower, the Super Bowl, or a New Year's Eve bash. As the ideal party food, this dip will quickly become your go-to recipe, ensuring your event has the perfect party appetizer everyone will rave about.

This is a image of Buffalo Chicken Dip Slow Cooker being dip out of a white bowl to eat it.

Everyone has that go-to dish they're famous for bringing to parties, and for my wife, this is it. She loves making this recipe, and it's easy to see why—it's delicious. This tangy appetizer is perfect for football season or your Super Bowl party. We whip it up for finger food gatherings and more. It's incredibly quick to make and easy to make with just a few simple ingredients. The best part is it cooks in your slow cooker while you get ready for game day!

If you're putting together a party or game-day spread, my Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon is another easy appetizer that pairs perfectly with crackers or toasted bread.

History of Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe

Buffalo chicken dip, has its roots in the iconic Buffalo wing, which originated in Buffalo, New York, in the 1960s. According to Farm Flavor, The very first plate of Buffalo wings was served at Anchor Bar in Buffalo, New York. According to the story, the secret recipe originated on a Friday night in 1964, when bartender Dominic Bellissimo asked his mother, Teressa, to whip something up for a few regulars who arrived at the bar around midnight.

Buffalo chicken dip is a more recent innovation that captures the flavors of Buffalo wings in a creamy, spreadable form. It became popular in the early 2000s as a convenient and crowd-pleasing party dish, particularly during football season. The dip typically combines shredded chicken, cream cheese, hot sauce, ranch or blue cheese dressing, and shredded cheese, then it's baked or cooked in a slow cooker until hot and bubbly.

This is a image of Crock Pot Buffalo Chicken Dip in a bowl with a bag of Corn Tortilla chips and a green plant in the back ground.

Over time, it has become a staple at gatherings, especially those centered around sports events like the Super Bowl. Its versatility and ease of preparation have solidified its place as a beloved party food across the United States.

If you appreciate the convenience of a slow cooker, you'll love this Sweet Baby Ray's Crockpot Chicken. It's perfect for busy parents looking for an easy weekend dinner. It's also great for party gatherings or finger food parties.

Why You'll This Dip

Incredible Flavor: The rich, creamy blend of spicy buffalo sauce, tender chicken, and tangy cheese creates a flavor combination that's both satisfying and addictive. It brings all the classic taste of Buffalo chicken wings into a convenient, shareable dip.
Easy Recipe: With just a few simple ingredients and minimal prep, this dip is incredibly easy to throw together. The slow cooker does most of the work, making it a stress-free option for entertaining.
Perfect for Any Occasion: Whether it's a game day, a potluck, or a casual get-together, this dip is versatile and universally loved. It's the kind of dish that fits in perfectly at any party or event.
Crowd-Pleaser: This dip is always a hit, guaranteed to impress guests and leave them coming back for more. Its familiar flavors and comforting texture make it a go-to favorite for any crowd.

Browse our Appetizer category to find all of our appetizer recipes.

This is a close up of a corn tortilla chip with Franks Red-hot Buffalo Chicken Dip on the chip. In the background you can see a white bowl with more of the chicken dip in it.

What Does This Dip Taste Like

Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip delivers a bold, spicy kick from buffalo sauce balanced by the rich creaminess of cheese, cool ranch dressing, and savory shredded chicken. The result is a comforting, tangy dip that's irresistibly flavorful and perfect for any occasion.

What You Need to Make This Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Chicken- This recipe is all about convenience. For a quick option, we use canned chicken breast, but for a more flavorful dish, cook and shred raw chicken breast in a stock pot. You can also opt for cooked rotisserie chicken to add an extra layer of taste.
Buffalo Sauce- We like to use Frank's Red Hot Buffalo Sauce or Texas Pete Buffalo Sauce, but you can also make your own Buffalo wing sauce if you prefer.
Cream Cheese- Make sure the cream cheese is soft
Ranch Dressing- Ranch dressing gives the dip a cool, creamy texture, making it a deliciously creamy dip that balances out the heat of the buffalo sauce.
Tortilla Chips
Celery Sticks

Garnish

Sharp Shredded Cheese- Sharp cheddar cheese adds a robust, tangy flavor to the recipe, enhancing the dip's rich, savory taste. Shred block cheese for the best flavor and texture. Pre-shredded cheese has a coating that can give this dish a gritty texture.
Green Onions

See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

This is a image showing all the ingredients with labels to make buffalo chicken dip.

Equipment You'll Need

Slow Cooker- 3 to 6-quart crock pot
Can opener- if using canned chicken
Stock Pot- if using raw chicken
Cheese grater
Measuring Cup
Mixing spoon
Serving Utensils- For serving the dip, such as a ladle or spoon.

For a complete list of all the kitchen tools and the brands we recommend, check out this Kitchen Essentials List for everyday use!

How To Make

Step-by-step Instructions

Turn the slow cooker on to low heat.
Open and drain the cans of chicken.

This is a image of a person showing how to drain a can of chicken before making buffalo chicken dip.

Use a mixing spoon or fork to break up the chicken. Add all the ingredients to the slow cooker. After the crock pot has heated up, mix everything until well incorporated.

This is a image of showing how to break up canned chicken to make chicken dip.

This is a image of adding buffalo hot sauce to make buffalo chicken dip.

This is a image of adding ranch dressing to a slow cooker to make buffalo chicken dip.

Cook on low for 1-2 hours, stirring occasionally to ensure even cooking.
Garnish with shredded cheese and green onions.

How to Serve

The best way to enjoy Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip is with a variety of dippable sides. Here are some popular options:

Tortilla Chips: Perfect for scooping up the creamy dip and adding a crunchy texture.
Celery Sticks: Offers a fresh, crisp contrast to the rich and spicy dip.
Carrot Sticks: Another crunchy, slightly sweet option that complements the dip’s heat.
Crackers: Provide a sturdy base for dipping and add a savory crunch.
Bread: Sliced baguette or toasted bread can be used for a heartier dipper.
Pretzel Chips: Adds a salty crunch that pairs well with the creamy and spicy flavors.

These options allow you to enjoy the dip in various ways and find your favorite combination.

This is a image of Cheesy Crockpot Buffalo Chicken Dip being scoop out of a white bowl with a corn tortilla chip.

How To Store Leftovers and Reheat

If you have leftovers, they can be stored in an airtight container. Place the container in the refrigerator for up to 3-5 days. To reheat, use a microwave-safe dish or baking dish. You can reheat it in the microwave or the oven.

FAQ's

Can I use fresh chicken instead of canned?

Yes, you can use fresh chicken. Cook it in a stock pot until fully cooked, then shred it before adding it to the slow cooker.

How long can I keep the dip in the slow cooker?

You can keep the dip in the slow cooker on the "warm" setting for several hours without overcooking. However, it's best enjoyed within 2 hours of cooking.

Can I make this dip ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare the dip a day in advance. Store it in the refrigerator, then reheat it in the slow cooker on low until warmed through.

What can I use instead of ranch dressing?

If you prefer, you can use blue cheese dressing for a more traditional Buffalo wing flavor, or opt for a homemade version of either dressing.

20 servings

The Best Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip Recipe (Crock Pot)

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Cook Time: 2 hours

Total Time: 2 hours 10 minutes

This Slow Cooker Buffalo Chicken Dip is the ultimate crowd-pleaser, blending the spicy kick of buffalo sauce with the creamy richness of cheese and tender shredded chicken. Perfect for any occasion, from casual get-togethers to game-day parties, this easy dip is sure to impress your guests. With minimal prep and the convenience of a slow cooker, it's a go-to recipe that will have everyone coming back for more.

5.0 Stars (112 Reviews)

Ingredients

2- 12.5 ounce cans of chicken (drained)
2-8 ounce packages of softened cream cheese
1 cup of Franks Red Hot Buffalo Sauce (or comparable brand)
1 cup of Ranch Dressing

Garnish

Sharp Cheddar Cheese
Chopped Green onion

Instructions

Turn the slow cooker on to low heat.
Open and drain the cans of chicken.
Add all the ingredients to the slow cooker (Crock Pot). Use a mixing spoon or fork to break up the chicken. After the crock pot has heated up, mix everything until well incorporated.
Cook on low for 1-2 hours, stirring occasionally to ensure even cooking.
Garnish with shredded cheese and green onions.

Best Iced Coffee Makers for Homemade Coffee in 2026

August 16, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

There’s nothing worse than iced coffee that turns watery five minutes after you make it. After using several iced coffee makers at home, my top pick is the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker because it's inexpensive, simple to use, and makes a surprisingly good glass of iced coffee.

If you want more versatility, I'd choose the Ninja DualBrew, while the Keurig K-Iced is a good choice for people who prefer the convenience of K-Cups.

Here’s a closer look at all three iced coffee makers, what I like about each one, and which one I think is the best choice for making iced coffee at home.

Top 3 Iced Coffee Makers

This article is arranged from my favorite to least favorite. I am coming out of the gate and giving you the best iced coffee maker from the start.

#1 Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker

Who this is best for

Best for beginners wanting simple homemade iced coffee
Great for people who want an affordable iced coffee maker
Perfect for someone who values simplicity over extra features
Best for coffee drinkers who prefer using fresh coffee grounds
Great for anyone wanting a quick grab-and-go iced coffee setup

A few years ago, Mr. Coffee launched this iced coffee maker. My wife, who usually doesn’t ask for much, really wanted this coffee maker. At the time, the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker was exclusively available at Target and quickly became a hot item.

Much like Stanley’s successful comeback with their Starbucks collaboration, Mr. Coffee’s strategy was a smart marketing move. Although I couldn’t snag one for her for Christmas because it was sold out, I managed to get it in January when it became available again. I ended up loving this little unit. Here is what I like about it and what I do not.

Buy Now

Pros:

I love it because it is cheap and super simple to use. It only has one button; that is all. All you have to do is add water and coffee, hit the button, and you're off to making the good iced coffee.

Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker Scoop Size

The thing about Iced Coffee is you have to account for the ice that is going to melt, which will naturally dilute your coffee. Mr. Coffee has considered all that. The scoop size that is included is a 1.5 tablespoon scoop, more than you would traditionally have for one serving of coffee. This makes it perfect for brewing the right ratio of hot, concentrated coffee over ice.

As a bonus, it has a built-in filter. This filter is removable, so you can clean it. No need to waste extra money on buying pods, just use your favorite fresh ground coffee.

According to their instruction manual, "This machine uses RapidChill brewing to quickly cool hot concentrated coffee over ice, leaving you with a flavorful iced coffee that's never watered down". I am not sure about the Rapid Chill, but I do feel this is true about the concentrated coffee not tasting watered down.

Environmentally Friendly

This is also environmentally friendly, as there is no single-use plastic involved, unlike the pods. The machine is made from plastic materials, but has held up great so far. It has been a great Iced coffee machine.

Included Tumbler

Mr. Coffee also includes an insulated coffee tumbler that has the measurements on the cup for the water to pour into the coffee maker and a fill line for the ice in the cup. Genius, I tell ya! It doesn't get any simpler than this. We have had this machine for a few years and have had no issues with it. In my opinion, it is the best iced coffee maker.

Cons:

One downside is that it feels a bit flimsy, though I haven't had any issues with it. Additionally, the brewing process takes a bit longer compared to other brands because it uses a drip coffee method rather than K-Cups. Plus, it only offers one brew option, which might limit versatility for some users. However, sometimes simplicity is best.

Final Review

All in all, this coffee maker is a great pick, in my opinion, for a perfect brew and a good value. It is right up top for the best at-home iced coffee maker.

Check out this video of me using the Mr. Coffee iced Coffee maker.

If you enjoy cold homemade drinks during the summer, you may also like these refreshing iced tea recipes.

#2 Ninja DualBrew Hot and Iced Coffee Maker

Who This Is Best For

Best for coffee lovers who want both hot and iced coffee options
Great for households with multiple coffee preferences
Perfect for people who like lots of features and customization
Best for users who want both K-Cups and coffee grounds compatibility
Great for larger families or heavy coffee drinkers

The Ninja DualBrew Hot and Iced Coffee Maker is a standout machine with a sleek, modern design that resembles automotive styling. It boasts a range of features, including the ability to brew both hot and cold coffee. It accommodates both K-pods and coffee grounds. With its advanced features and functionality, it's perfect for anyone who loves gadgets and wants a coffee maker with all the bells and whistles.

Buy Now

Pros

One of the biggest advantages I see with the Ninja DualBrew is the ability to do the dual brew. You can use K-pods, or you can use coffee grounds to make traditional iced coffee. I know you can do that with the Keurig with a filter, but let me be honest, it is a hassle. This unit lets you choose either one without buying a separate basket or any other part.

Another great option is the brew size. You can choose a single cup or brew up to a full glass carafe of coffee. I like that it is so versatile. The Ninja DualBrew also has three strength settings: Classic, Rich, or over ice for grounds or pods, for personal taste. The Coffee maker also has a very large water reservoir, so you can brew multiple cups before needing to refill.

The final thing that I love about this coffee maker is how quickly it brews coffee when using the K-pod function. It is said to make a cup faster than a Keurig K-Elite.

Cons

One of the biggest cons that I can see is the complexity of the machine. When compared to the other two units, the Ninja DualBrew Iced coffee maker is the most complex of the three.

Complexity often brings a higher price tag, and that’s true for the Ninja. It is the most expensive of the three iced coffee makers we reviewed. Additionally, it is the largest of the group. It is not massive, but it doesn’t have the compact footprint of the other two. However, I don’t consider this a deal breaker.

Final Thoughts

I’m impressed with this unit. While it may not be as straightforward to use as the other two, it could effectively replace both of them. Currently, I use a Keurig for quick hot coffee on the go and a Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker when I crave iced coffee. Although I’m fond of the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker, this new one is a great addition and offers a lot of value!

#3 Keurig K-Iced Coffee Maker

Who This Is Best For

Best for people who already love using K-Cups
Great for small kitchens with limited counter space
Perfect for quick single-serve iced coffee
Best for busy mornings and convenience
Great for users who want a compact machine with a water reservoir

After doing much research, the Keurig K-Iced Coffee Maker came in last on my list of top three Iced Coffee makers. Here is what I like about it and what I do not.

Buy Now

Pros:

To start with, I love the styling of it. It is sleek and modern-looking. It comes in two color options, which will help it blend in with any home or office.

Although it is not quite as simple as the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee maker, it is still pretty simple with only a few buttons to choose from. The options for the buttons are iced coffee, strong coffee, 12-ounce, 10-ounce, and 8-ounce. In addition to that, it has a light that comes on when the water is low and when it needs to be descaled.

One thing that sets it apart from my number one pick is the water reservoir. The Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee maker is a one-time use. You have to fill it with water each time you use it.

Making Iced Coffee With a Keurig

The Keurig K-Iced Coffee maker compensates for diluted coffee in three ways. First, when you select the ounce cup you would like, it gives you 4 ounces less than what you selected. This is because it compensates for the melting ice. Also, the brewing process starts and stops a couple of times. Then, the water comes out hot at first, then goes to room temperature as it gets near the end. All of these features are to prevent the dilution of the coffee.

This machine takes any standard K-Cup options, or you can remove the inner K-Cup basket and buy a basket that you can fill with fresh coffee grounds. I also love the fact that it has a water reservoir, so you do not have to fill it up each time you use it, as you do with the Mr. Coffee Iced coffee maker. The machine itself is also small in size, and that is important in a lot of people's kitchens when counter space is a premium.

Cons:

There are a few cons to this machine that made me choose it for last place. First, the main option when using the machine is using the K-Pods. This creates more waste in our landfills.

Next, the limit for K-Pods is 2 tablespoons. With the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee maker and the Ninja DualBrew, you can essentially put as much coffee in the filter as you like to make a stronger brew.

If you prefer strong coffee, I suggest using "brewed over ice" K-Cups when using the Keurig K-Iced machine. The reason is that they are bolder and have the maximum amount of grounds in each pod.

The other option is to use a separate filter basket to put your grounds in for stronger coffee, but it is still limited to around 2 tablespoons. The filter will have to be purchased separately as well.

Final Review:

All in all, this is still a solid selection for an iced coffee maker. The price has dropped on this unit, and it is pretty affordable. The size and water reservoir make it a solid selection as well.

Iced Coffee vs. Cold Brew: What's the Difference?

Iced coffee and cold brew may look similar in the glass, but they're made differently.

Iced coffee is brewed hot and then cooled down with ice. An iced coffee maker typically brews the coffee at a strength designed to account for the melting ice, so you don't end up with a weak, watered-down drink.

Cold brew is made without hot water. Coffee grounds are steeped in cold or room-temperature water for several hours and then strained. This creates a smoother, less acidic coffee concentrate that can be served over ice and diluted with water or milk.

If you want a quick cup of iced coffee without waiting hours for cold brew to steep, an iced coffee maker is the more convenient option. That's one of the reasons I enjoy using one at home.

Iced Coffee

Iced Coffee, on the other hand, uses an Iced Coffee Maker to brew hot coffee, and as it drips out, it drips over Ice cubes to cool it down as soon as it exits the coffee maker.

Add in creamer, sugar, your favorite sweetener, or flavored syrups, and the result is a delicious homemade iced coffee. You can also enjoy iced coffee black if you prefer a bolder coffee flavor. While it is not quite as smooth as cold brew coffee, it still has that strong, rich flavor that traditional hot coffee offers. I enjoy both, but personally, I prefer iced coffee because I still get that bold coffee taste while enjoying it cold and refreshing.

Are you looking for a gift for your mom? I have an awesome guide on 11 Thoughtful Kitchen gift ideas for moms.

Cold Brew Coffee

The cold-brewed system is different and makes coffee that tastes different. The short answer is that a cold brew maker is a filter and a container, like a glass carafe. Freshly ground coffee grounds are added to a filter and then to the cold brew container. Then, cold water is poured inside.

The coffee is left at room temperature to steep overnight. The result is cold-brewed coffee.

Cold coffee concentrate contains a higher amount of caffeine; it is bold but super smooth. Cold brew coffee lacks the strong coffee flavor that many people enjoy from coffee. At this point, the coffee can be poured into a glass over ice, with creamer, sweetener, and flavorings of your choice. Many people also enjoy cold brew coffee black since it is so smooth.

If you love coffee, you will also love my article on how to make Southern-style sweet tea!

This is a image of a county line cold brew ice coffee maker. This image is used to show the difference in cold brew coffee vs iced coffee.

Buy Now

Conclusion

Which Iced Coffee Maker Is Best?

After using and comparing these three iced coffee makers, the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker is my top pick overall. It’s affordable, simple to use, and does exactly what I want an iced coffee maker to do—make a good glass of iced coffee without a lot of fuss. I’ve used mine for years, and for someone who mainly wants an easy way to make iced coffee at home, it’s hard to beat.

The Ninja DualBrew comes in second and is the most versatile option. If you want one coffee maker that can handle both hot and iced coffee and gives you more brewing options, the Ninja is worth the extra investment.

The Keurig K-Iced takes the third spot and is best for K-Cup users. It’s quick, convenient, and a good fit if you already enjoy the simplicity of brewing coffee with pods.

For me, though, Mr. Coffee is still the winner. It’s inexpensive, easy to use, and has served me well for years. If your main goal is simply making great iced coffee at home, that’s the one I’d choose.

Frequently Asked Questions About Iced Coffee Makers

What is the best iced coffee maker for beginners?

The best iced coffee maker for beginners is usually one that is simple to use, affordable, and brews quickly. Machines like the Mr. Coffee Iced Coffee Maker are popular because they make homemade iced coffee easy without complicated settings.

Are iced coffee makers worth buying?

Yes, iced coffee makers can save money over time if you regularly buy iced coffee from coffee shops. They also allow you to customize the strength, sweetness, and flavor of your coffee at home.

Can you make regular coffee and pour it over ice?

You can, but it often tastes watered down and weak. Most iced coffee makers brew coffee more strongly to account for the melting ice, which helps create a smoother and more flavorful drink.

What is the difference between iced coffee and cold brew?

Iced coffee is brewed hot and then cooled over ice, while cold brew is steeped slowly in cold water for several hours. Cold brew is usually smoother and less acidic than traditional iced coffee.

Which iced coffee maker is best for small kitchens?

Compact machines like the Keurig K-Iced Coffee Maker are great for small kitchens because they take up less counter space while still making quick iced coffee.

Do iced coffee makers use regular coffee grounds?

Most iced coffee makers use regular ground coffee. Some machines also work with K-Cups or pods depending on the model.

Easy Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers (Oven-Baked Recipe)

July 29, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

This is a image showing what the Jalapeno Poppers look like once they have been cooked.

If you are looking for an easy appetizer that is always a crowd favorite, these Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers are hard to beat. Fresh jalapenos are stuffed with a creamy cheese filling, wrapped in smoky crispy bacon, and finished with a sprinkle of Tajin seasoning for the perfect balance of heat, flavor, and crunch.

These easy bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers are perfect for game day parties, backyard cookouts, tailgating, holiday gatherings, or anytime you need a quick appetizer everyone will love. The combination of spicy jalapenos, rich cream cheese, crispy bacon, and zesty Tajin creates a bold flavor that keeps people coming back for more.

One thing I love about this recipe is how simple it is to make while still looking impressive enough for any party spread. Whether you are cooking for family or feeding a crowd, these homemade jalapeno poppers always disappear fast.

For another bacon-and-cheese appetizer, try my Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon, a creamy Southern spread that's perfect for crackers and toasted bread.

A Southern Favorite for Cookouts and Game Day

Growing up in the South, bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers always showed up at cookouts, football parties, and backyard BBQs. Somebody was always standing around the grill, keeping an eye on them while everybody else hovered nearby waiting for the next batch to come off. Between the smoky bacon, creamy cheese filling, and just the right amount of heat from the jalapenos, they never lasted long.

These are the kind of appetizers that bring people together. You will find them at tailgates during football season, family gatherings on the Fourth of July, and just about any Southern get-together where good food is involved. Over the years, I have made these for everything from weekend cookouts with friends to holiday parties, and they are always one of the first things to disappear from the table.

What I love most about this recipe is how simple it is to make while still feeling like something special. The crispy bacon, creamy filling, and slight kick from the peppers make the perfect combination for an easy party appetizer that everybody keeps coming back for.

Explore more mouthwatering appetizer recipes to enhance your party menu by visiting Southern Food Junkie!

Why You Will Love Easy Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

Flavor Explosion: The combination of spicy fresh jalapenos, tangy cream cheese, Sharp Cheddar Cheese Mixture, and savory bacon creates a mouthwatering flavor profile that's hard to resist.
Crunchy and Creamy: The crispy bacon exterior perfectly complements the creamy filling, providing a satisfying contrast in textures.
Easy to Make: With simple ingredients and straightforward preparation, these poppers are a breeze to whip up for any occasion.
Crowd-Pleaser: They’re a hit at parties and gatherings, making them a popular appetizer that everyone loves to enjoy. Once football season gets here, they will be a favorite game-day appetizer as well.

This is a image of what bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers look like on a baking sheet after being baked in the oven.

What Does This Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe Taste Like?

In this version, we skip the breading and frying in favor of a simpler and arguably tastier approach. Fresh jalapenos are halved and filled with a tangy cream cheese mixture that’s been carefully crafted to balance the natural heat of the peppers. The addition of Tajin, a popular Mexican seasoning blend made from chili peppers, lime, and salt, adds a delightful zesty kick that enhances the overall flavor profile of the poppers.

Wrapping the stuffed jalapenos in bacon brings another layer of flavor and texture. As the bacon cooks, it becomes irresistibly crispy, creating a satisfying contrast with the creamy filling and the tender yet slightly spicy jalapeño. This combination of ingredients ensures that each bite is packed with a variety of flavors and sensations, leaving your guests craving more and creating the perfect party appetizer.

If you are looking for an easy dessert to take to your party as well, this Easy No-Bake Blueberry-Banana Cream Pie is sure to hit the spot!

What You Need to Make this Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Ingredients for Easy Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeño Poppers

See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

Fresh jalapeño peppers
Cream Cheese
Sharp Cheddar Cheese
Thin-cut bacon slices- Buy the regular bacon that you would see. I mention this to say not to get thick-cut bacon, as it takes longer to cook and crisp up.
Tajin Seasoning

Optional Ingredients

Garlic powder
Onion powder

Garnish

Fresh Cilantro
Green onions
Tajin- Sprinkle on top for extra flavor.

Equipment You'll Need

Cutting board
Sharp Knife
Baking sheet
Parchment Paper or Aluminum Foil
Mixing bowl
Spoon or small scoop: To mix the filling ingredients, scoop out the jalapeño halves.
Toothpicks: to secure the bacon around the jalapenos for baking.

For a complete list of items that I use and recommend, visit our Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for Everyday Kitchen Use.

How to Make Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

Step-by-step instructions

Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line the baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil. This will make cleanup a breeze and prevent sticking.

This image shows a person slicing jalapeño in half to make bacon wrapped jalapeño poppers.

Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise.

This is a image showing what the Jalapenos look like once they are cut in half when making Jalapeno Poppers.

Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane.

This is a image showing a person using a spoon to scrap out the center of the Jalapeno to remove the seeds and white stuff to make jalapeno poppers.

Rinse each jalapeno half off to remove any remaining seeds, etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help, and make sure to wash your hands thoroughly after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes into contact with them.

Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again.

This is a image of Sharp Cheddar cheese in a bowl with Softened cream cheese used to make a filling for Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno poppers.

This is a image showing what the sharp cheddar cheese and cream cheesed mixed up looks like when making Bacon Wrapped Jalapeño Poppers.

This image shows adding Tajin seasoning to the Sharp Cheddar cheese and cream cheese mixture.

Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon.

Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers.

This is a image showing a person using a spoon to add the filling to the half of the jalapeno to make Jalapeno Poppers.

Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños.

This is a closeup image showing how to wrap bacon on the Jalapeno Poppers once they have been stuffed.

I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end. I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking.

This is a image showing using a toothpick to secure the bacon that has been wrapped around the Jalapeno Popper.

Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer on a baking sheet.

This is a image of bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers on a baking sheet before they are baked in the oven.

Bake in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 20-25 minutes or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is bubbly.

This is a image of bacon wrapped jalapeno poppers baking in the oven.

Note: For those who enjoy experimenting with different cooking methods, you might also want to check out our Air Fryer Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers recipe. Using an air fryer can give you a crispy texture with less oil, making it a great alternative if you’re looking for a healthier option or simply want to try something new.

Garnish

Remove the poppers from the oven and sprinkle with additional Tajin seasoning. Garnish with fresh cilantro or green onions if desired.

Serve

Let the jalapeno poppers cool slightly before serving. Enjoy them warm as a delicious appetizer!

TIPS FOR SUCCESS

Use Fresh Jalapenos: Choose firm, fresh jalapenos for the best flavor and texture. Avoid peppers that are soft or wrinkled.
Adjust Spice Level: If you prefer less heat, you can remove more of the seeds and membranes from the jalapenos. For extra heat, keep some seeds in the filling.
Soften Cream Cheese: Ensure the cream cheese is well-softened before mixing to achieve a smooth and creamy filling.
Season Generously: Don’t be shy with seasoning. The Tajin adds a great flavor, but you can also experiment with other spices or herbs.
Wrap Bacon Tightly: Wrap the bacon snugly around the jalapenos and secure it with toothpicks if necessary to prevent the bacon from unraveling during cooking.
Use Thin-Cut Bacon: Thin-cut bacon crisps up better and cooks more evenly, ensuring a delightful texture.
Preheat Oven Properly: Ensure your oven is fully preheated to achieve consistent cooking results.
Monitor Cooking Time: Keep an eye on the poppers to prevent overcooking or burning. The bacon should be crispy, and the cheese should be melted and bubbly.

How to Store Leftover Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

Bacon-wrapped jalapeno poppers can be stored in an airtight container. Place them in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

Tips for Reheating

Preheat Oven: Preheat your oven to 375°F (190°C).
Arrange on Baking Sheet: Place the jalapeno poppers on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper or aluminum foil.
Reheat: Bake for about 10-15 minutes, or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is heated through. You might want to flip them halfway through for even reheating.

Want to Make These in the Air Fryer?

If you love crispy bacon and quicker cook times, you may also want to try my Air Fryer Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers recipe. The air fryer gives the bacon a crisp texture while still keeping the cream cheese filling smooth and creamy inside.

This is a great option for smaller batches, quick game day snacks, or when you do not want to heat the oven during the summer months.

👉 Try my full recipe here:
Air Fryer Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers

FAQ's

Can I make Jalapeno Poppers ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare the poppers up to a day in advance. Store them in the refrigerator and bake them just before serving for the best results.

Can I freeze Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers?

Absolutely! Arrange the poppers on a baking sheet and freeze them until solid, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Bake from frozen, adding a few extra minutes to the cooking time.

Can I cook Bacon-Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers in the air fryer?

Yes! Preheat the Air Fryer to 375 degrees Fahrenheit (190 degrees Celsius). Place the Jalapeno Poppers in a single layer in the air fryer basket. Avoid overcrowding. Cook for 5-8 minutes or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is melted and bubbly. Check on them halfway through to avoid overcooking. If cooking a lot, do them in batches.

Can I grill these instead of baking?

Yes, you can grill them over medium heat. Place them on a grill-safe pan or use indirect heat to prevent flare-ups from the bacon fat.

How do I ensure the bacon gets crispy?

Use thin-cut bacon for the best results. If you want to get it extra crispy, bake the poppers on a wire rack over a baking sheet to allow the fat to drain away.

Can I use a different type of cheese?

Yes, you can substitute the cheddar cheese with other cheeses like Monterey Jack, pepper jack, or even cream cheese alone for a different flavor profile.

Easy Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers Recipe with Tajin

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Cook Time: 20 minutes

Additional Time: 5 minutes

Total Time: 40 minutes

These Bacon Wrapped Jalapeno Poppers are the ultimate crowd-pleaser! Fresh jalapenos are stuffed with a creamy cheese mixture, wrapped in crispy bacon, and seasoned with Tajin for a perfect blend of spicy, savory, and tangy flavors. Ideal for any party or gathering!

No Ratings

Ingredients

10 Fresh Jalapenos, cut in halve lengthwise with seeds and membrane removed
8 ounces of softened cream cheese
10 slices of thin-cut bacon, sliced in half
1 cup sharp cheddar cheese
1 teaspoon of Tajin

Optional Ingredients (if not using Tajin)

½ Teaspoon of garlic powder
½ teaspoon of onion powder
½ teaspoon of sea salt or Kosher salt (only use if not using Tajin)
½ Teaspoon of ground black pepper

Garnish

Green onions
Cilantro

Instructions

Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line the baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil. This will make cleanup a breeze and prevent sticking.
Using the cutting board and a sharp knife, cut the Jalapenos in half lengthwise. Use the spoon or scoop to remove the seeds and white membrane. Rinse each jalapeno half off to remove any remaining seeds etc. Be careful not to touch your face after handling the peppers. You can wear gloves to help and make sure to wash your hands good after handling them. The oil in the peppers can burn your face and eyes if it comes in contact with it.
Add softened cream cheese to a mixing bowl along with the shredded cheddar cheese. Mix cream cheese and cheddar cheese well. Then add in the Tajin and mix again.
Cut the strips of bacon in half. This should give you roughly 20 pieces of bacon.
Using a spoon, fill each jalapeño half with the cheese mixture until it is even with the sides of the jalapeno peppers. Take a half slice of bacon strip and wrap it around the cream cheese-stuffed jalapeños. I like to overlap the bacon at the beginning and then at the end, I use a toothpick to secure the bacon so it doesn't come unwrapped while cooking.
Arrange the uncooked jalapeño poppers in a single layer on a baking sheet. Bake in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 20-25 minutes or until the bacon is crispy and the cheese is bubbly.

Notes

Make sure to avoid touching your face while handling the jalapenos. If possible, wear latex gloves.

Recommended Products

As an Amazon Associate and member of other affiliate programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie Recipe

July 19, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

If you love Tex-Mex flavor but need something hearty, simple, and family-approved, this Mexican taco beef pie recipe is the one to try. Made with seasoned ground beef, salsa, refried beans, and melted cheese all baked into a flaky pie crust, it’s a warm and comforting dish that's perfect for weeknight dinners, potlucks, or game day. You can customize it with your favorite toppings and have it ready in under an hour.

This is a shot of the Mexican Taco Beef Pie with a plate with a slice of the pie and side dishes along with the pie in the background.

Why This Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie Recipe Works

Flavor-packed: seasoned beef, creamy refried beans & melty cheddar in every bite

Easy to make: simple pantry ingredients, one-pan prep, under an hour

Family-friendly & customizable: add toppings like sour cream, salsa, guac, fresh cilantro

Meal-prep ready: great warm for dinner or reheated for lunch

🎥 Watch me make this recipe step-by-step in the video above — or keep reading for tips, ingredient swaps, and the full printable recipe below!

This is a image of a Mexican Taco Pie Recipe with a slice taken out of the front of it.

This Mexican pie is one of my favorite meals, and it was made by my mom growing up. This was in rotation along with Texas Hash, which I also love. Both are quick and easy dinners that the whole family will love.

What You’ll Need for This Mexican Taco Beef Pie

Here’s an overview of the ingredients — full measurements are in the recipe card below 👇

Ground beef
Taco seasoning (store-bought or homemade)
Salsa
Canned green chilies
Refried beans
Shredded cheddar cheese
Pre-made pie shells
Salt & pepper
Optional garnishes: shredded lettuce, diced tomatoes, sour cream, guacamole, sliced olives, taco sauce, lime wedges

👉 Want exact amounts? See the full recipe card at the bottom.

This is a image of Mexican Taco Beef Pie recipe front shot. You can see some green peppers in the back ground.

What Does This Taco Beef Pie Taste Like?

The seasoned beef delivers that classic taco spice, balanced by creamy beans and gooey cheddar. Baked in a golden, crisp pie crust, it’s warm, comforting, and hits all the right Tex-Mex notes—perfect for casual family meals or game day gatherings.

This is a image of Mexican taco Beef Pie recipe front shot that is plated with side dishes, tomatoes, and a lime wedge.

Equipment You'll Need

Large Skillet
Medium stockpot
Mixing spoon and Spatula
Pie plate
can opener
Measuring Spoon
Cheese Grater
Cutting Board
Sharp knife
Serving Spatula

For a full, detailed list of the brands of equipment I use and recommend, check out this article on Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist that I have prepared for you.

Step-by-step instructions

Prepare the pie shells

1. Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Lay out frozen pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown.

This is a image of two pie shells being baked in the oven to make Mexican Taco Beef Pie. — If you have pie weights, you can use them

This is a image of what the baked pie shells look like after they have been baked. — After baking the pies, the crust usually lies back down

Mexican Taco Beef Pie Filling

1. Place the large skillet on the stovetop on medium-high heat. Cook the ground beef until the meat is brown.

This is a image of Ground Hamburger being cooked in a skillet to make a recipe called Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie.

2. Drain the grease off the meat. Add in the taco seasoning, then the flour slurry (cold water and flour mixture). Stir into the ground beef until it is well incorporated.

This is a image of ground hamburger beef reading to be drained of grease.

This is a image of a person adding in taco seasoning to make taco pie.

After reducing the mixture, add the drained green chilies and salsa. Then add 1 cup of the cheese and mix well.

This is a image of a person adding in green chilies to the beef mixture for taco pie. — Green chilies

This is a image of a person adding in Salsa to the beef mixture for taco pie. — Salsa

This is a image of adding cheddar cheese to Mexican taco pie beef mixture. — A portion of the cheese

3. Place the medium stockpot on the stove on medium heat. Add the refried beans to the pot to reheat. Add in the water to thin the beans down some. You want them to be able to spread easily when we layer them at the bottom of the pie shell. A nice smooth texture is what we are looking for.

This is a image of a person stirring refried beans after adding in water to smooth the texture out. — Refried beans need to be smooth and creamy

Make the Pies

1. Divide the refried beans between the two pie crusts and spread the mixture on the bottom of the shells.

This is a image of a person spreading the smooth and creamy refried beans in the bottom of the baked pie shells for Mexican Taco Beef Pie.

This is a image of what the refried beans look like have they have been spread in the bottom of pies shells when making Mexican Taco Beef Pies.

Next, divide the ground beef mixture between the two shells and spread evenly. Top with the remaining sharp cheddar cheese.

This is a image of adding the beef mixture to the pie shells to make Mexican Taco Beef Pie.

This is a image of what the Mexican Taco Beef pies look like after adding the meat mixture and ready for cheese.

This is a image of a person topping the taco pies with cheese.

2. Bake for 15-20 minutes at 400 degrees Fahrenheit until the cheese is nice and bubbly and the edges of the pie crust are golden brown.

This is a image of the taco Pies going into the oven to bake.

3. Allow the pies to cool for 10 to 15 minutes to allow the pie to set before serving.

This is a image of two baked Mexican Taco Beef Pies hot out the oven ready to be served.

How To Serve

Serve this dish on a plate with tortilla chips. Top the Mexican Taco Beef Pie with the garnishes listed above or your favorite taco toppings.

Great Side Dishes to Serve this Recipe with:

Corn on the cob
Marinated Cucumbers, Onion & Vinegar
Spicy Cucumber Salad
Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad
Spaghetti Pasta Salad
Garden Salad
Spanish rice
Coleslaw

Variations & Substitutions

Swap ground turkey or chicken for beef
Add black beans, corn, or diced peppers for texture
Use spicy salsa or chipotle for heat
For low-carb: use a tortilla base or bake crustless

Storage & Reheating Tips

Reheat in oven at 350°F for crispy crust or microwave slices

Store covered in fridge up to 5 days.

If you're looking for another beef recipe that works great for make-ahead lunches, try my Easy Instant Pot Pot Roast with Black Beans. I make it with tender chuck roast, black beans, potatoes, carrots, and celery, and one batch gives me five hearty work lunches.

FAQ's

Can I make this recipe ahead of time?

Yes, you can make this recipe ahead of time. Store it covered in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. When ready to bake, remove it from the refrigerator and bake as directed, adding a few extra minutes to the baking time if necessary.

Can I freeze the Taco Beef Pie?

Yes, you can freeze the assembled pie before baking. Wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and then in aluminum foil to prevent freezer burn. It can be frozen for up to 3 months. When ready to bake, thaw it in the refrigerator overnight and bake as directed.

Can I use a different type of cheese?

Absolutely! While cheddar cheese adds a great flavor, you can use other cheeses such as Monterey Jack, Colby Jack, or a Mexican cheese blend.

What can I use instead of refried beans?

If you don't have refried beans, you can use black beans or pinto beans as an alternative. Simply mash them slightly to create a similar texture.

Can I make this dish spicier?

To add more heat, you can include diced jalapeños, a dash of hot sauce, or extra chili powder in the beef mixture. You can also top the pie with spicy salsa or serve it with a side of sliced jalapeños.

What are some good toppings for this Mexican Pie?

Great toppings include sour cream, guacamole, salsa, diced tomatoes, shredded lettuce, sliced olives, fresh cilantro, and chopped green onions.

Can I use homemade taco seasoning?

Yes, homemade taco seasoning works great. Combine chili powder, cumin, garlic powder, onion powder, paprika, oregano, salt, and pepper to taste.

Need a refresher while cooking? Scroll back up to watch the video demo anytime!

Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Cook Time: 40 minutes

Total Time: 55 minutes

Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Easy Mexican Taco Beef Pie! This delicious dish combines a savory beef mixture seasoned with taco seasoning and creamy refried beans, all topped with melted cheddar cheese, nestled perfectly in a crispy pie crust.

No Ratings

Ingredients

1 lb of ground hamburger meat
Two frozen pastry pie shells
12 ounces of sharp cheddar cheese (1 cup for meat mixture, the rest for topping pies)
2 tablespoons of taco seasoning mix or use a Taco Seasoning packet
1-16 ounce can of refried beans
1-4 ounce can of green chilies
8 ounces of Salsa (half of a 16 ounce jar)
2 tablespoons of all purpose (AP) flour
1 cup of water (¼ cup for flour slurry, the rest for refried beans)
½ teaspoon of sea salt
½ teaspoon of black pepper

Toppings or Garnish

Lettuce
Diced tomatoes
Sour cream
Gucamole
Black olives
Green onions
Cilantro
Taco Sauce or Salsa
Lime Wedge

Instructions

Prepare pie shells

Preheat oven to 400 degrees. Lay out pie shells 15 to 20 minutes ahead of time to thaw. Using a fork, prick holes in the bottom of the pie shells. Bake for 10-12 minutes until slightly brown.

Mexican Taco Beef Pie Filling

Place the large skillet on the stovetop on medium-high heat. Cook beef until the meat is brown
Make a flour slurry by mixing a ¼ cup of water into the 2 tablespoons of AP flour and whisk until smooth. This will be used to help thicken the beef mixture.
Drain the grease off of the meat. Add in the taco seasoning. Add in the flour slurry. Stir into the ground beef until it is well incorporated. After reducing the mixture, add the drained green chilies and salsa. Then add in 1 cup of cheese and mix well.
Place the medium stock pot on the stove on medium heat. Add the refried beans to the pot to reheat. Add ¾ cup of the water to thin the refried beans. This will allow them to thin out and spread easily when we layer them in the bottom of the pie shell. A nice smooth texture is what we are looking for.

Make the Pies

Divide the refried beans between the two pie crusts and spread the mixture on the bottom of the shells. Next, divide the ground beef mixture between the two shells and spread evenly. Top with the remaining Sharp Cheddar cheese and place in the oven to bake.
Bake for 15-20 minutes at 400 degrees Fahrenheit until the cheese is nice and bubbly and the edges of the pie crust are golden brown.
Allow Mexican pie to cool for 10 to 15 minutes to allow the pie to set before serving.

Recommended Products

As an Amazon Associate and member of other affiliate programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

How to Cook Hamburgers in the Air Fryer (Simple Recipe)

July 16, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

If you're asking, "How to cook hamburgers in the air fryer?" you're in the right place. Cooking hamburgers in an air fryer is super easy and quick. In this post, I'll guide you through the cooking times and some simple tips to ensure your burgers turn out juicy and delicious. Whether you're new to air frying or just looking for a quick answer, I've got all the info you need. Let's get started!

This image shows a Cheeseburger on a plate with cheeseburger patties and buns on a plate in the background. The image is for a post about how to cook hamburgers in an air fryer.

In this post, we'll cover all the essential details you need to cook the perfect hamburger in an air fryer. We'll discuss the ideal cooking times for different patty thicknesses to ensure your burgers are cooked just right. Then, we'll share some useful tips for seasoning your patties and getting that perfect sear.

Finally, we'll offer serving suggestions, including tasty toppings and side dishes to complement your air-fried hamburgers. By the end, you'll have all the information you need to make a delicious meal with minimal effort.

What Is an Air Fryer?

The air fryer has been around for several years. According to the New York Times, Fred Van Der Weij invented the air fryer back in 2005. He was looking for a way to crisp up French Fries without deep-frying them.

An air fryer is a small appliance, similar to a small deep fryer, such as a Fry Daddy, but doesn't use cooking oil. The air fryer has a basket that slides into the front of it, this is where the food is placed. It is a small convection oven with high-speed air circulation, allowing food to crisp up quickly.

If you want to know more about Air Fryers, check out this article called Cooking Revolutionized: A NuWave Air Fryer Review. I love using the air fryer to cook these crispy air fryer hashbrowns for breakfast!

Why Use an Air Fryer for Hamburgers?

Using an air fryer to cook a hamburger offers several advantages. The main reason to use an air fryer for hamburgers is the cook time. First, air fryers cook food quickly and efficiently, significantly reducing the time needed to prepare a meal compared to traditional methods like grilling or pan-frying. This speed is due to the rapid circulation of hot air, which ensures even cooking and a deliciously crispy exterior.

Also, an air fryer cooks food using a healthier method. Since an air fryer uses little to no oil, it cuts out many of the calories of the traditional way of frying a hamburger patty.

Air fryers also heat up very quickly and cook without much of the mess of frying hamburgers or the hassles of outdoor grilling. You can cook a healthier hamburger from the comfort of your home, versus going outside and cooking.

This is a image of the front image of a air fryer used for a post about how to cook hamburgers in the air fryer.

The George Foreman also offers many advantages for cooking hamburgers, but sometimes it can leave your hamburger dry. When cooking air fryer burgers, they always result in a juicy burger.

If you're also curious about cooking on the George Foreman, you might find our article "How Long Does It Take to Cook a Steak on the George Foreman" helpful. It provides detailed instructions and tips for perfect steaks.

What do Air Fryer Hamburger Patties taste like

Air fryer hamburger patties typically have a unique taste and texture that many people enjoy. Here’s what you can expect:

Crispy Exterior: Air fryers cook food by circulating hot air around it, which creates a crispy outer layer on the hamburger patty. This texture is similar to what you might get from grilling or pan-frying, but with less oil.
Juicy Interior: Despite the crispy exterior, air fryer hamburgers retain their juiciness inside. This is because the hot air cooks the meat evenly and quickly, sealing in the natural juices of the patty.
Enhanced Flavors: The lack of excess oil allows the flavors of the meat and any seasonings you use to shine through. You’ll still get that classic beefy taste but with a cleaner, lighter profile.
Consistency: Air fryers ensure even cooking, so you can expect consistent results with every batch of hamburgers you make. This consistency contributes to a reliable and enjoyable eating experience.

Overall, air fryer hamburger patties taste crispy on the outside and juicy on the inside, and retain the flavors of the meat and seasonings you use, making them a popular choice for cooking hamburgers at home. Top them with your favorite toppings, and you have a real American meal on your hands.

How Long To Cook

This short guide will tell you how long to air-fry a burger

What you need to make this Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Ingredients

Hamburger meat- For beef, an 80/20 blend has the right amount of fat for juiciness. You can substitute ground turkey or ground chicken if you like.
Sea salt or kosher salt
Black pepper
Hamburger buns- Regular hamburger buns are fine, but for upscale burgers, try brioche buns.

This image shows brioche hamburger buns to used to make air fryer burger recipes.

Optional Ingredients

Heath Riles Garlic Jalapeño rub- You talking about a flavor explosion. I wouldn't cook a burger without this seasoning. This has salt in it, so if you use this, I would reduce or not add additional salt.
Worcestershire Sauce- This is a flavor enhancer that adds depth and complexity to the flavor. I highly recommend it.
Garlic powder- If using the Heath Riles seasoning, omit garlic powder and onion powder.
Onion Powder- if using the Heath Riles seasoning, omit onion powder and garlic powder

Toppings and Condiments

Cheese slices- make air fryer cheeseburgers by adding a slice of cheese. Some of our favorites are American cheese, Cheddar cheese, Pepper Jack, or Colby Jack cheese.
Lettuce
Tomatoes
Red onion or White Onion
Pickles
Slaw
Homemade chili sauce
Mustard
Ketchup
Mayonnaise

If you do not like any of these pairings, just use your favorite seasoning.

Note: See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities.

Equipment You'll Need

Air Fryer: The main appliance for cooking the burgers.
Mixing Bowl: For combining the ground beef with seasonings and any additional ingredients.
Measuring Spoons and Cups: To accurately measure seasonings and other ingredients.
Wooden Spoon- To mix the ingredients.
Plates, Sheet pan, or Cutting Board: To hold the formed burger patties before cooking.
Tongs: For flipping the burger patties halfway through cooking and removing them from the air fryer.
Instant-Read Meat Thermometer: To check the internal temperature of the burgers and ensure they are cooked to your desired level of doneness.

To see a comprehensive list of all the brands I use and recommend, visit the Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist article.

Step-by-Step Instructions

1. Prepare your hamburger Patties

In a mixing bowl or large bowl, add your hamburger meat and seasonings of choice. Use a wooden spoon or your hands to mix ingredients well until it is well incorporated.

This image shows raw hamburger meat with seasoning on it to make air fryer burgers. — Hamburger meat with seasonings

This image shows hamburger meat in a large bowl with seasoning on it and getting ready to mix it by hand. — Mixing by hand

Divide the meat into 4 to 6-ounce-pound patties that are ½ inch thick. Make an indent into the center of each patty. This will allow the center to cook evenly with the rest of the pattie.

This image shows a closeup of the seasoned hamburger patties and the indent in the middle of the Pattie.

Arrange the patties on a pan or plate and set to the side. I like to do this about 30 minutes beforehand to allow the seasonings time to meld together.

2. Preheat the Air Fryer

Preheat the air fryer to 370 degrees Fahrenheit for 5 minutes.

3. Cooking the Air Fryer Hamburger Patties

Spray the air fryer basket with cooking oil or cooking spray. I like to spray a little on the patties as well. This will help the burgers have a good sear with a crispy exterior.

Arrange the patties in a single layer in the air fryer basket.

This image shows using cooking spray to coat the air fryer basket before cooking. — Spray inside of air fryer basket

This is a closeup image showing the hamburger patties arranged in a single layer in the air fryer basket before cooking. — Arrange patties in single layer

This is a image of a man putting the air fryer basket back into the air fryer showing the hamburger patties in the basket ready to be cooked. — Place the basket in the air fryer and cook

Cook for 6 minutes then pull out the air fryer basket and use the tongs to flip the burgers over.

This is a image of hamburgers in a air fryer basket that has been cooked half way through. This picture is used to show what they look like when you take the basket out and flip the burgers.

Cook for an additional 4-6 minutes. To add cheese, stop the air fryer when there is 1-2 minutes left.

4. Check For Doneness

Use an Instant Read thermometer to check for doneness. For ½-inch patties, it should take between 10-12 minutes to cook.

This is a image showing a person using a instant read thermometer checking the temp of air fryer burgers.

Here is the Temperature Guide for medium-well to well-done.

Medium-Well: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of about 150-155°F (65-68°C). At this temperature, the meat will be mostly gray with a slight hint of pink in the center.
Well Done: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of 160°F (71°C) or higher. At this temperature, the meat will be fully cooked through with no pink color remaining.

5. Rest and Serve

Once cooked to your desired doneness, remove the patties from the air fryer and let them rest for a few minutes before serving.

This allows the juices to redistribute, ensuring moist, flavorful, and juicy hamburgers.

Additional Tips for Perfect Air Fryer Hamburgers

After you have removed your hamburger patties, use the air fryer to toast your buns. Brush the inside of the buns with a little butter, then add them to the air fryer basket cut side up. Toast the buns for 2-3 minutes.

This is a image of a person brushing melted butter on the inside of hamburger buns before toasting in a air fryer.

Build your Burger

Build your burger by putting your condiments on your bun, then add your meat and your favorite toppings.

What to Serve Air-Fried Burgers With

French Fries
Onion rings
Sweet Potato Fries
Coleslaw
Marinated Cucumbers Onions & Vinegar
Spicy Cucumber Salad
Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad
Irresistible Spaghetti Pasta Salad

Substitutions

If you do not like beef patties, you can use ground chicken or ground turkey as a substitute. Just know that both of these are lean meats and may cause dry burgers. You may also have to adjust your cooking time. Also, the internal temperature for these meats should only be well done at 165 degrees Fahrenheit.

Storage Tips

If you have any leftover burgers, you can store them in an airtight container or cover them with aluminum foil. Place them in your refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

FAQ's

Do I need to flip the hamburgers in the air fryer?

Yes, you will need to flip the burgers close to have the way through the cooking process. This will allow for even browning and cooking time.

How long to cook a frozen burger in the air fryer?

For a frozen burger, you will want to cook it for 13-15 minutes at 370 degrees Fahrenheit. Flip the burger halfway through.

How do I know when my hamburgers are done in the air fryer?

The best and safest way to tell if the hamburgers are done is by using an Instant read thermometer to check the internal temperature.

What are some tips for keeping air fryer hamburgers juicy?

Use ground beef with a higher fat content for juicer burgers. I like to use 80/20 as the perfect blend. Avoid over-packing the patties and allow them to rest after cooking before serving.

4 hamburgers

How to Cook Hamburgers in the Air Fryer (Simple Recipe)

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Cook Time: 10 minutes

Additional Time: 2 minutes

Total Time: 27 minutes

If you're asking, "How to cook hamburgers in the air fryer?" you're in the right place. Cooking hamburgers in an air fryer is super easy and quick. In this post, I'll guide you through the cooking times and some simple tips to ensure your burgers turn out juicy and delicious.

No Ratings

Ingredients

Ingredients for Air Fryer Burgers

1 pound of fresh hamburger meat
¾ of teaspoon of sea salt or kosher salt
½ teaspoon of black pepper
4 hamburger buns

Optional Ingredients

¾ teaspoon of Health Riles Garlic Jalapeño rub-If using rub omit salt
2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce
½ teaspoon Garlic powder-If using Heath Riles seasoning omit this
½ teaspoon Onion powder-If using Heath Riles seasoning omit this.

New Group

4 cheese slices
lettuce
Sliced tomatoes
Red onion
Pickles
Slaw
Homemade chili
Mustard
Ketchup
Mayonnaise

Instructions

1. Prepare your hamburger Patties

In a mixing bowl or large bowl, add your hamburger meat and seasonings of choice. Use a wooden spoon or your hands to mix ingredients well until it is well incorporated.

Divide the meat into 4 to 6-ounce-pound patties that are about ½ inches thick. Make an indent into the center of each patty. This will allow the center to cook evenly with the rest of the pattie.

Arrange the patties on a pan or plate and set to the side. I like to do this about 30 minutes beforehand to allow the seasonings time to meld together.

2. Preheat the Air Fryer

Preheat the air fryer to 370 degrees Fahrenheit for 5 minutes.

3. Cooking the Air Fryer Hamburger Patties

Spray the Air fryer basket with cooking oil or cooking spray. I like to spray a little on the patties as well. This will help the burgers have a crispy exterior.

Arrange the patties in a single layer in the air fryer basket.

Cook for 6 minutes then pull out the air fryer basket and use the tongs to flip the burgers over. Cook for an additional 4-6 minutes.

4. Check For Doneness

Use an Instant Read thermometer to check for doneness. For ½-inch patties, it should take between 10-12 minutes to cook.

Here is the Temperature Guide for medium-well to well-done.

Medium-Well: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of about 150-155°F (65-68°C). At this temperature, the meat will be mostly gray with a slight hint of pink in the center.
Well Done: Cook the hamburger until it reaches an internal temperature of 160°F (71°C) or higher. At this temperature, the meat will be fully cooked through with no pink color remaining.

To add cheese, pause cooking on the air fryer when you have 1-2 minutes remaining. Add the cheese then continue the cooking until time is done.

5. Rest and Serve

Once cooked to your desired doneness, remove the patties from the air fryer and let them rest for a few minutes before serving. This allows the juices to redistribute, ensuring moist, flavorful, and juicy hamburgers.

Recommended Products

As an Amazon Associate and member of other affiliate programs, I earn from qualifying purchases.

Simple Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

July 13, 2024 by Ronnie Williams 2 Comments

This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is a delightful fusion of vibrant flavors and textures, perfect for any occasion. It takes the flavors of Mexican Street corn and combines them with pasta for an awesome cold pasta salad dish. Whether you're hosting a summer BBQ, attending a potluck, or simply craving a fresh and flavorful side dish, this easy-to-make recipe is sure to impress and satisfy.

This image shows Mexican Street Corn Salad in the foreground with a red onion and cilantro on the right side.

I have to admit, growing up, I was never a big fan of pasta salad (I know shocking right?). Many people don't care for cold pasta dishes, and I was one of them. Despite pasta salad being a staple at church potlucks and summertime cookouts, it just wasn't my favorite. That changed when my mom started making this irresistible spaghetti pasta salad—I fell in love with it instantly.

Suddenly, I began to enjoy all kinds of pasta salads. I started trying different recipes and discovered I really liked them. With an upcoming cookout, I thought it would be fun to try a new variation of Pasta Salad inspired by Mexican-style street corn.

What Is Mexican Street Corn

Street corn, known as "elote" in Spanish, is a popular Mexican street food typically made with grilled or boiled corn on the cob. It's traditionally served with a variety of flavorful toppings, creating a delicious and savory treat.

This image shows charred Corn on the cob on a grill cooking.

Grilled Mexican street corn classic preparation involves coating the corn with a mixture of mayonnaise, crema (a Mexican sour cream), and lime juice, then sprinkling it with chili powder, cotija cheese, and cilantro. The combination of smoky, sweet, tangy, and spicy flavors makes street corn a beloved snack or side dish in Mexican cuisine.

If you have not heard of Mexican Street corn, you may have been hiding under a rock. Gaining popularity in the early 2000s due to the rise of the popularity of food trucks, it has now gained a huge cultural following similar to Jalapeño poppers.

As food trucks and casual dining spots started to embrace more diverse and authentic Mexican dishes, elote became a trendy and beloved item on menus across the country. Its unique combination of flavors and the rise of social media food trends further contributed to its popularity, making it a staple at food festivals, street fairs, and even upscale restaurants.

We have taken the best flavors of Mexican Street Corn and Pasta Salad and combined them into this awesome street corn pasta salad that is bursting with flavor and appeal.

Why You'll Love Mexican Street Corn Salad (Elote Pasta Salad)

Bursting with Flavor: This salad combines the smoky, savory taste of grilled corn with the zesty kick of lime and spices, creating a flavor explosion in every bite. The addition of creamy cotija cheese and fresh cilantro adds even more depth and richness.
Perfect for Any Occasion: Whether you're hosting a summer barbecue, attending a potluck, or looking for a quick and satisfying weeknight dinner, this pasta salad is versatile and always a crowd-pleaser. It's easy to make ahead and travels well, making it a great choice for any gathering.
Unique appeal: This dish is likely something your party guests have never experienced but didn't realize they were missing out on.
Easy to Make: With simple steps, this recipe is straightforward and beginner-friendly. You can whip it up in no time, and the dressing comes together effortlessly, ensuring you spend less time in the kitchen and more time enjoying your meal.

This image is a vertical image of Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad.

If you are looking for an awesome main dish to serve this Mexican Street Corn Pasta salad with, this Mexican Taco Beef Pie is one of my favorites that pairs well with this side dish.

What Does This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Taste Like

Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad, also known as Elote Pasta Salad combines sweet, smoky, and tangy flavors. It features a creamy dressing that perfectly coats al dente pasta, providing a satisfyingly chewy texture that holds onto every flavor. This dish is a unique addition to your menu with fresh corn, chopped Jalapeños, spices like chili powder and paprika, and fresh herbs enhancing its freshness.

It's guaranteed to be a hit at your summertime cookout, offering a delightful twist that will have your guests asking for more. It truly is the perfect side dish.

What You Need to Make This Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of the post, but let's go over the basics:

Ingredients for Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad

For The Salad:

Corn- Use fresh or canned corn. If you really want an authentic taste, use fresh grilled corn on the cob to get the flavors of traditional Mexican street corn.
Pasta- Any pasta will do. Bow Tie (farfalle), Rotini, or Cellentani Pasta are favorites.
Red Onion-Finely diced
Jalapeño- It's not a Mexican dish without Jalapeños, right? Make sure to remove the seeds and the ribs, then finely diced them up.
Fresh Cilantro- Cilantro adds a great flavor to this dish but some folks do not like it. Omit it if it is not your preference. Finely chopped.
Black Beans- We like to add black beans because it gives the dish a great color contrast as well as extra flavor and some protein.
Olive Oil-to drizzle on the pasta to keep it from sticking.

For the Dressing

Mayonnaise- I prefer Duke's Mayo but use whatever brand you like.
Crema- Use Mexican Crema if you can find it but if not, you can use Sour cream or even plain Greek yogurt.
Lime Juice
Cotija Cheese-Can substitute Feta cheese.
Chili Powder
Smoked Paprika
Garlic Powder
Cayenne Pepper- This dish already has Jalapeños but Cayenne really gives it that extra kick.
Sea Salt
Black Pepper

Garnish

Cotija Cheese-Sprinkle on top followed by the other ingredients. (can substitute Feta cheese)
Chili Powder
Lime Zest
Cilantro

This image is a vertical image with all the ingredients to make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad with labels telling you what the ingredients are.

Optional Ingredients

Cherry tomatoes- The bright red color will make this dish pop and add a burst of sweetness and acidic flavor.
Green Onions-Top with green onions.
Grilled Chicken-Turn this side dish into a main meal with the addition of grilled chicken.
Bell Peppers

Equipment You'll Need

Large Pot
Colander
Small Bowl
Grill- If you choose to grill your corn instead of using canned corn.
Mixing Bowl
Cutting Board
Sharp Knife
Measuring Cups
Measuring spoon
Large Serving Bowls

Note: Check out our Best Kitchen Essentials Checklist for items that I use and recommend for everyday use in the kitchen.

How To Make Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad

Step-by-step instructions

1. Prepare the corn: If grilling corn, grill it until it has a slight char. Then remove the corn kernels from the corn cob using a sharp knife or a corn peeler.

This image shows corn on the cob on a grill.

This image shows a knife cutting grilled corn off the cob to make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad.

If using canned corn, drain the corn and set aside. If using frozen corn, thaw it out completely. You can add the canned or frozen corn to a skillet with a little oil to get a slight char on it if you prefer.

2. Cook the Pasta: Place a large pot of salted water on medium-high heat. Add the uncooked pasta to the water and cook al dente or almost done. Drain the pasta using the colander, then place in the bottom of a large bowl. Coat the pasta with the olive oil. You can save a little of the pasta water to use if the noodles stick further.

This image show a large pot of salted water sitting on a gas stove ready to be boiled.

This image shows a large pot full of salted water to cook pasta for Mexican Street Corn Salad.

This image shows pasta in a large bowl to make pasta salad.

3. Make the Dressing: In a small bowl, mix mayo, crema, lime juice, smoked paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, Cayenne pepper, Sea salt, and black pepper. Add in the Cotija Cheese. Mix ingredients until well incorporated.

This image shows adding mayo to a bowl to make the dressing for Mexican Corn Pasta Salad.

This image shows adding lime juice to a bowl to make Mexican Street Corn Salad.

This image shows all the seasonings in a small bowl for the dressing for Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad.

This image shows what the dressing for Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad looks like up close on a spoon. — This is what the dressing should look like after mixed up

4. Assemble the Pasta salad: Drain the black beans and add to the large bowl with the pasta. Next add in the corn, finely chopped red onion, Jalapeño, and cilantro. Pour the dressing over the ingredients and mix until well incorporated.

This image shows all the ingredients in a large bowl for Mexican Street corn pasta salad.

5. Garnish: For a final touch, you can garnish the salad with additional crumbled cotija cheese, chopped cilantro, lime zest, and a sprinkle of chili powder for extra flavor and visual appeal.

This image shows Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad up close with a silver spoon in it and cilantro and cotija cheese in the middle.

How To Serve

Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is best served chilled or at room temperature, making it perfect for gatherings, picnics, or as a side dish at a barbecue. Here’s how to serve it:

Chill if Necessary: If the salad has been refrigerated, allow it to sit at room temperature for a few minutes to take the chill off slightly before serving.
Transfer to a Serving Bowl: Place the chilled or room temperature salad into a clean and presentable serving bowl.
Serve: Place the bowl of Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad on your dining table or buffet spread. Provide serving utensils so guests can help themselves.
Enjoy: Encourage guests to mix the salad slightly before serving themselves to ensure they get a bit of everything—creamy dressing, crunchy vegetables, and savory cheese—in each bite.

This dish is versatile and pairs well with grilled meats, and seafood, or as a standalone vegetarian option. Its vibrant colors and flavors make it a delightful addition to any meal.

Storage Tips

You can store leftover Mexican Street Corn Pasta salad in an airtight container. Place in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

FAQ's

Can I make this delicious pasta salad ahead of time?

Yes! Prepare the salad up to a day in advance.

Can I substitute the cheese?

Absolutely! Feel free to customize it with your favorite cheese. Feta cheese is a nice substitute for Cojita.

Is this dish spicy?

This Cold pasta salad has a mild kick from the cayenne pepper and the Jalapeño peppers. If you would like it to be milder, feel free to omit those.

6-8

Simple Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad

Prep Time: 20 minutes

Cook Time: 15 minutes

Total Time: 35 minutes

No Ratings

Ingredients

Salad

6 Ears of Corn (3 cups canned or frozen)-Use fresh or canned corn. If you really want an authentic taste, use grilled corn on the cob to get the flavors of traditional Mexican street corn.
16 ounces of uncooked Pasta- Any pasta will do. Bow Tie (farfalle), Rotini, or Cellentani Pasta are favorites.
½ cup of Red Onion-Finely diced
2 Jalapeños- Remove the seeds and the ribs, then finely diced them up.
¼ cup of fresh Cilantro- Finely chopped.
1 can of black beans-drained
1 teaspoon of olive oil

Dressing

½ cup of Mayonnaise
½ cup of crema (can substitute sour cream or Greek yogurt)
3 tablespoons of lime juice
½ cup of cotija cheese
1 teaspoon of chili powder
¼ teaspoon of garlic powder
¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper
½ teaspoon sea salt
¼ teaspoon black pepper

Garnish

1 tablespoon of cotija cheese
¼ teaspoon of chili powder
1 teaspoon of lime zest
1 tablespoon of cilantro

Instructions

1. Prepare the corn: If grilling corn, grill it until it has a slight char. Then remove the corn kernels from the corn cob. If using canned corn, drain the corn and set aside. If using frozen corn, thaw it out completely. You can add the canned or frozen corn to a skillet with a little oil to get a slight char on it if you prefer.

3. Make the Dressing: In a small bowl, mix mayo, crema, lime juice, smoked paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, sea salt, and black pepper. Add in the Cotija Cheese. Mix ingredients until well incorporated.

5. Garnish: For a final touch, you can garnish the salad with additional crumbled cotija cheese, chopped cilantro, lime zest, and a sprinkle of chili powder for extra flavor and visual appeal.

Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler Recipe (Easy)

June 28, 2024 by Ronnie Williams 10 Comments

Old-fashioned Southern blackberry cobbler is a beloved dessert that captures the heart of Southern tradition. Made with ripe, juicy blackberries and a buttery, soft, and fluffy crust, this classic treat pairs the berries' tartness with a sweet, golden topping. Often served warm with vanilla ice cream or whipped cream, it evokes the comfort of home-cooked meals and family gatherings.

This is a image of homemade blackberry cobbler that has been scooped out of the casserole dish and it sitting on a plate in the foreground. The casserole dish is seen sitting in the background.

I still remember it like it was yesterday, walking around the edge of our cow pasture collecting ripe blackberries. Mom, my brother, and I would pick them, eating every other one, and gathering the rest in a small 1-gallon bucket.

It felt like it would take forever to fill it up, especially since I was eating so many as I was picking them. Once we got back to the house, Mom would wash and dry them. We knew what was coming for Sunday dinner and could hardly wait.

Mom would take those blackberries and make the most delicious old-fashioned Southern blackberry cobbler you've ever tasted. While some people prefer cobbler with a flaky crust, we loved ours with a sweet, buttery, and fluffy crust that had a chewy and slightly crispy exterior. It was absolutely yummy.

Why You Will Love This Homemade Blackberry Cobbler Recipe

Delicious Flavor: The perfect balance of tart, juicy blackberries and a sweet, buttery crust.
Nostalgic Appeal: Evokes the comfort and warmth of home-cooked meals and family gatherings.
Simple Ingredients: Made with common pantry staples and fresh blackberries.
Easy to Make: This straightforward recipe is easy for even beginners to follow.
Versatile: Perfect for any occasion, from casual family dinners to festive gatherings.
Textural Delight: Combines a fluffy, buttery crust with a chewy, slightly crispy exterior.
Crowd-Pleaser: Loved by kids and adults alike, it’s sure to be a hit.
Customizable: Can be served with ice cream, whipped cream, or enjoyed on its own.
Seasonal Freshness: Ideal for using fresh summer blackberries.
Authentic Southern Charm: A classic dessert that brings a taste of the South to your table.

This image is a closeup of a spoon full of cobbler and homemade vanilla ice cream.

What Does Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler Taste Like?

As I mentioned earlier, this old-fashioned blackberry cobbler features a unique topping that you might not be familiar with. It's like a sweet biscuit, with a buttery, golden-brown, fluffy interior and a slightly chewy, crispy exterior.

This image shows a closeup of the corner of a baked blackberry cobbler and what the golden buttery crust looks like.

The fresh blackberries provide a slightly acidic kick, balanced by their natural sweetness and a touch of added sugar. This well-rounded dessert is highly prized in the South, especially during the summertime.

The combination of warm, sweet-tart blackberries and crisp, golden topping creates a comforting, nostalgic dessert that is both simple and profoundly delicious. Whether served on its own or with a side of vanilla ice cream on top, Homemade Blackberry Cobbler is a perfect harmony of sweet, tangy, and buttery flavors.

This image shows blackberry cobbler topped with homemade vanilla ice cream on a plate. There is a canister of ice cream in the background and some spoons.

If you love this Old-fashioned Blackberry cobbler recipe, you are going to love this Old-Fashioned Persimmon Pudding Recipe! You have got to try it this fall.

Where to find Blackberries for your Cobbler

Berry picking is a fantastic family activity that teaches children where their food comes from and how it's grown. The experience of gathering berries and then baking a dessert with the fruits of your labor is both enjoyable and rewarding.

This is a image of a young boy picking blackberries from a row of thornless blackberries. — My son is picking blackberries from our Thornless Blackberry patch

Having fresh blackberries will result in the best-tasting cobbler, so I am going to give you a few places to look for them. If you cannot find them fresh, though, you can use frozen store-bought blackberries.

Wild Blackberries

In the South, wild blackberry bushes grow wild everywhere. They are in people's backyards, along roadsides, and everywhere in between. The downside is that the wild blackberries are smaller, and the canes have thorns or brambles on them.

The wild variety is also not quite as sweet as improved or cultivated varites.

Cultivated Blackberries

Another option is to grow your own blackberries. This is what I do to have a ton of fresh berries. As they are coming off the bushes in the summertime, I freeze them to be able to enjoy them year-round.

They are easy to grow, and many of the improved varieties offer no thorns, bigger berries, and sweeter berries (although some still have thorns). A few of my favorite varieties are Ouachita, Ponca, and Navaho.

Blackberries from a U-Pick Farm

Another place to find fresh berries is at a U-pick farm. This may not be an option where you live, but in my area, there are a few farms that grow cultivated blackberries for you to come pick for yourself.

This is a image of a man picking blackberries at a u-pick farm.

You pick the berries, then pay for them per pound that you have picked. The berries are similar to the cultivated varieties I have mentioned above.

Roadside Produce Stands

Also, some roadside farm stands may sell fresh berries during the summer months, and some grocery stores will carry them as well.

Frozen Blackberries

Ultimately, though, if you cannot find fresh ones, you can use the frozen ones from the freezer section at your grocery store. Just make sure to leave them frozen and not to thaw them out before baking.

What You'll Need to Make This Recipe

You'll find a detailed ingredient list and step-by-step instructions in the recipe below, but let's start with the basics:

Basic Ingredients for Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler

Blackberry Mixture

Fresh or frozen Blackberries (If using frozen, leave them frozen and don't let them thaw before baking).
Sugar
Cornstarch
Melted butter
Lemon Juice

Cobbler Batter

Flour
Sugar
Baking powder
Sea salt or kosher salt
Milk
Melted butter
Pure vanilla extract- I prefer to use Sweet Southern Farms (a small-batch, locally made extract). Use code "SOUTHERNFOODJUNKIE for a 10% discount.

Note: See the Recipe Card at the Bottom for amounts

Equipment You'll Need

Mixing bowl (Large bowl)
Small bowl
9 x 13 baking dish
Spoon
Measuring cup
Measuring spoons
Serving Spoon
Cooling Rack

Note: For a complete list of all the tools that I recommend, check out this article on Best Kitchen Essentials.

How To Make Homemade Blackberry Cobbler

Step-by-step instructions

To Start: Preheat the oven to 375 Degrees Fahrenheit

Preparing the Blackberry Mixture: Rinse the blackberries thoroughly under cold water and pat them dry with a paper towel.

Place them in a mixing bowl. Pour melted butter over the top and mix well. Sprinkle blackberries with sugar, cornstarch, and lemon juice. This helps to sweeten the berries and create a thickened blackberry filling as they bake. Toss blackberries until they are evenly coated.

This is a image showing pouring melted butter over the blackberries to make the blackberry mixture. — Pour butter over berries

This image shows adding the sugar to the blackberries to make the blackberry mixture for the cobbler. — Add sugar

Make The Cobbler Topping: In a separate bowl, combine flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt. Whisk together. Then, stir in milk, melted butter, and vanilla extract until combined.

This image shows using a whisk to mix all of the dry ingredients together before adding in the wet ingredients to make a blackberry cobbler. — Mix the dry ingredients

This image shows adding the melted butter to the cobbler batter. — Then add butter and vanilla extract

This image shows adding milk to the dry ingredients to make the cobbler batter. — Next, add in the milk

This image shows whisking the batter together before pouring it over the blackberry mixture to make easy homemade blackberry cobbler. — Mix ingredients

Pro Tip: It is ok if the batter is slightly lumpy. Do not over-stir it.

Assemble the cobbler: Pour the prepared blackberries into a greased baking dish, spreading them evenly. Pour the batter over the berries until it is evenly distributed.

This image shows what the blackberry mixture looks like after it has been mixed up and poured into a greased backing dish before adding the batter on top.

This image shows pouring the batter over top of the blackberry mixture for blackberry cobbler.

This image shows what it looks like once you pour the batter over top of the blackberry mixture in the baking dish before it goes into the oven.

Bake the Cobbler: Place the fruit cobbler in the preheated oven and bake for about 45-50 minutes, or until the topping is golden brown and the filling is bubbly.

This image shows putting the Old-fashioned Southern Blackberry cobbler into the oven to bake.

Cool and Serve: Remove the cobbler from the oven and let it cool on a cooling rack for about 10-15 minutes before serving. This allows the filling to set slightly.

This image shows taking the golden brown blackberry cobbler out of the oven to let it cool before eating it.

How To Serve

Serve warm with a scoop of Homemade vanilla ice cream or whipped cream. You can also top with a little lemon zest for an added flavor pop!

This is a image of old fashioned blackberry cobbler topped with homemade vanilla ice cream.

Substitutions

You can substitute other berries for the blackberries in any combination. Blueberries work great for this recipe. Also, you could use half raspberries and half blackberries for a delicious blend of sweet and tart flavors, enhancing the dish's texture and color. This would work great for the 4th of July time of the year for a red, white, and blue theme summertime cookout.

How To Store Blackberry Cobbler

Cover the uneaten blackberry cobbler tightly with plastic wrap, aluminum foil, or put it in an airtight container. Place it in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days.

FAQ's

Can I use frozen blackberries instead of fresh ones?

Yes. You can use frozen, but make sure to leave them frozen before baking.

What if I prefer a less sweet cobbler?

You can reduce the amount of sugar in both the blackberry filling and the cobbler topping to suit your taste.

How can I prevent the cobbler topping from becoming too soggy?

If the cobbler topping becomes too soggy, next time you make it add an extra tablespoon of cornstarch to the berry mixture.

Can I freeze blackberry cobbler?

Yes, you can freeze baked blackberry cobbler. Make sure to cool it completely to room temperature, then wrap it tightly in plastic wrap and aluminum foil before freezing. You can also put it in a freezer-safe container. It will last 2 to 3 months in the freezer. To reheat, place it in the oven in the casserole dish it was in or in an oven-safe pan.

Old-Fashioned Southern Blackberry Cobbler Recipe (Easy)

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Cook Time: 45 minutes

Additional Time: 5 minutes

Total Time: 1 hour

No Ratings

Ingredients

Blackberry Mixture

4 cups of Blackberries
½ cup of white granulated sugar
1 teaspoon of cornstarch
1 teaspoon of lemon juice
4 tablespoons melted butter

Cobbler Batter

2 ½ cups of All Purpose Flour
1 ½ cup of White Granulated Sugar
1 tablespoon baking powder
2 cups of whole milk
1 tablespoon vanilla extract
4 tablespoons of melted butter

Instructions

To Start: Preheat the oven to 375 Degrees Fahrenheit
Preparing the Blackberry Mixture: Rinse the blackberries thoroughly under cold water and pat them dry with a paper towel. Place them in a mixing bowl. Pour melted butter over the top and mix well. Sprinkle blackberries with sugar, cornstarch, and lemon juice. This helps to sweeten the berries and create a thickened blackberry filling as they bake. Toss blackberries until they are evenly coated.
Make The Cobbler Topping: In a separate bowl, combine flour, sugar, baking powder, and salt. Whisk together, then stir in milk, melted butter, and vanilla extract until combined. It is ok if it is slightly lumpy. Do not over-stir it
Assemble the cobbler: Pour the prepared blackberries into a 9x13 greased baking dish, spreading them evenly. Pour the batter over the berries until it is evenly distributed.
Bake the Cobbler: Place the baking dish in the preheated oven and bake for about 45-50 minutes, or until the topping is golden brown and the filling is bubbly.
Cool and Serve: Remove the cobbler from the oven and let it cool on a cooling rack for about 10-15 minutes before serving. This allows the filling to set slightly.

Notes

Cook times can vary depending on oven type and baking dish. Adjust accordingly. If the center is not set, you will need to add more baking time.
It is possible to substitute other berries such as Blueberries or Raspberries. You can also do any combination of the three.

I hope you enjoy this awesome, simple Blackberry Cobbler recipe. It is one of my favorite summer dessert recipes, and I am sure it will also become a favorite of yours.

Creamy Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream with No Eggs

June 11, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Are you craving the creamiest, smoothest homemade vanilla ice cream ever? You’re in luck! This recipe brings back memories of summer cookouts and freshly churned ice cream. Enjoy it right after churning for a creamier ice cream that reminds you of a Wendy's Vanilla Frosty. Let it ripen in the freezer for a few hours for the ultimate homemade treat. Get ready to experience the best vanilla ice cream you've ever had!

This image shows a up close looking into the ice cream churn after the ice cream machine has stop churning. The paddle is still in place and you can see the soft creamy texture of this epic Homemade Vanilla ice cream when it is done.

Many years ago, I was on vacation in Pigeon Forge Tennesee. My father-in-law and I went around the countryside on a Saturday stopping by local yard sales.

While at one particular yard sale, I saw an older Rival Ice Cream Churn for sale. I've been wanting to buy one and this was my opportunity to get one on a deal.

The Rival Ice Cream Maker I bought in Pigeon Forge

The best part was it was only $10 bucks. ( You know I had to talk them down so really I got it for $5) I swooped it up and brought it home.

I studied several recipes, tried a few, and ultimately settled on one in the book of the Rival Ice Cream churn. It was so good and creamy.

This image shows soft and creamy homemade old fashioned vanilla ice cream in a brown bowl. In the upper left hand corner there is a plate with black berry cobbler on it. To the left there are two silver spoons and in the upper right hand corner you can see the ice cream canister.

It only required a few simple ingredients and was very versatile in that you could add other ingredients to change the flavor from Vanilla to Homemade Strawberry Ice Cream just by adding in your favorite fruit or candy such as Chocolate chips or Reese's Butter Cup.

So far it has been my favorite of all the ice cream recipes I have tried and it is so much better than store-bought ice cream. If this is your first time making ice cream, don't fret. I believe this recipe will become your favorite Homemade vanilla ice cream recipe and it is so easy to make.

This image shows homemade vanilla ice cream with a bit of homemade blackberry cobbler on a spoon in a bite shot.

Why You'll Love This Recipe

Ultra-Smooth and Rich: Achieves a creamy texture without egg yolks.
Easy and Quick: No tempering eggs means less time and effort.
Allergy-Friendly: Perfect for those with egg allergies.
Lower Cholesterol: Great for a healthier indulgence.
Versatile Enjoyment: Enjoy this classic flavor plain or use a topping such as chocolate syrup, crumbled Oreo cookies, or Strawberry Jam.
Crowd-Pleaser: Brings back nostalgic flavors everyone will love.
It is great on top of the Blackberry Cobbler!

This image shows a close up of soft and creamy homemade vanilla ice cream on top of blackberry cobbler. — Homemade Vanilla ice cream on top of Homemade Blackberry Cobbler

Make sure to check out our list of 100 Interesting facts about Ice Cream!

What You Need To Make This Recipe

This is a list of all the ingredients needed to make this Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream No Eggs

Vanilla Ice Cream Ingredients

See the recipe card for quantities.

Whole Milk
Half and Half Creamer
Heavy Whipping Cream (Heavy Cream)
White Granulated Sugar (Cane sugar)
Sea Salt
Ice Cream Salt (Rock salt)
Pure Vanilla Extract- I prefer to use Sweet Southern Farms (a small batch locally made extract) Use ode "SOUTHERNFOODJUNKIE for a 10% discount.
Ice

This image shows vanilla ice cream ingredients.

Equipment You'll Need

For a list of brands that I use and recommend for everyday Kitchen Basics, visit our Best Kitchen Essentials page.

Step-by-step Instructions

Making the Ice Cream Base

1. Add your milk products to the stock pot and turn on medium heat to medium-low heat.

This image shows a person pouring whole milk to a pot to make home made ice cream. — whole milk

This image shows a person pouring half and half creamer to make homemade ice cream mixture. — Half & Half

This image shows a person pouring heavy whipping cream in a large stock pot to make a ice cream mixture for homemade ice cream. — Heavy Whipping Cream

2. Scald the milk (bring the milk base up to a temperature of 180 degrees Fahrenheit until you see bubbles forming around the sides). Use your instant-read thermometer to keep an eye on this.

This image shows using a instant read thermometer made by thermoworks to check the temperature of the ice cream mixture that is in a large stock pot on the stove top. The thermometer reads 65 degrees Fahrenheit.

Make sure to keep stirring the mixture as well. Once it reaches the temperature or is close to it, remove it. If the mixture gets too hot, it will erupt into a boiling mess and it will be ruined.

This image shows a person using a wooden spoon to stir the ice cream mixture that is in a large stock pot on the stove top heating up.

3. Next, remove the milk mixture from the heat then add in your sugar, salt, and Vanilla flavoring. Stir well to incorporate and dissolve the sugar.

This image shows sugar and salt to be used in the ice cream mixture. — Sugar and Salt

This image shows adding sugar to the ice cream mixture. — Adding Sugar and Salt to the Milk Base

This image shows adding the pure vanilla extract from Sweet Southern Farms to the ice cream mixture. — Pure Vanilla Extract

This is a picture of a bottle of pure vanilla extract from Sweet Southern Farms. — Pure Vanilla Extract from Sweet Southern Farms, a local company near me

If you want your ice cream to turn out the best, use quality ingredients. For Vanilla ice cream, a high-quality Vanilla extract is important. I use a brand from a locally sourced company called Sweet Southern Farms that makes it in small batches. If you would like to purchase, they have offered you a 10% discount. Use code "SOUTHERNFOODJUNKIE" to get the discount.

4. Pour your ice cream mixture into your ice cream canister. Add your mixer paddle and lid then place in the refrigerator or freezer. The mixture will need to chill before churning. Do not let it freeze. We are just looking for it to get cold.

This image shows pouring the ice cream mixture into the ice cream churn canister.

This image show putting the lid on the ice cream churn canister.

5. Once your ice cream mixture is chilled you can remove it from the refrigerator or freezer and you are ready to churn it.

Optional: If you want to make a different ice cream flavor, you can add in your fruit base, candy base, or flavoring at this point.

Churning the Ice Cream Base

1. Place your canister into the churn bucket of the electric ice cream maker.

2. Add a layer of ice around the canister then a layer of salt. Keep alternating the ice and salt till it reaches just below the hole in the ice cream bucket.

3. Install the motor of the ice cream maker on the ice cream bucket per the manufacturer's instructions.

This image shows the Rival Ice Cream Maker up close. You can see the layers of ice and rock salt that is formed around the canister as the canister is being turned by the motor of the ice cream machine.

4. Before I start I like to add a towel under the bucket and wrap the bucket in a towel. This will help catch the sweat and help insulate the bucket. Just be sure not to cover the motor up or the top of it where the fan is.

5. If water builds up while churning, pour the water off through the hole in the side of the bucket. Keep adding more ice and salt layers till the motor has stopped churning.

Note: The finished churning process can vary for other brands of ice cream makers. Follow the instructions from your manufacturer on how your brand works. This series is typical of most older electric churn ice cream machines.

This image shows removing the top of the churn canister to reveal the homemade vanilla ice cream.

The churn typically takes anywhere from 30 minutes to 1 hour. It varies by how cold your ice cream mixture is when you start churning and how well you layer the ice/salt layers in the ice cream machine.

When the ice cream is ready, the motor will just stop. You will hear it lagging or straining as it gets closer and closer to being finished. Once it stops, you are ready to either eat it like this or move to the hardening section if you want hard ice cream.

This image shows a person removing the paddle from the vanilla ice cream after it has finished churning.

Note: You can eat the ice cream once it stops churning. This will give you a smooth and creamy vanilla ice cream texture that is similar to soft-serve ice cream. If you want more of a hardened texture similar to classic vanilla ice cream from an ice cream parlor, continue reading.

Hardening or Ripening the ice Cream

1. Once the motor stops, you will take the canister out of the ice cream bucket. Take it to the sink so that you can remove the mixer paddle inside.

This image shows a person scraping the remaining ice cream from the paddle of the ice cream churn. They are using a silver spoon. — Use a spoon to scrap off the paddle

2. Put the lid back on and stick the canister in the freezer for at least one hour to harden or ripen the ice cream.

How To Serve Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream

As a topping on Blackberry Cobbler, Peach Cobbler, or Apple Cobbler.
Make a Vanilla Ice Cream Cone.
Add ice cream to a bowl and top with fresh fruit or strawberry Jam.
Top with Maple Syrup and Peanut Butter
Top with chocolate syrup
Crumble some Oreo cookies on top for a crunchy texture.
Make Vanilla Ice Cream Bars or a Vanilla Ice Cream Sandwich!

Storage Tips

Store leftover ice cream in a freezer-safe airtight container. It should be good for up to two months if stored properly.

FAQ's

1 gallon

Creamy Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream with No Eggs

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Cook Time: 30 minutes

Additional Time: 45 minutes

Total Time: 1 hour 30 minutes

Are you craving the creamiest, smoothest homemade vanilla ice cream ever? You’re in luck! This recipe brings back memories of summer cookouts and freshly churned ice cream. Enjoy it right after churning for a creamier ice cream that reminds you of a Wendy's Vanilla Frosty. Let it ripen in the freezer for a few hours for the ultimate homemade treat. Get ready to experience the best vanilla ice cream you've ever had!

No Ratings

Ingredients

2 cups Whole Milk
2 cups Half and Half
4 cups Whipping Cream
1 ¾ cups Sugar
½ teaspoon Sea Salt
2 tablespoon Vanilla Extract
16 lbs ice, this can vary depending on climate. Just make sure to have enough on hand.
1 box ice cream salt, You can use Rock Salt for this as well.

Instructions

Ice Cream Mixture

Start with a heavy-bottom saucepan. You will need at least a 6 or 8-quart pot.
Add in your milk products and cut the burner on medium-low.
At this point, we need to scald the milk. Milk is scalded when it reaches 180 degrees F. I like to use a quick-read thermometer to keep an eye on the temperature. Look for small bubbles to form around the edge and steam. Make sure to keep stirring the mixture as well. Once it reaches the temperature or is close to it, remove it. If the mixture gets too hot, it will erupt into a boiling mess and it will be ruined.
Next, add in your sugar, salt, and Vanilla flavoring. Stir well to incorporate and dissolve the sugar.
Pour your mixture into your ice cream canister. Add your mixer paddle and lid then place in the refrigerator or freezer. The mixture will need to chill before churning. Do not let it freeze. We are just looking for it to get cold.
Once your mixture is chilled you can remove it from the refrigerator or freezer

Churning the Ice Cream

Place your canister into the churn bucket.
Add a layer of ice around the canister then a layer of salt. You will keep alternating the ice and salt till it reaches just below the hole in the ice cream bucket.
Install the motor on the ice cream bucket.
Before I start I like to add a towel under the bucket and wrap the bucket in a towel. This will help catch the sweat and help insulate the bucket. Just be sure not to cover the motor up or the top of it where the fan is.
Church your ice cream until the motor stops. This time can vary. You will also need to keep a check on the ice and salt mixture as it will melt. You can pour the water off through the hole in the side of the bucket and keep adding more ice and salt till it is finished.

Hardening or ripening the ice cream

Once the motor stops, you will take the canister out of the ice cream bucket. Take it to the sick so that you can remove the mixer paddle inside.
Put the lid back on and stick the canister in the freezer for at least one hour to harden or ripen the ice cream.

Super Easy Grilled Backstrap Venison (Deer Meat)

June 10, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Today, we’re sharing a super easy recipe for grilled backstrap venison. This dish highlights Venison's natural, tender taste (deer meat) with a simple preparation perfect for any family dinner. Whether you're an experienced hunter or enjoy trying new recipes, this grilled venison backstrap will surely be a hit. Let's get started and enjoy some good Southern cooking!

This is a closeup of venison backstrap steaks that have been cooked with some rosemary laying on top for a color pop.

You may be looking at this and thinking, I am not eating deer meat. I can almost bet you would love the taste of venison backstrap that has been grilled. It tastes so similar to beef, you may not know the difference.

One of my favorite things to do growing up is to deer hunt. Spending time with my dad, brothers, uncles, and cousins was time well spent. Not only that but the time spent in the stand is such a peaceful and relaxing time in nature.

Watching the world come alive as the Sun comes up is such a refreshing way to unplug from all of the hustle and bustle of society, especially with how things are going in the current times. But this is not the only reason why I love to hunt, I love to eat Venison.

Why I Love Venison

Harvesting deer is the second reason I love going hunting. I love to eat Venison because I love the taste of it, but it is also super healthy for you. It is loaded with good protein and low in fats. When you talk about organic and healthy food, nothing is hardly better for you than venison.

This image shows what super easy grilled backstrap venison looks like close up as it has been cut open to reveal the color. The steak looks juicy and tender.

According to Penn State University, Venison is high in essential amino acids and in addition, a rich source of thiamine, riboflavin, niacin, iron, and zinc. Venison meat is a perfect choice of protein because it is so low in cholesterol and saturated fat.

What Is Backstrap Venison

Backstrap Venison is simply a certain cut of meat from a Whitetail deer. You may have heard of beef tenderloin, beef strip loin, or top loin right? Well, Backstrap Venison comes from the same area, but from a Whitetail deer. The tenderloin is the section of meat that runs along the spine inside the rib cage (think filet mignon) whereas the backstrap is the section of meat that runs along the outer edge of the spine.

This diagram from Outside Bozeman shows the Top loin, which is what we are calling Venison Backstrap.

So essentially Backstrap venison comes from the area of the back of a deer that runs from the shoulder to the rump. The Tenerderloin and Backstrap are often considered the most tender cut of meat you can obtain from a whitetail deer and are considered a prized cut of meat.

This is a closeup image of a beautiful backstrap venison steak that has been rinsed and dried off ready for the marinade. — Cut of Steak from the Backstrap

The lack of connective tissue in this section of meat is what makes it so tender, that is if you know how to cook it. Because Venison has very little fat, it can dry out very quickly if you do not know how to cook it properly. I am going to show you an easy way to do this.

Just for informational purposes, this cut of venison can go by a few different names such as deer back straps, Venison backstraps, Venison Steak, venison tenderloin, Venison loin, Top Loin, and venison butterfly steak.

What Does Deer Back Straps Taste Like

In my opinion, backstrap does not have much of a gamey taste and reminds me of Beef steak. The backstrap is very mild compared to other areas or cuts of meat from a whitetail deer. The texture is very tender, similar to high-quality beef tenderloin or pork tenderloin. The diet of the deer can affect much of the flavor but it can have a slightly sweet taste as well.

The venison loin is very lean and versatile being that it can be used in a variety of ways and served with just about any side dish. The mild flavor of venison backstrap makes it a versatile cut that can absorb a variety of marinades, spices, and cooking techniques without losing its natural taste.

This is a image of Venison Steaks on the grill.

In this recipe, we are keeping it very basic with our cooking method, we are using just three simple ingredients and using an outdoor grill. This will allow the natural taste of the venison tenderloin to shine through. I do include an optional marinade though in case you want to elevate the flavors a bit.

If you like venison and want to make jerky, check out this awesome jerky marinade recipe.

What You Need to Make This Recipe

This recipe only requires three simple ingredients

Ingredients for Grilled Backstrap Venison

Olive Oil
Black Pepper
Sea Salt or Kosher Salt
Venison Backstrap (I cut mine into Steaks about ½ thick)

This image shows the ingredients used to make a marinade for Venison Backstrap Steaks.

Optional Ingredients:

Worcestershire Sauce
Minced garlic
chopped rosemary
Balsamic vinegar

Note: See the recipe card for amounts

Equipment You'll Need

How To Cook Venison Backstrap on the Grill

Venison is a very lean cut of meat and if not cooked properly is prone to drying out. I like to marinade with Olive oil to add a little fat, but also this is a binding agent for the salt and Black Pepper to stick to.

Step-by-step Instructions

Simple Marinade

1. Start by washing the Venison and then patting it dry with paper towels.

This is a image of deer meat being rinsed off before being marinated to cook.

Use a cutting board and sharp knife to trim off any fat or silver skin. If you have a whole backstrap, I recommend cutting them into ½-inch to 1-inch steaks.

This is a image that shows the close up of venison backstrap in order to show what silver skin looks like. There is words written on the page that is says silver skin with an arrow pointing to the actual silver skin.

2. Mix Olive Oil, Sea Salt, and Black Pepper in a small mixing bowl.

3. Add meat to the bowl and mix around until all the meat is completely covered. Place in the refrigerator for 30 minutes.

This is a closeup of the venison steaks in the marinade before cooking.

Optional Marinade:

If you want to add extra flavor, marinate the steaks for at least 1-2 hours, or overnight. A simple marinade could include olive oil, Worcestershire sauce, minced garlic, chopped rosemary, and balsamic vinegar.

Cooking Venison Backstrap

1. Lay the small bowl out on the counter and allow the venison to come up to room temperature for about 30 minutes before cooking.

2. Preheat the Grill to medium-high heat, roughly 400-450 degrees Fahrenheit. We are going to cook this hot and fast.

This is a image of my grill that is preheating.

3. Venison is best enjoyed medium-rare (120-125 degrees Fahrenheit) to medium (140-145 degrees Fahrenheit). If you cook it until you reach a well-done temperature, it will be very dry.

4. Place the Venison on the hot grill grates over direct heat. Sear the steaks on the hot grill. Sear for 2 minutes on each side to get a good crust.

Note: You may have to adjust this time depending on how thick or thin your steaks are. The best guide when grilling is to let your meat thermometer be your guide so you do not overcook your meat.

5. Flip and rotate the meat 90 degrees and cook for 1 minute, then flip again and rotate 90 degrees and cook for 1 minute.

Using a meat thermometer, probe the meat to check the temperature each time you flip to make sure you are still in your desired range.

Cook to Desired Doneness: Use a meat thermometer to ensure accuracy:

Rare: 120-125°F (49-52°C)
Medium-Rare: 130-135°F (54-57°C)
Medium: 140-145°F (60-63°C)

Note: The best way to serve Venison is medium-rare to medium. Overcooking can make it tough.

6. Pull the meat off the grill before it reaches 5 degrees before your target temperature. The meat will continue to rise in temperature for a few minutes after removing from the heat source so this is the reason you remove 5 degrees before your target temperature.

This is a image of venison backstrap steaks coming off the grill after they have been cooked. I am placing them on a plate.

Serve

Slice the steaks against the grain and serve hot. Enjoy them as is, or with your favorite sides and sauces.

Tips For Success

Monitor Temperature: Venison cooks quickly due to its low-fat content, so keep a close eye on the temperature to avoid overcooking.
Flavor Pairings: Venison pairs well with robust flavors like garlic, rosemary, thyme, juniper berries, and red wine reductions.

What To Serve With Grilled Backstrap Venison

Want to cook this recipe indoors? Check out this post for how to cook a steak on the George Foreman.

Happy Cooking!

Let me know how cooking deer backstrap turns out for you in the comments below! I'd love to hear from you!

Let's Get Food Junked!

4 steaks

Super Easy Grilled Backstrap Venison (Deer Meat)

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Cook Time: 8 minutes

Total Time: 18 minutes

This super simple and easy guide will elevate your Venison Backstraps to new levels. Using simple ingredients will allow the flavor and tenderness of the venison to shine through.

No Ratings

Ingredients

2 tablespoons of Olive Oil
1 teaspoon of Sea Salt or Kosher salt
½ teaspoon of black pepper

Instructions

Simple Marinade

1. Start by washing the Venison and then patting it dry with paper towels. Use a cutting board and sharp knife to trim off any fat or silver skin. If you have a whole backstrap, I recommend cutting it into ½ inch to 1 inch steaks.

2. Mix Olive Oil, Sea Salt, and Black Pepper in a small mixing bowl.

3. Add meat to the bowl and mix around until all the meat is completely covered. Place in the refrigerator for 30 minutes.

Optional Marinade:

Cooking Venison Backstrap

1. Lay the small bowl out on the counter and allow the venison to come up to room temperature for about 30 minutes before cooking.

2. Preheat the Grill to medium-high heat, roughly 400-450 degrees Fahrenheit. We are going to cook this hot and fast.

3. Venison is best enjoyed medium-rare (120-125 degrees Fahrenheit) to medium (140-145 degrees Fahrenheit). If you cook it until you reach a well-done temperature, it will be very dry.

4. Place the Venison on the hot grill grates over direct heat. Sear the steaks on the hot grill. Sear for 2 minutes on each side to get a good crust.

5. Flip and rotate the meat 90 degrees and cook for 1 minute, then flip again and rotate 90 degrees and cook for an additional 1 minute.

Using a meat thermometer, probe the meat to check the temperature each time you flip to make sure you are still in your desired range.

Cook to Desired Doneness: Use a meat thermometer to ensure accuracy:

Rare: 120-125°F (49-52°C)
Medium-Rare: 130-135°F (54-57°C)
Medium: 140-145°F (60-63°C)

Notes

You may have to adjust this time depending on how thick or thin your steaks are. The best guide when grilling is to let your meat thermometer be your guide so you do not overcook your meat.
The best way to serve Venison is medium-rare to medium. Overcooking can make it tough.

Easy Homemade Strawberry Jam Recipe

May 21, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Strawberry season is here, and I can't wait to make this easy homemade strawberry jam. With just a few simple ingredients, this recipe brings out the natural flavor of the strawberries. Join me as I share this simple recipe and show you different ways to use your jam.

This image shows a English muffin in the foreground that has been toasted and is covered in fresh homemade Strawberry Jam. The jar of jam is in the background and a silver spoon is in the foreground.

Once April and May get here in the early summer of South Carolina, our family loves going to pick Fresh Strawberries. It is a fun family outing, and the kids just love it. I grow a lot of fruit on my property,y but at the moment, Strawberries are not a fruit that I currently grow, but I plan to grow them in the future. So we like to visit a small local Strawberry farm and pick ripe berries to make this small batch of strawberry jam.

This image is a closeup of fresh strawberries in a bucket.

Growing up in the South, my mom made lots of jams, jellies, and preserves. There is nothing better or more fulfilling than making your own. I can still remember Mom standing over that old Ball Granite Ware water bath canner, dipping jars of her jelly or Jams in it.

Hearing the lids pop had to be the most exciting and rewarding sound while I was sitting in the living room. I knew it wouldn't be long before I could spread some on my PB&J sandwich.

Why You'll Love This Homemade Jam Recipe

Simple Ingredients: Creating something delicious with just a few basic ingredients is always satisfying. Strawberries, sugar, fruit pectin, and lemon juice are simple yet effective components that combine to make something wonderful.
Freshness: Using fresh strawberries gives the jam a vibrant flavor and color that you just can't get from store-bought varieties. There's something special about knowing exactly where your ingredients come from and tasting the freshness in the final product.
Pride in Making: There's a sense of pride and accomplishment that comes from making something from scratch. Whether you're an experienced cook or new to the kitchen, successfully creating your jam can be a rewarding experience.
Versatility: This homemade jam recipe isn't just for spreading on toast! It can be used in various recipes, from filling cakes and pastries to topping yogurt or ice cream. Having a jar of homemade jam on hand opens up a world of culinary possibilities.

This image shows a closeup of Strawberry Jam on a spoon.

What Does this Recipe Taste Like?

The strawberry jam tastes sweet and fruity, with a strong, natural strawberry flavor. It has a balance of sweetness and a slight tartness, reminiscent of fresh strawberries. The texture is smooth with small bits of strawberry, making it a bit chunky but still spreadable. Overall, it's like eating a sweetened, concentrated version of ripe strawberries.

This image shows two English muffins sitting on a white place. The top muffin has been toasted and is covered in Strawberry Jam. There is an open jar of Jam in the foreground and a spoon that is covered in jam sitting on the table.

If you love making homemade jams and Jellies, you have got to try this Southern Muscadine Jelly Recipe!

Where to Find Strawberries for this recipe

Finding the strawberries is probably the most important step in this recipe. Once late spring or early summer is here in South Carolina, there are many U-Pick farms to visit to get ripe strawberries. If you do not have this option where you live, you can buy the strawberries from the grocery store or even frozen strawberries. I would let store-bought frozen strawberries be your last resort, though.

I plan to buy roughly one gallon of strawberries from a local U-pick farm. I will use 2 ½ pounds for this strawberry Jam recipe, and then this fall,l when the figs are ripe in my orchard, I will make a strawberry fig jam with the remaining strawberries.

This is a closeup of strawberries in a bucket that have just been picked.

The extra berries that I buy now, I will dehull, then quarter them. After that, I will place them in an airtight container or zip-lock freezer bag and then freeze them until I need them. Buying Strawberries fresh from a farm and then freezing them will result in a better-tasting recipe than buying frozen strawberries from the grocery store.

This is a tip that you can use in case you want to make additional strawberry jam later in the year or if you want to make this awesome Homemade Strawberry Ice Cream Recipe!

What You Need To Make This Recipe

This easy strawberry jam recipe only requires a few simple ingredients. We are going to cover the ingredients here, but the amounts will be listed below in the recipe card.

Ingredients for Homemade Strawberry Jam

Strawberries (Organic strawberries if you can find them)
Bottled Lemon Juice
Butter
Sure Jell (yellow box) or Ball Real Fruit Natural Pectin
Granulated white sugar (Cane Sugar)

See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities

This image shows I am using the yellow Sure Jell box to make Strawberry Jam. — Sure Jell in the Yellow Box

Note: It is important to use this ratio of sugar to the right balance of fruit for the Jam to jell. I know it seems like a lot of sugar, but it is needed to make this recipe work so don't skimp on it.

Equipment Needed

Heavy-bottomed Saucepan or stock pot
A small saucepan for sterilizing canning lids
Wooden spoon or metal spoon
Instant Read thermometer or candy thermometer
8 half-pint glass canning jars (Mason Jars or Ball Jars)
8 canning lids and 8 rings (get the name-brand lids)
Water bath canner
Potato Masher, Mix and chop, food processor, or something to mash or break up the strawberries
Canning Utensil kit (funnel, jar lifter, bubble remover, headspace tool, magnetic lid lifter).

For items that I recommend buying, see my Canning and Preserving Essentials guide and Best Kitchen Essentials guide.

How to Make Delicious Strawberry Jam

Step-by-step instructions

Preparing the Water bath canner, Jars, and lids for canning

Step 1

Wash the jars, lids, and rings with soapy water, then dry them off. Prepare the water bath canner by placing 8 half-pint jars on the rack of the canner, then proceed to fill the water bath canner with water until it reaches 1 inch over the top of the jars.

Turn the stove on to high heat to bring water up to a boil. Once the water has come to a boil, boil jars for 10 minutes. (Add 1 minute to this time for every 1000 feet above sea level you are.) Once it reaches a boil, start your timer. After the time is up, turn the burner down to low to keep the water warm until you are ready for the jars to pour your jam into.

Note: I prefer to place my jars in the canner and then fill them up with water. This is a great way to be sure you do not overfill your canner. One note, though, this method makes the canner heavy. If this is an issue, just fill the canner about half full of water, then place the jars in it while it is on the stove. You can use a pitcher of water to adjust the water level at that point.

This image shows a granite ware water bath canning being filled up with water while half pint jars are inside the canner. — Filling the water bath canner with jars in place

Step 2

Fill up the small saucepan about halfway with water and set it on a back burner. Turn the burner on medium-low. Add in the canning lids. This will sterilize them and keep them warm for when you are ready. I leave the lids in this saucepan the whole time I am making the jam or jelly until I am ready to use them.

This image shows lids in a small saucepan heating up to sterilize them.

Making the Strawberry Jam

Step 1

Dehull (remove the green stem on top) and then wash all of your strawberries.

This is a image of me washing strawberries in my sink. There is also a colander in the sink where I can place the strawberries in to allow them to drain.

This image shows me dehulling the fresh strawberries with a paring knife while holding the strawberry in my hands.

Crush the berries using a mix-and-chop, or potato masher, or you could even use a food processor. You want them to have a rough texture.

This image shows me adding in fresh strawberries to my food processor in order to puree them to make Jam.

This image shows how I used a food processor to crush or puree fresh strawberries to make Jam with.

Place the crushed-up strawberries in a Large Saucepan or stock pot over medium-high heat.

This image shows adding in the fresh crushed strawberries to a large stock pot.

Step 2

Next, add in the Sure Jell or Ball Real Fruit pectin, butter, and lemon juice and boil for 1 minute.

This image shows adding in Sure Jell Fruit Pectin to the Jam Mixture.

This image shows adding in butter to the Strawberry Jam Mixture.

This image shows adding in lemon juice to the fruit mixture to make Strawberry jam.

Note: Using butter will help reduce the foam that will be produced when boiling the mixture.

Step 3

Add the granulated sugar to the pot and stir quickly until it has dissolved. Bring the mixture back up to a full boil. Skim off any foam that may appear.

This image shows adding in the sugar to the Jam mixture to make Strawberry Jam.

Step 4

Boil for 1 minute or until the mixture reaches a temperature of 220 degrees Fahrenheit (104 degrees Celsius).

This image shows using a Thermapen Instant Read Thermometer to check the temp of the Jam mixture. — Using a Thermapen to test temperature

Plate Test: Test the jam mixture by using the plate test. Place a small plate in the freezer for 15 minutes. Place a spoonful of jam on the plate. Use your finger to push through the jam and it should look wrinkled and not fill the gap where you pushed through it. If this doesn't happen, boil for an extra minute or two.

Canning the Homemade Strawberry Jam

Step 1

Remove the hot jars from the water bath canner and set the glass jars on a tea towel.

This image shows 8 half pint jars sitting on a tea towel ready to be filled with hot Jam.

Step 2

Fill the jars up using a ladle until there is ¼ inch headspace. Use the headspace measuring tool to measure this.

This image shows using a Thermoworks Silicone Ladle to fill up jars of Jam.

This image shows using a funnel to fill up jars to make Strawberry Jam.

This image shows using the head space tool to measure the correct headspace when making Jam.

Using the other end of the tool, stick it into the jars of jam and remove excess air bubbles. Wipe off the rim of the glass jars with a clean tea towel.

This image shows using a wet dish cloth to wipe down the rims of the jars after they have been filled with hot jam.

Using the lid lifter, grab a lid from the small saucepan on the stove and place the lid on the tops of the jars. Apply the screw-on band to the fingertip tight.

This image shows using the lid lifter to remove a lid from the hot water.

This image shows using the lid lifter to put the lid on top of jars of Strawberry Jam.

This image shows putting the screw band on jars of Jam.

Step 3

Place each jar on the elevated canning rack and make the jars even.

This image shows all of the jars of jam sitting on the elevated wire canning rack. The purpose of this image is to show what the canning rack looks like with the jars of jam sitting on it with the rack elevated.

Lower the canning rack into the hot water in the canner and make sure the water covers the jars by at least an inch. Turn the heat back up on the stove to high heat, put the lid on the canner, and bring the water to a full boil again.

This image shows raising the wire canning rack after jars of jam have been processed.

Step 4

Process the jars of jam for 10 minutes. Make sure to adjust for higher elevation levels.

Step 5

Remove the jars from the water bath canner using a jar lifter. Place the hot glass jars back on the tea towel and let them cool to room temperature.

This image shows using a Jar lifter to put Hot Jars of Jam on a tea towel to cool to room temperature after being processed in a water bath canner.

This image shows hot jars of Strawberry Jam after they just came out of the Water bath canner.

In the next 30 minutes, as the Jars cool, you should start to hear the lids popping. Let cool for 12 to 24 hours. Check the lids to see if they have been sealed by pressing them in the center of the lid. If the center of the lid flexes, the lid did not seal. Use these jars of jam first by placing them in the refrigerator.

Unique Ways To Serve Homemade Strawberry Jam

Serve it on top of Homemade Vanilla Ice Cream or this Homemade Strawberry Ice Cream
Homemade Strawberry Jam is great on our Homemade Biscuits
Strawberry Jam goes great on top of Old Fashioned Pancakes, French Toast, or Waffles.
One of the most traditional ways to serve it is on the good old-fashioned Peanut Butter and Jam sandwich.
Use it as a topping on Yogurt or Oatmeal
It can be used as a Pastry Filling, such as homemade pop-tarts.
Strawberry Jam is great on top of Plain Cheesecake.
You can use Strawberry Jam as a cake filling as well.
Blend Strawberry Jam into a delicious smoothie.
Spread this homemade jam on toast.
Top a bagel with cream cheese and this Homemade Strawberry Jam.

FAQ's

How long will Homemade Strawberry Jam Last?

If properly canned, Strawberry Jam can last up to 1 year if stored in a cool, dark place.

Does Homemade Strawberry Jam Thicken as it cools?

Yes, Homemade Strawberry Jam will thicken as it cools if you follow the recipe right.

Can you make homemade Strawberry Jam without lemon juice?

Yes, if you use Sure Jell (Yellow Box) pectin, you do not have to use the lemon juice. The reason is that Sure Jell contains citric acid. I like to add in the extra lemon juice for good measure. I use Sure Jell, and it is said to help the fruit keep its color.

8 half-pint jars of jma

Easy Homemade Strawberry Jam Recipe

Prep Time: 30 minutes

Cook Time: 10 minutes

Total Time: 40 minutes

Capture the sweet taste of summer with this simple homemade strawberry jam. With just fresh strawberries, sugar, fruit pectin, and lemon juice, and pectin, this easy recipe creates a delicious spread perfect for toast, pastries, or desserts.

No Ratings

Ingredients

5 cups of fresh strawberries (approximately 2 ½ pounds of fresh strawberries)
1 teaspoon of butter
1 box of Sure Jell (Yellow Box) or 6 Tablespoons of Ball Real Fruit Pectin.
2 tablespoons of Bottled Lemon Juice
7 cups of granulated white sugar (cane sugar)

Instructions

Prepare Glass Jars and Water Bath Canner:

Wash the jars, lids, and rings with soapy water then dry them off. Prepare the water bath canner by placing 8 half-pint jars on the rack of the canner then proceed to fill the water bath canner with water until it reaches 1 inch over top of the jars. Turn the stove on to high heat to bring water up to a boil. Once the water has come up to a boil, boil jars for 10 minutes. (Add 1 minute to this time for every 1000 feet above sea level you are). Once it reaches a boil, start your timer. After the time is up turn the burner down to low to keep the water warm until you are ready for the jars to pour your jam into them.
Fill up the small saucepan about halfway with water and set it on a back burner. Turn the burner on medium-low. Add in the canning lids. This will sterilize them and keep them warm for when you are ready. I leave the lids in this saucepan the whole time I am making the jam or jelly until I am ready to use them.

Making the Strawberry Jam

Dehull (remove the green stem on top) and then wash all of your strawberries. Crush the berries using a mix-and-chop, or potato masher, or you could even use a food processor. You want them to have a rough texture. Place the crushed-up strawberries in a Large Saucepan or stock pot over medium-high heat.
Next add in the Sure Jell or Ball Real Fruit pectin, butter, and lemon juice.
Add the granulated sugar to the pot and stir quickly until it has dissolved. Bring the mixture back up to a full boil. Skim off any foam that may appear.
Boil for 1 minute or until the mixture reaches a temperature of 220 degrees Fahrenheit (104 degrees Celsius) then remove from heat.

Canning the Homemade Strawberry Jam

Remove the hot jars from the water bath canner and set the glass jars on a tea towel.
Fill the jars up using a ladle until there is ¼ inch head space. Use the headspace measuring tool to measure this. Using the other end of the tool, stick into the jars of jam and remove excess air bubbles. Wipe off the rim of the glass jars with a clean tea towel. Using the lid lifter, grab a lid from the small saucepan on the stove and place the lid on the tops of the jars. Apply the screw-on band to fingertip tight.
Place each jar on the elevated canning rack and arrange jars so that they are even. Lower the canning rack into the hot water in the canner and make sure the water covers the jars by at least an inch. Turn the heat back up on the stove to high heat and bring the water to a full boil again.
Process the jars of jam for 10 minutes. Make sure to adjust for higher elevation levels.
Remove the jars from the water bath canner using a jar lifter. Place the hot glass jars back on the tea towel and let cool to room temperature. In the next 30 minutes as the Jars cool, you should start to hear the lids popping. Let cool for 12 to 24 hours. Check the lids to see if they have sealed by pressing in the center of the lid. If the center of the lid flexes, the lid did not seal. Use these jars of jam first by placing them in the refrigerator.

Notes

For this recipe, it is formulated to use bottled Lemon Juice as it has a consistent Acdicity level.
The butter helps reduce foaming when boiling.
Don't over boil it. Longer does not equal better in this case. If you boil too long you will cause the Jam not to set.

Easy Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake Recipe (4 Ingredients)

May 4, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

If you're looking for a quick and easy dessert that everyone will love, this Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake is hard to beat! Made with just four simple ingredients, it combines sweet pineapple, tart cherries, and a buttery golden cake topping. The best part? There's no mixing required! Just dump everything into a baking dish, pop it in the oven, and let it do its thing. It's the perfect dessert for family gatherings, church potlucks, or anytime you're craving something sweet without a lot of fuss.

If you have hung around the South much, you may have seen this recipe show up. It is a summertime favorite at cookouts, socials at church, and potlucks. It is the perfect dessert for holiday feasts as well as casual dinner parties. I believe its mass appeal is how easy it is to make, just dump and bake, no mixing. It also only requires just a handful of ingredients (only four).

I've had this recipe so many times, that I cannot even tell you who all I know has made it. I just remember it showing up! This recipe can be served hot or at room temperature and is best topped with a scoop of vanilla ice cream. Talk about yummy. It will soon be a favorite recipe.

Dump Cake Recipes

Dump cakes get their name from how they are prepared. The ingredients are "dumped together" to make an easy dessert. The history of where it originated is a bit unclear, but according to an article published on Yahoo Finance, It showed up in a church cookbook called Carolina Cookery: From Quaker Kitchens.

To make a dump cake, all you need is a dry cake mix, crushed pineapple, pie filling, and butter. The fashion or order in which you dump all the ingredients in a casserole dish matters but other than that, it is one of the easiest desserts to make. After that, all that is left is to bake it, and then you are done.

If this is your first time making this easy dessert, don't fret. This will be the easiest dessert you have ever made.

If you enjoy this dessert, you'll love these Maple Pancake Cupcakes. I've written an entire post on how to make them.

Why You'll Love This Easy Dump Cake Recipe

This pineapple Cherry Dump Cake Recipe is going to be a hit at your next gathering.

Easy Prep: Just dump and bake – no fuss!
Delicious Combo: Sweet pineapple meets tart cherry and a buttery crust for flavor perfection.
Versatile Treat: Perfect for any occasion, from potlucks to cozy nights in.
Minimal Ingredients: Simple pantry staples yield a gourmet dessert.
Warm and Cozy: A scoop straight from the oven is pure comfort food bliss.

What Does this Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake Taste Like?

If you have ever tasted Cherry Cobbler, this dump cake recipe is similar, but in its own way. The pineapple cherry dump cake offers a delightful blend of flavors. The sweet pineapple provides a tropical tanginess, while the tart cherry filling adds a sharp contrast. Combined with the buttery richness of the cake mix, each bite offers a harmonious balance of sweet and tart notes. Overall, it tastes like a comforting, indulgent treat that's both satisfying and delicious. Top the warm dessert with the cool sensation and creaminess of vanilla ice cream and it is a gooey flavor explosion.

This is a image of pineapple cherry dump cake in a white bowl. Behind it is the casserole dish full of pineapple cherry dump cake and a spoon sitting in it. The casserole dish is sitting on a wooden cutting board.

What You Need To Make This Recipe

See the recipe card at the bottom of the post for full instructions

Crushed pineapple
Cherry pie filling
Yellow cake mix
Butter (melted)

Optional ingredients

Chopped pecans

Equipment You'll Need

9 x 13 Casserole Dish or cake pan
Wooden or Metal spoon
Can Opener

Note: For information on the product brands that I recommend and use, see our Best Kitchen Essentials Page. [Best Kitchen Essentials]

How To Make Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake

Follow these easy steps to make this dump cake.

Step-by-step instructions

Step 1

Preheat oven to 350 degrees

Step 2

Lightly grease a 9x13 casserole dish.

Step 3

Drain the juice from the can of crushed pineapple.

Step 4

Spread an even layer of pineapple over the bottom of the casserole dish then top with the cherry pie filling. Spread the can of pie filling evenly over the crushed pineapple.

This is a image of a Pyrex casserole dish that has a even layer of crushed pineapple in the bottom.

This is a image of a clear Pyrex dish that has a layer of crushed pineapple on the bottom with Cherry Pie Filling on top of the Pineapple.

Step 5

With the box of cake mix, sprinkle over the surface of the fruit filling as evenly as possible. (it doesn't have to be perfect).

This is a image of cake batter being spread over evenly to make Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake.

Step 6

Pour the melted butter over the top of the cake mix.

Step 7

Bake in the oven for 50 to 60 minutes until bubbly and golden brown.

Substitutions

While this recipe calls for dry yellow cake mix, you can substitute White Cake mix if that is all you have. Just note, that this will have a little different taste.

If you do not like pineapple, omit the crushed pineapple and add 1 extra can of cherry pie filling.

Variations

If you do not have time to make this in the oven, a simple variation for an easy recipe is to cook it in the slow cooker or crock pot.

Instructions

Add the ingredients in the same manner as listed in the Step-by-step instructions. Cook on high for 2 hours or low for 4 hours.

How To Serve Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake

Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake is best served warm or at room temperature. Top it with a scoop of ice cream or a dab of whipped cream. My favorite is Vanilla bean ice cream.

This image shows Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake that has been spooned out into a white bowl. The bowl is sitting in front of the baking dish with the rest of the recipe in it.

FAQ's

What can I do with the leftover Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake?

You can store leftovers in an airtight container or use plastic wrap on the top of the casserole dish. Place the leftover dump cake in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days.

Do I need to stir the ingredients?

No. Layer the ingredients just as the recipe suggests. There is no need to stir them.

Let me know how these Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake turns out for you in the comments below! I'd love to hear from you! In my opinion, it is one of the simplest desserts to make and I think you will love it.

Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Cook Time: 50 minutes

Additional Time: 10 minutes

Total Time: 1 hour 10 minutes

Pineapple Cherry Dump Cake: A mouthwatering fusion of sweet pineapple, tangy cherry, and buttery cake mix, baked to golden perfection. Effortlessly prepared by layering ingredients in a baking dish, this comforting dessert is a crowd-pleaser at any gathering. Serve warm for a delightful treat that's as easy to make as it is delicious

No Ratings

Ingredients

1 20-ounce can of crushed pineapple
1-21 ounce can of cherry pie filling
1 box of yellow cake mix
1 stick of butter (melted)

Instructions

Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
Lightly grease a 9x13 casserole dish.
Drain the juice from the can of crushed pineapple.
Spread an even layer of crushed pineapple on the bottom of the casserole dish then top with the cherry pie filling. Spread the can of fruit filling evenly over the crushed pineapple.
Sprinkle the box of cake mix over the fruit as evenly as possible. (It doesn't have to be perfect).
Pour the melted butter over the top of the dry cake mix.
Bake in the oven for 50 to 60 minutes until bubble and golden brown.

Notes

Optional ingredients:

½ cups of chopped pecans

What Meat Goes with Cold Pasta Salad

April 23, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Pasta salad, with its medley of flavors and textures, has long been a staple on tables in the South. While fresh vegetables and dressings often take center stage, the addition of meat can transform this classic dish into a hearty and satisfying meal. But when it comes to pasta salad, why settle for the ordinary? Let's venture beyond the expected and explore what meat goes with pasta salad.

This is a overhead shot of the completed Spaghetti Pasta Salad Recipe

What is Pasta Salad?

Pasta salad is a versatile and refreshing dish made primarily from cooked pasta, chilled and mixed with various ingredients such as vegetables, herbs, cheeses, and dressings. It is typically served cold or at room temperature, making it a popular choice for picnics, potlucks, barbecues, and other casual gatherings.

This image is a close up of a classic pasta salad that has spiral noodles of different colors, black olives, cheese, tomatoes, and ham.

There are many recipes for Pasta salad from the classic pasta salad to a creamy pasta salad. There is a macaroni salad and a Greek Pasta salad. Some include olive oil, black olives, and red wine vinegar. There are loads of fresh veggies that you can include and the options are endless. You can opt for red bell pepper for a pop of color and a subtle sweetness or go with the traditional green.

My go-to pasta salad has to be this spaghetti pasta salad. It is a very easy pasta salad recipe and It utilizes lots of fresh veggies, red onions, black olives, summer squash, Parmesan cheese, and a zesty dressing. I love to cook the noodles al dente, which have just a little bite. Before you attend your next backyard BBQ this summer, check out this recipe. It is such an easy side dish to make.

Spaghetti Pasta Salad Recipe — Spaghetti Pasta Salad

What Meat Goes With Pasta Salad: My Go-To List

There are so many great options to choose from when it comes to what meat goes with pasta salad, but these are my favorite dishes to serve.

1. Steak

Imagine thinly sliced strips of juicy, medium-rare steak mingling with tender pasta and crisp vegetables. Steak brings a rich, savory flavor and satisfying texture to pasta salad, making it a luxurious option for meat lovers.

How Long does it take to cook a steak on the George Foreman Grill.

Marinate the steak in your favorite herbs and spices before grilling, then slice it thinly and toss it with pasta, arugula, cherry tomatoes, and a balsamic vinaigrette for a sophisticated twist on traditional pasta salad, or serve the steak as the main dish and the pasta salad as a side dish.

If you are looking for a quick way to cook a steak, check out this article I wrote on cooking a steak on a George Foreman grill.

2. Fried Chicken

Crispy, golden-brown fried chicken adds a comforting crunch and indulgent flavor to pasta salad. Whether you opt for boneless chicken tenders or crispy fried thighs, the contrast of textures between the crunchy chicken and tender pasta creates a delightful eating experience.

This is a image with southern fried chicken on the left and a brown background on the right with words written over it. The words say Southern Fried Chicken. Then Pairs well with Pasta salad.

Fried chicken is one of my favorite meats that goes with pasta salad in my opinion.

3. Grilled Pork Chops

Grilled pork chops bring a smoky sweetness and hearty protein to pasta salad, elevating it to new heights of flavor. Marinate the pork chops in a tangy barbecue sauce before grilling to infuse them with irresistible flavor, then slice them thinly and toss them with pasta, grilled corn, black beans, red onion, and cilantro for a Southwestern-inspired twist on pasta salad that's perfect for summer gatherings.

This is a image of a grilled pork chop that is sitting on a dark plate. just above the pork chop is grilled asparagus.

If you do not want an all-in-one dish, serve the grilled pork chops with the pasta salad as a side dish.

4. BBQ

In the South, when we mention a Barbecue, we are talking about BBQ pork. Anytime you attend backyard BBQs, there are two dishes you will see as sides, Potato salad, and Pasta salad. These two dishes just go hand in hand.

This is a close up image of southern style barbecue. This image is here because it is one one of the meats that I recommend to serve with Pasta Salad.

BBQ pulled pork adds a bold and smoky flavor that pairs well with pasta salad. If you love a vinegar-based sauce, the addition of Pasta salad works well with the acidity of the vinegar.

5. Baked Chicken

Tender, juicy baked chicken breasts or thighs make a delicious addition to pasta salad. The salad's light and fresh taste pairs wonderfully with the hearty flavor of baked chicken. If you're wondering what meat goes with pasta salad, baked chicken is an excellent choice.

Whole chicken breast recipe (Juicy Cajun Style) Featured Image

It's tender, and juicy, and adds a satisfying element to the meal. Whether you're hosting a family dinner or a casual get-together, this combination is sure to be a hit.

6. Meatloaf

Meatloaf may not be the first thing that comes to mind when thinking about pasta salad, but its savory flavor and hearty texture make it a surprisingly delicious addition. Pasta salad makes the perfect side dish for this meat.

This is a closeup image of meatloaf. Half of the meatloaf is sliced where you can see the texture and the ingredients in it.

Next time you are wondering what meat to serve with pasta salad, think about meatloaf!

7. Hamburgers

Grilled hamburgers are an excellent choice to serve with Pasta salad. Hamburgers and pasta salad make a great pair because they offer a satisfying balance of flavors and textures. The juicy, savory taste of hamburgers complements the light and refreshing qualities of pasta salad.

Plus, the versatility of both dishes allows for endless customization, making them a crowd-pleasing duo for any occasion. Whether you're enjoying a backyard cookout or a casual dinner, hamburgers and pasta salad are sure to satisfy everyone's cravings.

8. Hot dogs

Pasta salad and hot dogs are a match made in culinary heaven, each complementing the other in a symphony of flavors and textures that elevate any backyard BBQ or casual gathering. Hot dogs are a beloved cookout staple known for their savory flavor and satisfying simplicity.

this is a image of a man holding a plate. The plate has grilled hot dogs on it. Some are plain and some are in a bun. The man is wearing a blue shirt with a white apron on.

However, they can be quite rich and heavy on their own. Pairing them with pasta salad adds a refreshing element to the meal, balancing out the richness of the hot dogs with the lightness and freshness of the salad.

If you love a good hot dog and like to top it with chili, you should try this Southern Food Junkie Hot Dog Chili sauce recipe.

9. Grilled Chicken

Pasta salad and grilled chicken go great together! The pasta salad is light and refreshing, while the grilled chicken is savory and delicious. They balance each other out perfectly. So, if you're wondering what meat goes with pasta salad, grilled chicken is a top pick.

This is a image of two pieces of grilled chicken sitting on brown paper. Behind it is some dipping sauce that looks like ranch dressing. There is some green lettuce and some cherry red tomatoes in the background.

It's tender and juicy, and it adds a lot of flavor to the meal. Whether you're having a cookout or a casual dinner, this combo is sure to please everyone.

Conclusion

In conclusion, when it comes to pasta salad, the possibilities are endless. From steak to fried chicken, grilled pork chops to barbecue, baked chicken to meatloaf, and hamburgers to hotdogs, there's no shortage of creative and delicious meat options to explore.

So, the next time you're craving pasta salad, don't be afraid to think outside the box and experiment with unexpected meat pairings. Who knows? You may just discover a new favorite dish that's sure to delight your taste buds and impress your guests.

Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche Recipe

April 1, 2024 by Ronnie Williams 2 Comments

Hey there! So, imagine this: a mouthwatering Spinach Quiche Recipe that's not only delicious but also keto-friendly, and guess what? No crust needed! I'm talking about a flavorful, cheesy creation packed with nutritious spinach and all sorts of tasty keto-approved ingredients. It's perfect for breakfast, brunch, or even a quick dinner when you're on your keto journey. Trust me, once you try this Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche Recipe, you'll be hooked!

This image shows a slice of Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche on a white plate in the foreground. In the background you can see a baking dish full of this quiche with a slice taken out. There is a black and silver spatula sticking out of the baking dish.

It's easy to make, requires a few simple ingredients, is absolutely delicious, and fits perfectly into your keto lifestyle. So, what are you waiting for? Let's dive into this keto-friendly recipe together and savor every satisfying bite! Oh, and did I mention it's crustless?

This Easy Spinach Crustless Quiche is:

Easy low carb
Great for meal prep
Great for a Brunch recipe
Cheesy and Savory
Packed with Protein
Great for Breakfast, Lunch, or Dinner

After completely cooling, the quiche sets. You can cut out a section for yourself and dive in!

What is a Crustless Quiche

A crustless quiche is basically like a regular quiche but without the pastry crust. So, instead of having that flaky, buttery crust on the bottom and around the edges, you just have the yummy filling baked in a dish.

This is a image that shows a closeup shot of Spinach Crustless Quiche slice on a white plate. The slice is in the foreground. The slice is vibrant with colors of green from the Spinach and Yellowish orange from the Cheddar cheese. In the background you can see a baking dish that is out of focus on the back left hand side.

It's a great option if you're looking to cut back on carbs on a keto diet or if you just don't feel like dealing with making a crust. Plus, this low-carb quiche is super versatile—you can fill it with all kinds of tasty ingredients like veggies, cheese, meat, or whatever you like!

My mom has always made Quiches, whether it was broccoli and cheese or Spinach and cheese. I grew up eating it, and I love it. The beauty of this Crustless Quiche recipe is that you can add many other ingredients to suit your taste and nutritional needs. I am going to share the basic foundation, which only requires Cheddar cheese, Eggs, Spinach, Milk, Salt, and black pepper

Crustless Quiche vs. Frittata

I am not 100% sure if there is such a term as a Crustless Quiche. There are a few recipes out there, but usually when a Quiche doesn't have a crust, it is considered a Frittata, well, sort of. There are some similarities and differences. Let me explain.

The main difference between a crustless quiche and a frittata is that a quiche typically has a creamy, custard-like filling, while a frittata has a denser texture more akin to an omelet.

This image is a overhead shot of a slice of Crustless Spinach and Cheese Quiche sitting on a white plate. In the background you can see the rest of this dish in a clear baking casserole dish.

With a crustless quiche, you're still getting that creamy, almost pudding-like texture because it's typically made with eggs, heavy whipping cream (or whole milk), and other fillings baked together. It's like a savory pie without the crust.

On the other hand, a frittata is more like a thick, fluffy pancake loaded with all kinds of ingredients mixed right into the eggs. It's cooked on the stove and often finished under the broiler, making it quick and easy to whip up.

So, while they're both delicious ways to enjoy eggs and various fillings, the texture and cooking method are what set them apart.

What Does Crustless Spinach Quiche Taste Like

A crustless spinach quiche tastes like a savory, creamy delight. You've got the earthy flavor of spinach mixing in with the richness of eggs and cheese.

Depending on what else you throw in there, like onions, garlic, or maybe some herbs, you might get a little extra sweetness or zing. But overall, it's just a smooth, creamy texture that's super satisfying. And since there's no crust, all those yummy flavors stand out.

It's a light and wholesome meal that's perfect anytime!

This image is a closeup of a slice of Baked Crustless Spinach Quiche. The slice of Quiche is sitting on a a white plate that is out of focus. The only thing in focus is the front edge of the quiche which is a beautiful vibrant color of green spinach and cheddar cheese mixture.

Crustless Quiche Ingredients

Here's What You'll Need to make this Crustless Quiche recipe

Spinach-For this recipe, I am using frozen chopped spinach. If you prefer fresh spinach, you can use raw baby spinach, but make sure to chop it up first before using it.
Eggs and Whole milk- this creates the base for the custard for any quiche.
Sharp Cheddar Cheese- Use block cheddar cheese and not pre-shredded. The pre-shredded is coated and will not taste as good as cheese that you shred yourself.
Olive Oil- for sautéing the spinach
Salt
Black Pepper

See the recipe card at the end of the post for quantities

Equipment You'll Need

Baking Dish- I use this particular 10 x 8 Pyrex baking dish (Casserole dish) or you can use a Pie Plate (Pie dish).
Cast Iron Skillet or Frying pan- I love cooking in a cast iron skillet. The one I have is very old; I found it at a yard sale. This brand isn't even in business anymore. I have several other Lodge Cast Iron pans just like this one here.
Large Bowl- My favorite brand to use is the OXO Large Mixing Bowls. They are a high-quality product at reasonable prices. I use a lot of their items from their brand, as I find it is high quality.
Cheese Grater- I recommend this viral cheese grater that everyone online is talking about. I have one similar to it, but I prefer this one as it is smaller and comes in many colors.

Check out this post; here is a list of Kitchen Essentials tools that I recommend.

How to Make A Crustless Spinach Quiche

Step-by-step instructions

Step 1

Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and lightly grease a baking dish or pie pan.

This is a image of a person using avocado spray to coat a baking dish.

Step 2

Lay out and thaw the frozen spinach. Once it is thawed, place it in a colander to drain it. If you are using fresh spinach, wash it, then chop it up.

Step 3

Place the spinach in a cast iron skillet and sauté over medium heat. This will help evaporate some of the excess moisture in the Spinach. Allow the spinach to cool.

Step 4

To get 2 cups of shredded cheese, shred the block of Cheddar cheese and set aside.

Step 5

In a mixing bowl, add the large eggs, whole milk, salt, and black pepper. Whisk together until the yolks are broken up. Add in the Spinach and Cheddar cheese and mix until well blended.

This is a image showing a light blue colored bowl full of beaten eggs that will be used to make a quiche.

This image shows a light blue colored bowl that has a mixture of beaten eggs, spices, and milk that is being poured into a red mixing bowl that has Spinach in it. There is a whisk sticking on the edge of the bowl.

This image shows a black paper plate that is full of shredded cheddar cheese. The cheese is being poured into a red bowl that has a egg mixture and Spinach in it. There is a whisk sticking in the bowl ready to mix this mixture together to make a Crustless Spinach Quiche.

Step 6

Next, pour the egg mixture into the prepped baking dish or pie pan.

This image shows a red bowl that is full of a Spinach quiche mixture. The mixture is being poured into a glass baking dish such as a Pyrex dish.

Step 7

Bake in the oven for in the preheated oven for about 40 to 50 minutes, until the mixture has set.

Step 8

Remove from the oven and let the dish cool down before serving.

This is a image of a silver and black spatula cutting a slice of Spinach quiche out of a clear backing dish.

Variations

Other Variations include but are not limited to:

Cheese- you can mix and match cheese. I like sharp Cheddar, but feel free to add in cream cheese for a creamier base, Gruyère cheese for its richness, or Swiss cheese for its nutty and sweeter flavor profile.
Vegetables-The beauty of this dish is that you start with the base of eggs, milk, and cheese. Then you add what you like. Throw in some green onions. Feel free to add other variations of vegetables if you do not like Spinach.
Protein-There are many different protein options, from leftover Ham, to bacon to Sausage. All make great choices.
Spices- add in cayenne for some heat, garlic to up the savory profile, or rosemary.

Here is a list of optional recipe combinations:

Crustless Zucchini Quiche
Crustless Ham and Cheese Quiche
Crustless Mushroom Spinach Quiche
Spinach Feta Crustless Quiche
Broccoli Cheese Crustless Quiche
Salmon Crustless Quiche
Crustless Sausage Quiche
Bacon and Cheese Crustless Quiche
Crustless Cottage Cheese Quiche

Which one is your favorite? Keep an eye out for these future recipes.

Keto-Friendly Sides to serve Crustless Spinach Quiche with

Bacon Herb-Roasted Summer Squash
Cucumber salad
Roasted Butternut Squash (has some carbs but good carbs)
Bacon
Sausage
Tomato Avocado Salad
Roasted vegetables
Grilled Portobello Mushrooms
Simple green salad
Cheese Platter

Non-Keto Sides

Cheesy Southern Grits
Fried Potatoes and Onions
Fresh fruit
Pancakes
Roasted Sweet Potatoes

Storage Tips

This crustless quiche can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 to 4 days. To eat, simply remove a slice and reheat.

For longer-term storage, Crustless Quiche can be frozen. Make sure to place it in a freezer-safe container before freezing.

If you're looking for another easy recipe to prep ahead for the week, try my Easy Instant Pot Pot Roast with Black Beans. I originally made it for my work lunches, and one batch gave me five hearty meals with tender beef, black beans, potatoes, carrots, and celery.

FAQ's

Can you make crustless quiche ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare a crustless quiche ahead of time. It's a great option for meal prep or entertaining. Simply bake the quiche as directed, let it cool completely, then refrigerate it in an airtight container. When ready to serve, you can reheat individual slices in the microwave or oven.

Can I freeze a crustless spinach quiche?

Absolutely! Crustless quiche freezes well. Once it's cooled completely, wrap it tightly in plastic wrap or aluminum foil, or place it in an airtight container. Frozen quiche can be reheated directly from frozen in the oven or microwave. Just be sure to adjust the cooking time accordingly.

What can I use instead of milk to make this Spinach Crustless Quiche recipe?

You can substitute with heavy cream, half-and-half, yogurt, or sour cream. If you are looking for a non-dairy option, you can substitute almond milk or coconut milk in its place.

What if I want a crust but still need this recipe to be keto-friendly?

If you want to make a crust, a good option is to make one out of almond flour or coconut flour.

How do I prevent a crustless spinach quiche from becoming watery?

The secret to preventing the quiche from becoming watery is to sauté the vegetables before mixing the ingredients. Also, make sure to drain any excess moisture from any ingredients.

Can I use fresh spinach instead of frozen?

Yes, you can use fresh spinach instead of frozen. Just chop the spinach up and sauté it before using.

Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche

Prep Time: 15 minutes

Cook Time: 40 minutes

Total Time: 55 minutes

Try our Easy Keto Crustless Spinach Quiche! Packed with spinach and cheesy goodness, this dish is simple to make and perfect for meal prep. Just mix eggs, spinach, milk, cheese, and a few seasonings, then bake until it's golden and bubbly. It's satisfying, flavorful, and keto-friendly! Enjoy it hot or cold for a delicious start to your day.

No Ratings

Ingredients

6 large eggs
10 oz. package for frozen chopped spinach (You can substitute fresh Spinach, see notes for details)
1.5 cups of whole milk
2 cups of Sharp cheddar cheese. (see notes)
½ teaspoon of salt
½ teaspoon of black pepper

Instructions

1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and lightly grease a baking dish or pie pan.

2. Thaw the frozen spinach. Once it is thawed, place it in a colander to drain it. If you are using fresh spinach, wash it, then chop it up.

3. Place the spinach in a cast iron skillet and sauté over medium heat. This will help evaporate some of the excess moisture in the Spinach. Allow the spinach to cool.

4. Shred the block of Cheddar cheese and set aside.

5. In a mixing bowl, add the large eggs, whole milk, salt, and black pepper. Whisk together until the yolks are broken up. Add in the Spinach and Cheddar cheese and mix until well-blended.

6. Next, pour the egg mixture into the prepped baking dish or pie pan.

7. Bake in the oven for in the preheated oven for about 40 to 50 minutes until mixture has set.

8. Remove from the oven and let the dish cool down before serving.

Notes

For this recipe, I am using frozen chopped spinach. If you prefer fresh spinach, you can use raw baby spinach but make sure to chop it up first before using it.

For the cheese, it is best to use block cheese and then shred it yourself. It tastes much better. If you do not have it, you can use shredded cheese in the bag.

Nutrition Information:

Yield:

Serving Size:

1
Amount Per Serving: Calories: 263Total Fat: 19gSaturated Fat: 10gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 7gCholesterol: 227mgSodium: 541mgCarbohydrates: 5gFiber: 1gSugar: 3gProtein: 18g

25 Refreshing Iced Tea Recipes

March 30, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Quench your thirst and elevate your summer sipping experience with our curated collection of 25 refreshing iced tea recipes. From classic blends to innovative twists, these tantalizing concoctions are sure to keep you cool and refreshed during the hottest days of the year.

Whether you prefer fruity infusions, herbal delights, or zesty citrus blends, there's a perfect pitcher of iced tea waiting to be brewed for every palate. Join us as we explore an array of delightful flavors and creative combinations in this ultimate guide to summer refreshment.

25 Refreshing Iced Tea Recipes

I extensively searched the internet and collaborated with fellow bloggers to curate an exceptional collection of 25 Invigorating Iced Tea Recipes!

ball wide mouth canning jar full of iced southern sweet tea

How To Make The Perfect Southern Sweet Tea (Recipe)

Photo Credit: southernfoodjunkie.com

Being a native of South Carolina, I have drank Southern Sweet Tea all my life. I cannot remember a time when there was not a pitcher of sweet tea in the refrigerator. It is one of my favorite all-time drinks and that is why I am sharing how to make the perfect southern sweet tea recipe.

This image shows a short glass filled with a honey colored Arnold Palmer Iced Tea. The glass is sitting on two wooden coasters and it is garnished with a lemon slice and sprig of mint. There is a picture in the background full of this iced tea as well.

Lemonade Iced Tea (Arnold Palmer)

Photo Credit: www.sweetteaandthyme.com

This iced tea lemonade is a simple recipe and is loved by the whole family, no matter the variation. To really amp up and elevate this classic drink, we make a delicious lemon simple syrup to boost the lemonade and sweet tea, which can be traded for unsweetened iced tea.

This is the featured photo for a blog post on how to make peach iced tea.

How to Make Easy Peach Iced Tea

In this simple guide, we will walk you through the steps to craft a pitcher of Peach Iced Tea that captures the essence of the South. With the distinct aroma and taste of ripe peaches infused into each sip, this beverage is a perfect companion for lazy afternoons, backyard gatherings, or any moment you crave a cool and flavorful respite.

This image shows two ball jars full of Watermelon Iced Tea. Both jars are white and red swirled straws sticking out of them and a chevron pattern table cloth underneath them.

Watermelon Tea Recipe

Photo Credit: www.thecountrychiccottage.net

Are y’all ready for some great watermelon tea? Come dive into this unique summer recipe. I am using green tea for my version but you can pick and choose your favorite tea to add to this recipe. The great summer flavor comes from the watermelon! You will also want to follow along below as some of my friends have great summer recipes for you as well. Come on down for some summer fun inspiration.

This image is two slender glasses fill with a vibrant red Strawberry Iced Tea. The glasses both have Strawberries for Garnish and a spring of mint. There is also a Pitcher of this tea in the background, a sprig of mint, and a couple of lemons. There is also a brown wooden spoon in the foreground.

Southern Strawberry Iced Tea Recipe

Photo Credit: www.sweetteaandthyme.com

My summers have always stayed simple. I'm old school at heart, there's nothing better to me than sitting on my deck with a batch of strawberry iced tea, a mini charcuterie board for one, a fan, and a good book right before we get to those blistering hot summer days. It's bliss, y'all. There's nothing like home-brewed sweet tea in the summer months.

Miami Ice

Photo Credit: foodmeanderings.com

Recently we were at Milestones restaurant and my son ordered a Miami Ice drink (not to be confused with a Miami Vice). It's a refreshing non-alcoholic drink that's a combination of iced tea, pureed mango, and fresh mint. He loved it and I wasn't surprised because he's crazy about mango!

This image is a overhead quartering shot of two glasses of Raspberry Iced Tea. The glasses are garnished with raspberries and lemon slice on the rim. There is scattered Raspberries around on the table.

Raspberry Iced Tea Recipe

Photo Credit: momfoodie.com

Raspberry Iced Tea is a classic summer beverage. This refreshing iced tea recipe is easy to make as a family drink. Raspberry flavored ice tea is also a great non-alcoholic party drink.

This is a closeup image of two tall slender glasses filled with Hibiscus Lemonade. There is a metal straw in each glass and the drinks are garnished with lemons. The drink itself is a bright pink color.

Hibiscus Lemonade Recipe

Photo Credit: 24bite.com

Hibiscus is called “Jamaica” in Spanish. The tea is served across Mexico as “Agua de Jamaica”. I’ve added a new level by making the hibiscus tea into a lemonade blend.

Low FODMAP Iced White Tea With Mango

Photo Credit: www.fodmapeveryday.com

Our Low FODMAP Iced White Tea With Mango is simply chilled low FODMAP white tea, optionally sweetened, served with low FODMAP amounts of fresh, juicy mango. Like our recipe for Low FODMAP Iced Green Tea With Passionfruit, this one almost doesn’t need formal direction, but we want to make sure you get portions right for the white tea and mango

This is a closeup shot of a short glasses filled with Iced Mint Green Sun Tea. The glass is garnished with a sprig of mint and a lemon slice. There is also mint out of focused in the background and the glass is sitting on a wooden cutting board.

Mint Green Sun Tea (AIP Diet Green Tea)

Photo Credit: thehonestspoonful.com

This Mint Green Sun Tea is an AIP Diet green tea that’s a very refreshing and easy way to upgrade regular green tea.

Iced Strawberry Matcha Latte

Photo Credit: thehonestspoonful.com

This Iced Strawberry Matcha Latte is a delicious twist on your favorite drink to start your day. This recipe is essentially a matcha latte with pureed strawberries which add a hint of natural sweetness.

This image is two glasses of iced Chamomile Tea. There is also a picture of this iced tea in the background. There is a single leave of mint and a lemon slice for garnish on both glasses.

Soothing Chamomile Iced Tea with Mint

Photo Credit: www.atastefortravel.ca

If you’re looking for a drink that’s not only refreshing but is filled with healthy benefits, look no further than this Chamomile Iced Tea. Also known as te de manzanilla, this aromatic herbal tea, made with mint and lemon, is a cooling, calming drink that’s perfect for summer. You can enjoy a glass of caffeine-free Chamomile Iced Tea on its own, or with a meal, at any time of the day.

This image is a plastic starbucks cut that is full of iced peach green tea lemonade. There is an addtional cup out of focus to the left. Both cups have green straws sticking in them and lemon slices for garnish. There is a red apple to the right in the background and peaches and lemons slices around the cup on the table.

Iced Peach Green Tea Lemonade {Starbucks Copycat}

Photo Credit: wearenotmartha.com

Are you obsessed with the Iced Peach Green Tea Lemonade from Starbucks? It's so easy to make at home! You only need 3 ingredients with this copycat recipe and your drink will taste just like the real thing!

This is a image of two glasses of Iced Thai Tea. The glass in the foreground is out of focus and the one in the background is in focus. Both glasses have black and white swirled straws sticking out of them.

Thai Iced Tea (Thai Tea)

Photo Credit: theforkedspoon.com

Thai Iced Tea is a creamy and refreshing mildly spiced sweet tea made from Thai tea mix (or black tea), milk, and sugar. Popular in Southeast Asia and served in many Thai restaurants, learn how to make Thai tea at home with this easy-to-follow guide and recipe.

Strawberry Honey Hibiscus Iced Tea

Photo Credit: theforkedspoon.com

STRAWBERRY HONEY HIBISCUS ICED TEA is beautiful, sweet and energizing. Wildly popular thanks to unique health benefits and its appearance in Starbucks shops all over the world, this gorgeous iced tea is made with Strawberries, dried hibiscus flowers, and sweet honey, guaranteeing that you’ll be drinking this Strawberry Honey Hibiscus Iced Tea all summer long.

This is a over head shot of a glass of Pineapple matcha iced tea. There is a pineapple sitting to the left of the glass quartering away.

Iced Pineapple Matcha Drink (Starbucks Copycat) -

Photo Credit: www.goglutenfreely.com

Confession time. I have a matcha addiction. It’s my daily source of caffeine. Matcha powder is on auto-delivery at my house and is a perfect addition to smoothies, pancakes, crepes, cookies, and more. Needless to say, the first time I heard about the Starbucks Iced Pineapple Matcha Drink my first thought was… I need to try that!

Mango Iced Tea

Photo Credit: www.dinneratthezoo.com

This mango iced tea is a blend of black tea, mango nectar and honey with fresh fruit for garnish. A quick and easy drink that’s perfect for a hot day!

This image is of two tall slender glasses of Berry Hibiscus Iced Tea. Both glasses is full of ice and garnished with a strawberry and mint sprig. Both glasses have clear glass straws sticking out of them.

Berry Hibiscus Iced Tea Recipe (Caffeine-Free)

Photo Credit: mittengirl.com

Warm summer days call for a refreshing drink. The natural flavors of sweet berries, fresh citrus, and bright hibiscus come together in a delicious Berry Hibiscus Iced Tea that's the perfect afternoon refresher.

Green Tea Lemonade

Photo Credit: www.pipercooks.com

Green Tea Lemonade | Try this Starbucks copycat recipe for Iced Green Tea Lemonade. Make homemade lemonade with my easy lemonade recipe and then mix it with some brewed green tea. Add ice and serve it in a pretty cup with some mint leaves for a refreshing summer drink.

This is a image of a glass of instant pot iced tea. The glass is a wine glass full to the brim and garnished with a sprig of Rosemary.

Caffeine Free Lemon Iced Tea Recipe

Photo Credit: recipesfromapantry.com

Cool down with a glass of this revitalizing Lemon Iced Tea infused with honey and citrus notes for a refreshing drink that’s perfect for a hot summer day.

This image is three glasses of Ginger and Lemongrass Iced Tea. The glasses are round and are garnished with mint sprig. The front glass is sitting on a brown wooden cutting board.

Ginger and Lemongrass Iced Tea Recipe | Recipes From A Pantry

Photo Credit: recipesfromapantry.com

This iced tea has a mild flavor, which means you need to use mild tea as well. I use the caffeine-free rooibos but feel free to use other tea although you might need to start with fewer teabags. You can also add more or less lemongrass, ginger, and honey according to your preferences.

This image shows two glasses of peach hibiscus iced tea. The tea is garnished with slices of peaches and there is peaches on the table in the foreground and background. There is also a linen cloth in the foreground. The tea itself is a very bright, beautiful reddish pink color.

Peach Hibiscus Tea Recipe

Photo Credit: kitchenontheavenue.com

This Peach Hibiscus Tea is a delightful, naturally flavorful, and visually stunning drink that offers a delightful fusion of floral and fruity notes, making it a perfect choice for those seeking a refreshing and enjoyable drink to indulge in during warm weather or anytime a thirst-quenching treat is desired.

Prickly Pear Hibiscus Agua Fresca

Photo Credit: cookeatlivelove.com

Looking for a refreshing drink that’s the perfect combination of lightly sweet, tart, and fruity? Look no further than this prickly pear hibiscus fresca recipe — it delivers all this and more!

This is a picture of a glass of iced early gray tea with a purple and white swirled stray sticking out of the glass and a lemon slice on the edge of the glass. There is some lemons in the background as well.

Earl Grey Iced Tea

Photo Credit: www.sweetandsavorybyshinee.com

Bright, refreshing and citrusy, this earl grey iced tea is easy to customize and such a thirst-quencher for a crowd!

This is a picture of Mint and Linden Ice Tea in a Mason Jar.

Refreshing Mint and Lemon Infused Linden Tea on Ice

Photo Credit: sustainmycookinghabit.com

Try a refreshing herbal twist to your summer iced tea. This cold Linden tea, infused with mint and lemon and served on ice is a delicious and pretty beverage for the summer.

Conclusion

As we wrap up our journey through these 25 tantalizing iced tea recipes, we hope you've found inspiration to elevate your summer sipping. Whether you're lounging by the pool, hosting a backyard barbecue, or simply seeking a moment of refreshment, these delightful concoctions offer a flavorful escape from the heat. Cheers to endless summer days and the endless possibilities of iced tea

Easy Southern Fried Apples Recipe with Cinnamon

March 18, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

I thoroughly enjoy cooking Southern Fried Apples. There's an undeniable satisfaction in their combination of cinnamon, the sweetness of brown sugar, and the savory touch of butter. The process is incredibly simple, requiring minimal preparation. Come along as I reveal some helpful tips and tricks to make preparing this fried apples recipe both effortless and enjoyable.

This image is a very close shot of what fried apples looks like.

The Joy of Crafting Simple Southern Fried Apples

Although Southern Fried Apples is a Southern dish, this is one dish I do not remember growing up eating as a kid. It wasn't until I was married that I remember eating this dish. I can remember this dish being on menus at a few of my favorite Southern restaurants as a side dish. Similar to the Cracker Barrel Fried Apples that they serve.

I've always had a desire to replicate it, especially when we find ourselves with an excess of apples nearing their expiration. During such times, I desired to come up with a recipe that allows me to make the most of these apples before they spoil.

This image is a overhead shot of fried apples in a cast iron skillet with a serving spoon and a bowl of fried apples sitting beside it.

This is how the foundation for this recipe began to take shape, with me experimenting and fine-tuning the process of making Southern Fried Apples.

Since then I have made this recipe quite often through the years and have fine-tuned it. It is such an easy recipe to make and a great way to use up an abundance of apples, especially during apple season.

Why I Love Making this Cinnamon Fried Apple Dish

The delightful blend of warm cinnamon, brown sugar, and butter creates a perfect harmony for my taste buds. Crafting these sweet Southern Fried Apples is a breeze, making it a quick and easy side dish.

This versatile recipe can play a dual role, serving as either a side dish or a dessert, suitable for dinner, snack, or breakfast. For instance, pair it with pork chops as a savory side or elevate your breakfast by topping pancakes, hot buttermilk biscuits, or French toast with this delicious dish. Serve it on top of a big scoop of vanilla ice cream for dessert.

This is a image of southern fried apples on top of old fashioned pancakes.

Fried Apples Vs. Baked Cinnamon Apples

You may be wondering, what is the difference between baked cinnamon apples and fried apples? The simple answer is how they are cooked.

Both the Easy Baked Cinnamon and Sugar Apples and Southern Fried Apples are exceptionally simple and uncomplicated recipes. While Southern Fried Apples are cooked in a skillet on a stovetop, baked apples are cooked in a baking dish in the oven. Both approaches are refreshingly straightforward to execute.

If you want to know how to make our version of baked cinnamon apples, click the link above for our yummy recipe.

Delicious Side Dish or Dessert?

You might find yourself wondering, is this recipe intended as a side dish or dessert? Well, brace yourself for more confusion. In the South, it's common for many dishes to be categorized as sides or vegetables, which might not align with this classification in other parts of the United States.

For instance, this Old Fashioned Southern Sweet potato Casserole is sometimes served as a side dish.

When dining at a diner or a Southern-style restaurant specializing in country cooking, particularly those following the "meat and three" tradition, you'll notice side dishes often labeled as vegetables, even when they aren't conventionally vegetables. Examples include Southern Mac and Cheese or corn pudding.

A notable illustration is Cracker Barrel, where fried apples are served as a side dish rather than a dessert.

This is a image of fried apples in a bowl.

Easy Fried Apple Recipe: Family Fun in Every Bite

Heading to an apple orchard near where they grow the best apples can be a super fun outing for the whole family. Whether it's just a day trip or you make a weekend of it, picking apples is not just about enjoying the great outdoors – it's also a cool way to teach the kids where their food comes from.

WHAT YOU NEED TO MAKE THIS RECIPE

Let's cover the simple ingredients needed to make this recipe

Ingredients for Fried Apples Recipe

Apples: The best apples for baking are those that maintain their texture, flavor, and sweetness when cooked. We go into a bit more detail about the apple variety down below.
Ground Cinnamon: Cinnamon is a key ingredient and adds warmth to this dish as well as an aromatic fragrance.
Sugar: Brown sugar is a type of sugar characterized by its brown color and unique flavor. This is distinct from the simple sweetness of white sugar. This product is made from white granulated sugar combined with varying amounts of molasses. Maple syrup, honey, or agave nectar may be substituted for a more natural approach.
Butter: Butter adds a rich, creamy, and slightly nutty flavor to the baked apples. This complements the natural sweetness of the fruit. This buttery flavor enhances the overall taste of the dish, making it more delicious and satisfying.
Lemon Juice: Lemon juice adds a bright, tangy, and slightly citrusy flavor to the baked apples. This acidity provides a pleasing contrast to the natural sweetness of the apples. It also keeps them from oxidizing (turning brown).
Vanilla Extract: Vanilla extract contributes a warm, sweet, and floral flavor to the baked apples.
Sea Salt: Salt enhances the overall flavor of a dish by amplifying and balancing other tastes. A pinch of salt can help bring out the natural sweetness of the fruit. This makes the dish taste even sweeter without being cloying. It also complements the warmth of spices like cinnamon and the richness of ingredients like butter.
Cornstarch: Cornstarch will help tighten up (thicken the dish) The apples will release moisture, and this will create a thick sauce.

See the recipe card at the bottom for the amounts

Apple Variety

One of the most important decisions when making this recipe is the apple variety you will use. Many people like to use tart apples such as Granny Smith apples or Pink Lady.

Here are some of the best apples for baking:

Granny Smith: These green apples are known for their tartness and firm texture, which holds up well in baking. They add a nice contrast to sweet desserts.
Fuji: Fuji apples are sweet and crisp, making them a great choice for baking. They add a pleasant sweetness to desserts without becoming overly mushy.
Cortland: Cortland apples have a sweet-tart flavor and are slow to brown when sliced, making them ideal for apple slices in pies and other baked treats.
Pink Lady: Pink Lady apples are sweet and slightly tart with a firm texture. They hold their shape well in baking and add a nice flavor to pies and crisps.
Gala: While Gala apples are primarily known as eating apples, they can also be used in baking when you want a sweeter flavor profile. They work well in apple cakes and muffins.
Honey crisp: Honeycrisp apples are sweet and juicy, making them a popular choice for baking. They maintain their shape and add a pleasant sweetness to baked goods.
Jonagold: Jonagold apples are a hybrid of Jonathan and Golden Delicious apples. They have a sweet-tart flavor and hold their shape when baked, making them excellent for pies and crisps.
Braeburn: Braeburn apples have a balanced sweet-tart flavor and a firm texture, making them suitable for various baked goods like pies, tarts, and crisps.

Note: Remember that the best apples for baking can vary depending on personal preference and the specific dish you're making. Mixing different apple varieties can also create a unique flavor and texture in your baked goods. Experimentation is encouraged to find the perfect apple for your favorite recipes.

Equipment You'll Need

Having covered the different types of apples, let's now discuss the necessary equipment.

Mixing Bowl
Cutting Board
Wooden Spoon or Mixing Spoon
Measuring Spoon
Large Skillet- I prefer to use a large cast iron skillet when making this dish. The reason is that cast iron has even heating, which creates uniform cooking. It also has excellent heat retention. I believe cast iron enhances the flavor of the dishes you cook due to the cast iron itself and the seasoning of the pan. Cast iron is also very versatile, meaning you could cook this dish over the campfire in a cast iron pan if you prefer; you could cook it in the oven, or on any type of burner or stovetop.

Note: Check out our Kitchen Essentials Page for recommended brands of equipment you will need.

Now let me say that if you do not have a Large Cast Iron skillet, do not fret, any large durable skillet or frying pan will do. If you have a stainless steel or a non-stick skillet, they will work fine.

Apple Peeler-For years I have used this apple peeler to peel my apples and other hard fruit. At some point, the company has changed names, but this is the exact one that I have. It works wonderfully, and it does a quick job of peeling when you have a lot of fruit. When our kids were younger, I bought this peeler to peel fruit to make baby food for them, and then I canned it.

This is a image showing a Victorio Apple Peeler in the process of peeling an apple.

I have used it for many years now, and it has held up to the test of time. It is used almost weekly in our house.

If you do not have one of these, a hand peeler or simply a paring knife will work; it just takes a little more time to do it.

How To Make Southern Fried Apples Recipe

Step-by-step instructions

Wash and peel the apples (Optional) with a sharp knife, vegetable peeler, or apple peeler.

Core the apples and cut the apples into slices.

This image shows step one of coring an apple. — Core the apples

This image shows slicing apples that have just been peeled. — Then slice them

This is step two of corning apples. — This coring tool comes in handy

In a large mixing bowl, combine the brown sugar, ground cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt.

This image shows adding brown sugar to a bowl to make fried apples. — Brown sugar

This image shows adding Cinnamon, Cornstarch, and salt to Brown Sugar in a bowl. — Cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt

This image shows mixing all the ingredients together to make Southern Fried Apples. — Mix until well incorporated

In a small microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter. Add in the vanilla extract and mix the two.

This image shows adding vanilla extract to melted butter.

Toss apples with a little bit of lemon juice, then place the apples in the skillet.
Pour melted butter-vanilla extract over the apples to coat them.

This is a image of adding peeled and sliced apples to a skillet.

This is a image of pouring melted butter and vanilla extract over top of apples in a cast iron skillet.

Sprinkle the cinnamon-sugar mixture evenly over the apples.
Cut the burner to medium heat to medium-low heat.
Use the wooden spoon to continuously stir the apples until they are tender.

This image shows how to stir the apples in a cast iron skillet to keep them from burning.

Watch Our Video on how to Make Southern Fried Apples

Variations

This recipe can be baked in the oven in a cast iron skillet or a baking dish.

What to Serve Fried Apples With

Pork Chops or Roast Pork: The sweet and savory flavors of Southern Fried Apples pair exceptionally well with pork dishes.
Biscuits or Cornbread: Serve the fried apples alongside biscuits or cornbread for a comforting and delicious combination.
Pancakes or Waffles: Elevate your breakfast by topping pancakes or waffles with a generous serving of Southern Fried Apples.
Vanilla Ice Cream: Turn the fried apples into a delightful dessert by serving them warm over a scoop of vanilla ice cream.
French Toast: Enhance the flavor of your French toast by adding a layer of Southern Fried Apples on top.
Grilled or Baked Chicken: The sweetness of the apples can balance the savory notes of grilled chicken, creating a tasty contrast.
Yogurt Parfait: Layer the fried apples with yogurt and granola for a delicious and wholesome parfait.
Cheese Plate: Use the fried apples as a sweet component on a cheese platter, offering a contrast to the savory cheeses.

FAQ's

Can you freeze fried apples?

Technically, you can freeze them. In my opinion, I would not. The texture will be very mushy and not appealing once they are thawed and reheated.

How do you store this recipe?

Store the cooked apples in an airtight container. Place in the refrigerator for 3-5 days. When ready to eat, dip out a small portion in a microwave-safe bowl and reheat.

How long does it take to make Southern Fried Apples?

Southern Fried Apples are very quick and easy to make, usually taking about 15-20 minutes from start to finish to make.

Is this recipe suitable for vegetarians?

Yes. This recipe is vegetarian-friendly as it is primarily apples, cinnamon, brown sugar, and butter.

Can I make this recipe in advance?

While these can be made in advance, they are best made and eaten the same day that you make them.

Can I adjust the sweetness of the dish?

Yes, feel free to adjust the sugar amount to suit your preferences.

What type of pan is best for making this recipe?

I prefer to use a cast iron skillet with high sides. The high sides work great because you will be stirring this dish a lot, and there will be a lot of apples in it. The high sides will keep the juiciest contained and the apples from falling out.

Let's Get Food Junked!

This is one of my favorite apple recipes, and I love to know how this Easy Southern Fried Apples Recipe turns out for you. Leave me a comment below! I'd love to hear from you!

Easy Southern Fried Apples Recipe with Cinnamon

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Cook Time: 10 minutes

Total Time: 20 minutes

Make these super easy Southern Fried Apples by tossing apples with cinnamon, brown sugar, and butter. Quick and delicious, they work as a side or dessert

5.0 Stars (1 Review)

Ingredients

6-7 Large Apples
1 ½ teaspoons of ground cinnamon
½ cup brown sugar
4 tablespoons of melted butter
1 teaspoon of vanilla extract
¼ teaspoon of sea salt
½ teaspoon of cornstarch

Instructions

Wash and peel the apples (optional) with a sharp knife, vegetable peeler, or apple peeler.
Core the apples and cut the apples in slices. The Apple Peeler works great for this step.
In a large mixing bowl, combine the brown sugar, ground cinnamon, cornstarch, and salt.
In a small microwave-safe bowl, melt the butter. Add in the vanilla extract and mix the two.
Toss apples with a little bit of lemon juice then place the apples in the skillet.
Pour melted butter-vanilla extract over the apples to coat them.
Sprinkle the cinnamon-sugar mixture evenly over the apples.
Cut the burner onto medium heat to medium-low heat.
Use the wooden spoon to continuously stir the apples until you have tender apples or the texture that you desire.

Notes

If you want to leave the peelings on the apples you can. Some folks leave them for texture, some do not like them on their own. It is up to you.

Easy Southern Tuna Salad Recipe with Egg

February 20, 2024 by Ronnie Williams 4 Comments

Wait until you try this super simple-to-make Southern Tuna salad recipe with egg. It combines the perfect blend of flavors and ingredients. A delightful combination of Southern charm and culinary excellence awaits as we guide you through crafting this easy and delicious dish.

This image shows a completed tuna salad sandwich with chips.

What is Southern Tuna Salad?

Southern Tuna Salad is a salad that consists of tuna mixed with mayonnaise. The tuna can be bought fresh and then cooked or you can use a can of tuna, which most people do nowadays.

A variety of other ingredients are often added to this salad such as sweet relish or dill relish, red onion, Yellow or Dijon mustard, lemon juice, fresh celery, and hard-boiled eggs. We will cover what we love to add to this simple tuna salad recipe down below.

Like many dishes that came out of the 19th century, time were hard and people used everything they had to get by. This southern-style tuna salad recipe is no different. Just like egg salad, ham salad, or chicken salad, these dishes were cheap to make, filling, lots of protein, and used up leftover scraps.

Versatility

This classic Southern Tuna Salad recipe can be eaten in a variety of ways such as on a bed of lettuce, with crackers, or you can put it between two slices of bread with a side of fries or potato chips. When added to bread, it makes the best-tasting tuna salad sandwiches you have ever eaten!

Another great way to serve this classic recipe is a tuna melt sandwich on sourdough bread. Talk about mouth-watering.

This Recipe is Inspired by Eating Tuna Sandwiches as a Kid

Fond memories of my childhood involve my mom crafting tuna salad with eggs as a frequent, economical, and speedy meal option. She often paired it with her renowned Southern Egg Salad sandwiches.

Today, I've elevated her cherished family recipe by adding a touch of flair with a secret ingredient. There is nothing quite as fond as childhood memories of eating a good tuna sandwich as a kid.

Why you'll love this Traditional Tuna Salad Recipe

Family-Friendly: Loved by all ages, this Southern-inspired dish is a family-friendly recipe that brings everyone to the table.
Easy Preparation: With straightforward steps, this recipe is accessible for all skill levels, making it a hassle-free option for any meal.
Versatility: Whether for lunch, dinner, or a delightful snack, this Southern Tuna Salad with Egg is a versatile choice that suits various occasions.
Protein-Packed: Packed with protein from tuna and eggs, this dish is a nutritious option that keeps you energized and satisfied.
Quick Meal Solution: Perfect for those busy days when you need a quick and delicious meal without compromising on taste or nutrition.

Recipe Highlights

Tuna salad has a distinct taste characterized by a combination of flavors from its key ingredients. It is savory, creamy, fresh, crunchy, with a mild tang. The specific taste may vary based on individual preferences and variations in the recipe, but tuna salad is generally known for its versatility and ability to be customized to suit different palates.

By incorporating the distinctive tanginess of Dukes Mayo, chopped dill pickles, and the delightful texture of chopped eggs, I've infused a true Southern flair into this recipe. It's this unique combination that led me to affectionately dub it 'Southern Tuna Salad,' capturing the essence of both tradition and innovation in every flavorful bite.

WHAT YOU NEED TO MAKE THIS RECIPE

To craft this perfect recipe, gather a handful of uncomplicated ingredients and basic kitchen tools. Here's a quick rundown for your convenience.

Ingredients

Canned Tuna Fish - Albacore tuna or Chuck Light both work great. Get water-packed instead of oil-packed though.
Hard-boiled egg- Similar to potato salad, the addition of chopped eggs imparts a Southern touch to this dish, enhancing both its texture and flavor.
Dill pickles or dill pickle relish
Mayonnaise- I prefer Dukes but if you do not or can not find it, you can use your preface.
Yellow mustard
Chopped celery- gives a crunchy texture
Black pepper
Old Bay Seasoning- for extra flavor

See the recipe card at the bottom for the full recipe and quantities.

Equipment you'll need

Large mixing bowl
Can opener
Sharp Knife
Mixing spoon or spatula
Cutting board

Note: See our Kitchen Essentials Page for products that I recommend buying for the equipment you'll.

HOW TO MAKE Southern Tuna Salad Recipe with Egg

Step-by-step Instructions

Preparation

Place the egg in a small stock pot and cover it with water.
Bring to a boil, then reduce the heat and simmer for 10 to 12 minutes.
Remove the egg, then let it cool. Peel and then chop the egg into small pieces.
Open and drain the tuna using a strainer or colander.
Chop celery into small pieces.
Chop pickles into small pieces

Make Dressing

Add mayonnaise, mustard, black pepper, Old Bay, and dill pickles in a medium or large mixing bowl.
Mix until the seasonings are well combined.

Mixing

Add tuna, chopped eggs, and celery to the bowl and mix until the creamy dressing has coated all the ingredients and everything is well combined.

Make-ahead options

To save time, boil your eggs ahead of time and refrigerate them until you are ready to make the tuna salad.

Substitutions

Sweet Pickle relish if you prefer sweet over dill.
Red onion, green onions, or sweet onion- personal preference on which one to use. The red adds more bite and color. Green adds color and a mild flavor. The sweet adds a milder flavor and slight sweetness.
Dijon mustard
Salt- Exercise caution with the salt, considering the inherent sodium content in canned tuna, Old Bay seasoning, dill pickles, and yellow mustard.
Greek Yogurt-You can substitute Greek yogurt for the mayo.
Lemon Juice

Best Served With

Storage Tips

This classic tuna salad can be stored in an airtight container for 3-5 days in the refrigerator.

FAQ's

Can you freeze tuna salad?

Yes! Place the tuna salad in a freezer-safe container or a freezer-safe zip-lock bag. It will be good for up to 3 months. Just note that the texture may change. I love these Souper Cubes to freeze dishes such as tuna salad.

What makes a tuna salad "Southern"?

The Southern tuna salad recipe often incorporates regional flavors and ingredients, such as Duke's Mayo, which adds a distinct creaminess. Eggs and pickles are another ingredient that disguises tuna salad. It may also include traditional Southern seasonings, creating a delightful fusion of Southern charm in a classic dish.

Are there alternatives to Duke Mayo in the recipe?

Yes, you can substitute Duke's Mayo with any mayonnaise of your choice. Greek yogurt or sour cream can also be used for a tangy twist.

What sides pair well with Southern Tuna Salad?

Southern Tuna Salad complements a variety of sides, such as crackers, sliced baguettes, or as a filling for sandwiches. It also pairs well with a side salad or fresh vegetable sticks for a complete and satisfying meal.

Can I make this recipe without eggs for a vegetarian option?

Certainly! Simply omit the eggs to create a vegetarian version of the Southern Tuna Salad. You can enhance the texture with additional vegetables or plant-based ingredients.

Easy Southern Tuna Salad Recipe with Egg

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Cook Time: 10 minutes

Total Time: 20 minutes

Explore a delightful fusion of flavors in our Easy Southern Tuna Salad with Egg recipe. A quick and satisfying dish, blending tuna, eggs, and Southern charm for a tasty twist on a classic favorite.

5.0 Stars (1 Review)

Ingredients

2- (5 ounce) cans or packets of tuna in water. Drained.
1- hard boiled Egg
¼- cup of Mayonnaise
1- teaspoon of Yellow Mustard
1- stalk of celery chopped fine
1- tablespoon of chopped dill pickle (or dill pickler relish)
¼- teaspoon Old Bay Seasoning
¼- teaspoon of black pepper

Instructions

Preparation

Place the egg in a small stock pot and cover it with water.
Bring water to a boil, then reduce the heat to a simmer for 10 to 12 minutes.
Remove the egg, and let cool. Peel and then chop the eggs.
Open and drain the tuna.
Chop Celery stalk up into small pieces.
Chop pickles up into small pieces.

Make Dressing

Add mayonnaise, mustard, Old Bay, black pepper, and dill pickles in a medium or large mixing bowl.
Mix ingredients until well combined.

Mixing all ingredients

Add tuna, chopped eggs, and celery to the large bowl and mix until the creamy dressing has coated all the ingredients and everything is well combined.

Notes

Optional: Salt (I would taste before adding salt as Old Bay has salt, the dill pickles have salt, and the celery does as well)

Traditional South Carolina Food: 15 Foods SC is known For

February 6, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

South Carolina is a state steeped in rich history and diverse cultural influences. It boasts a culinary landscape that reflects its unique heritage. From the Lowcountry to the Upstate. South Carolina is celebrated for its traditional foods that have stood the test of time in the American South.

This journey through the Palmetto State unveils a tapestry of flavors, where Southern comfort meets coastal sophistication. From iconic dishes rooted in Gullah traditions to barbecue that sparks friendly rivalries. South Carolina's culinary offerings showcase the state's commitment to preserving its culinary heritage while embracing the modern twists that make its food scene truly one-of-a-kind.

Join us as we explore the 15 traditional South Carolina foods that define the culinary identity of South Carolina.

Importance of Traditional South Carolina Food

Traditional foods play a vital role in shaping the cultural identity of South Carolina. This is a testament to the state's rich history and diverse influences. These culinary traditions are deeply rooted in the cultural tapestry, reflecting the agricultural practices, historical connections, and local ingredients. The fusion of various ethnicities that have contributed to South Carolina's unique food landscape.

Beyond mere sustenance, Southern food dishes like Shrimp and Grits, She-crab Soup, and Hoppin' John embody the soul of the state. This connects generations through shared flavors and familial rituals.

As South Carolinians gather around tables laden with the aromas of Lowcountry cuisine, they not only indulge in delicious bites but also engage in a social gathering of heritage. This preserving and passing down the recipes is what defines the essence of South Carolina culture.

1. Chicken Bog

Growing up in South Carolina, you learn about a lot of rice dishes. This particular one is a local favorite for most South Carolinians and a family favorite of ours.

What Is Chicken Bog

Chicken Bog is a really simple dish but has lots of flavors. It combines chicken, smoked sausage, and white rice. That is pretty much the base for it. From there you can change it up however you see fit.

Southern Chicken Bog Recipe (A Traditional South Carolina Dish)

Chicken bog gets its name from the boggy texture of the dish. This dish is a chicken and rice dish with smoked sausage added in, but the rice is starchy in the way it is cooked.

As with any regional dish, Chicken bog has variations and different names. Some parts of the state call this dish Chicken Perlo or chicken pilau. Some cook it in different ways with different ingredients.

The history of this dish has its roots in the South Carolina Low Country, where most of the rice dishes of the state originated. Some even say that the name comes from the bogs of the low country. That is up for debate though as no one knows the history behind the name. Either way, this is one of my favorite South Carolina Traditional foods.

2. Shrimp & Grits

Shrimp and grits is a traditional South Carolina Food. This delightful combination of tender shrimp and creamy, cheesy, and buttery grits has gained popularity far beyond its regional roots. It is now a beloved favorite across the United States.

The dish typically consists of shrimp served over a bed of creamy, stone-ground grits. The grits are often seasoned and cooked with butter or cheese. This provides a rich and savory base for the succulent shrimp.

The shrimp are typically sautéed with a variety of seasonings, which may include garlic, onions, and spices. This creates a flavorful and aromatic topping for the grits. Additional ingredients such as bacon, sausage, or ham are sometimes included to add depth to the dish.

Shrimp and Grits is celebrated for its harmonious blend of textures and flavors, combining the creamy and comforting grits with the savory and slightly sweet taste of the shrimp. It is often served in both casual and upscale dining establishments.

3. Low Country Boil

A low Country boil (also known as Frogmore Stew in South Carolina) is a traditional dish that has been enjoyed by South Carolinians for ages. It combines fresh shrimp, sweet corn, red potatoes, and smoked sausage. Low Country Boil is a perfect all-in-one dish that is sure to be a hit at your next party. This dish is a Traditional South Carolina food that is a classic Southern recipe that you are sure to enjoy!

How to make a Traditional South Carolina Dish Called Low Country Boil.

Old Bay Seasoning is used to season the dish. Some folks also add blue crab to their dish. You can add or take away what you like and still have an awesome meal.

Low Country Boil goes by a few other names such as Shrimp Boil, Beaufort Boil, Beaufort Stew, Charleston Stew, Seafood Boil, and even Frogmore Stew.

History of Low Country Boil

A low Country boil is said to have originated in Frogmore, South Carolina. Frogmore is a small town that is located on the South Carolina coast in a tiny town called St. Helena Island in Beaufort County. Equally important, this area is home to the Gullah Culture which was part of the first slaves sent here to the US from West Africa.

This sad part of US history is where many of the Southern dishes that we know and love today came from.

Closeup of the low country boil coming out of the pot.

A Lowcountry Boil is meant to be enjoyed as a gathering meal. Parties, family reunions, weddings, family gatherings, and other such events serve a Low Country Boil. This is because it feeds a large crowd and is an epic one-pot meal.

Once cooked, the stew is drained and then poured out on a long table. Sometimes the table is covered in brown paper, aluminum foil, and even newspaper.

4. Hoppin' John

Hoppin' John, born in the vibrant Gullah community of South Carolina's Lowcountry, harmoniously blends black-eyed peas, rice, and a pork element, with seasoning options tailored to personal preferences. This rendition features a delightful medley of onions, bell peppers, garlic, bacon, salt, and pepper.

For an extra burst of flavor and color, some aficionados opt to incorporate a hint of tomato paste. If you fancy, consider enhancing the aromatic profile with thyme and a bay leaf. Give my take on Hoppin' John a whirl, and I trust you'll relish this hearty, Southern classic.

5. Boiled Peanuts

Boiled peanuts are a super popular snack that is enjoyed by many Southerners. You can usually find them at roadside stands, many convenience stores or gas stations, or even the local grocery store. As with many of the traditions and foods that are popular in the South, peanuts were first brought here with the slave trades from Africa to the United States.

Quick and Easy Instant Pot Boiled Peanuts recipe.

Boiled Peanuts are thought to have originated to be an original South Carolina food, where is it listed as the South Carolina State snack food. They also were called Goober peas as a nickname.

The first ever recipe for boiled peanuts was published in 1899 and was by a South Carolina lady by the name of Almeda Lambert (National Peanut Board, 2022).

A Fall time snack

Boiled peanuts are enjoyed year-round, but their popularity increases as summer fades into fall. As the South turns its eyes to football season, this snack raises its salty head on each game day. They are a true Southern delicacy.

They can be enjoyed with just plain salt or you can add seasonings to them as well. One popular way to season them is with Cajun seasoning or creole seasoning. Some people will add in a little vinegar as well.

One of my favorite ways I have ever had them was boiled with ham hocks and vinegar. That was superb! Feel free to add in your favorite seasonings.

6. Catfish Stew

Considered by many as a South Carolina Traditional dish, Catfish stew combines tomatoes, bacon, potatoes, and Catfish filets to make a hearty and filling stew. Catfish stew was a staple along the banks of many fish camps back in the early days.

Catfish stew may go by a few different names such as South Carolina Catfish Stew, Charleston Catfish Stew, Lowcountry Catfish Stew, and Carolina Catfish Stew. So if you are looking the name up, just know it goes by different names sometimes.

Catfish Stew cooking in a Cast Iron Dutch Oven.

Once cooked, the catfish breaks apart during the cooking process. You don’t see much of it once it has cooked down to the consistency that I prefer. This is what makes a great southern catfish stew that is sure to please your taste buds!

In the southern lakes, the plentiful catfish, a true delicacy in the region, take center stage. While many may associate catfish with the classic Southern style of being fried to golden brown perfection, there's more than one way to savor these delectable creatures. Enter Catfish Stew, an alternative that, once experienced, is bound to win your taste buds over.

7. Hush Puppies

The history of the hush puppy is deeply rooted in Southern culinary traditions, with its origins traced back to the United States, particularly South Carolina. The exact origin story is a bit elusive, but a few popular theories exist.

One of the many theories places the invention of the Hush Puppy on the banks of the Edisto River right here in South Carolina. According to Robertfmoss.com, Hush Puppies were originally called Red Horse bread.

It was common for camps to be set up in the South on the banks of the river. Here men would fish, then cook the fish. Their families would come to eat at the camp. This is where the term "Fish camps" came from, as you will see at many fried fish eateries throughout the South.

The name of the hush puppy, which was originally called Red Horse bread, was called this because it was served alongside a popular species of fish at the time called a Red Horse.

Romeo Govan was an African American man who was known for his fish fries, and this was a side that he served along with the fish. Red Horse Bread was the name he gave it. He simply called it Red Horse Bread because he served it with Red Horse fish.

8. Barbecue

Few foods in the United States spark as much debate as BBQ. Across the South, each state boasts its distinct BBQ style and sauce, creating a flavorful tapestry of regional traditions.

Some states, such as South Carolina and North Carolina, are even divided on chopped barbecue versus pulled barbecue and sauce style as well. Every proclamation of the finest BBQ highlights the subjectivity of food. Like beauty in the eye of the beholder, what's delicious depends on the taste buds of the one savoring it.

What Does South Carolina Mean by Barbecue

There is research that shows that South Carolina was the first state to barbecue. This makes SC the birthplace of Barbecue. According to Destination-BBQ, what makes BBQ is the method by which it is cooked, low and slow, and the marinade of smoke. If you have no smoke, you have no BBQ.

I should interject here that what Southerners and Northerners call BBQ is different. One uses it as a noun, and the other as a verb.

Here is what I mean. In the North, BBQ refers to an event or social gathering. Here In the South, especially South Carolina, when we say BBQ we are specifically speaking about smoking Pork low and slow.

In short, pigs were brought to the coastal regions of South Carolina by Spanish invaders. Native Americans were already cooking food low, slow, and over a bed of coals. Again, according to Destinations-bbq, "With many of the other origin myths dispelled and a clear case drawn for the marriage of the Native American cooking technique and the Spanish introduction of the pig, it is fairly certain that the first real barbecue took place here in South Carolina."

9. Benne Wafer

Benne wafers have a history deeply rooted in the Lowcountry of South Carolina. Their origins trace back to the Gullah-Geechee culture. "Benne" is a West African word for sesame, and it reflects the primary ingredient in these thin, crispy cookies. Enslaved West Africans brought the tradition of using sesame seeds to the southern United States, and over time, benne wafers emerged as a distinctive culinary creation.

Benne Wafers | Photo from Amazon (Olde Colony Bakery)

The cookies gained popularity in Charleston, South Carolina, where African culinary influences melded with European baking techniques. The wafers became a cherished part of the local food culture, often prepared for celebrations and special occasions. Benne wafers are known for their sweet, nutty flavor and delicate texture.

In Charleston, there's a company, Olde Colony Bakery, still crafting Benne Wafers today. These tasty treats are a local favorite, and you can order them online to savor the Southern goodness.

10. She-Crab Soup

She-crab soup is a quintessential dish hailing from the Lowcountry of South Carolina, celebrated for its rich flavors and coastal charm. The soup's main star is the blue crab, particularly the female crab known as the "she-crab."

With its distinctive blend of creamy broth, lump Blue crab meat, and a hint of sherry, she-crab soup offers a delectable experience that captures the essence of Southern hospitality. Originating in Charleston, this soup has become a symbol of the region's culinary heritage, often served at elegant gatherings and esteemed restaurants.

Whether enjoyed on a chilly evening or as a culinary tribute to the bounties of the Atlantic, she-crab soup stands as a savory testament to the unique and flavorful traditions of South Carolina.

11. Oyster Roast

The history of the oyster roast traces back to coastal communities in the Southern United States, particularly in South Carolina's Lowcountry. Descendants of West African slaves, the Gullah-Geechee people, played a crucial role in shaping this tradition. Oyster roasts were informal gatherings held outdoors, where oysters were roasted on grills over open flames, creating a unique and flavorful cooking method.

Today, these roasts are communal events, fostering social bonds as participants gather to shuck and savor the briny, succulent oysters. The tradition has become a cherished celebration of local seafood and community in coastal regions throughout the South.

Once the oysters are roasted, they are poured out on a table for people to gather around and shuck while they eat them. The oyster meat is often placed on a saltine cracker and then topped with hot sauce, Cocktail sauce, or Horseradish sauce.

12. Pimento Cheese

Pimento cheese has a flavorful history deeply rooted in the Southern United States, with origins that can be traced back to the early 20th century. The combination of cheese, mayonnaise, and chopped pimentos (sweet red peppers) became a beloved staple in Southern households, often considered a comfort food.

Palmetto Cheese — Creamy, Cheesy, Palmetto cheese

The exact origins of pimento cheese are a bit elusive, but it gained popularity in the early 20th century when mass-produced food products became more widely available. Pimento cheese offered a convenient and affordable way to add flavor and versatility to meals, and it quickly became a regional favorite.

If you want to make your own, try my Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon. It takes the classic Southern spread and adds smoky Gouda and bacon for an easy appetizer that's great with crackers or toasted bread.

Making Pimento cheese homemade is best, but if you want to try a great commercially made pimento cheese, check out Palmetto Cheese. It is made right here in the Palmetto State.

Pimento cheese became a symbol of Southern hospitality and a popular dish at social gatherings, picnics, and church events. It also found its way into upscale Southern cuisine, with chefs incorporating it into creative recipes. You will even see it in big events such as the Masters Golf Tournament in April as well.

13. Peach Cobbler

South Carolina has a longstanding and sweet association with peaches, a history that dates back to the late 19th century. The state's climate, particularly in the upstate regions, proved to be ideal for cultivating this juicy and flavorful fruit.

Although its neighboring state, Georgia, is known as the "Peach State", SC produces and exports more peaches than Georgia, coming in nationally only to California.

History of Peach Cobbler

One of the most iconic peach dishes from the South is the Peach Cobbler. Peach cobbler, a classic Southern dessert, has roots that can be traced back to early American history. The dish evolved as European settlers adapted traditional fruit-based desserts to the ingredients available in the New World.

The word "cobbler" itself is thought to originate from the British term "cobeler," referring to a person who mends shoes. The name likely stuck because the biscuit or pastry topping resembles a cobbled street.

As settlers moved westward in the 19th century, they brought their culinary traditions with them, incorporating locally available fruits into their desserts. Peaches, abundant in the Southern United States, became a popular choice for cobblers.

While peach cobbler is not exclusively from South Carolina, the state, with its favorable climate for peach cultivation, has certainly contributed to the popularity of this classic Southern dessert.

14. Okra Soup

While the history of okra soup specifically in South Carolina might not be extensively documented, the use of okra in Southern cuisine, including the state of South Carolina, has deep historical roots. The presence of okra in Southern cooking can be traced back to the African diaspora and the culinary traditions of enslaved Africans who brought this versatile vegetable to the Southern United States.

In South Carolina, where Gullah-Geechee communities preserved and adapted West African culinary practices, okra became a fundamental ingredient in various dishes, including soups and stews. The Gullah people, who resided in the Lowcountry regions of South Carolina, made significant contributions to the region's unique cuisine, incorporating ingredients like okra into their recipes.

15. Sweet Tea

Being a native of South Carolina, I have drunk Southern Sweet Tea all my life. I cannot remember a time when there was not a pitcher of sweet tea in the refrigerator. It is one of my favorite all-time drinks, and that is why I am sharing how to make the perfect southern sweet tea recipe.

Birthplace of Sweet Tea

The birthplace of sweet tea is often attributed to the Southern United States, particularly the region known as the "Lowcountry," which includes states such as South Carolina and Georgia. While sweetened iced tea likely existed in various forms before the 19th century, the specific term "sweet tea" and its association with the South became prominent in the early 20th century.

South Carolina Had the First Tea Plantations

As stated before, I was born and raised in South Carolina. Some of the very first tea plantations were right here in the Palmetto State. Not only was South Carolina the first place to plant and raise tea, but it is also thought to have been the only state to grow tea commercially.

Image of my grandmas tea pitcher. — Stoneware Tea Pitcher that's been in my family for generations

One popular origin story points to the 1904 World's Fair in St. Louis, where iced tea with added sugar was showcased by tea plantation owner Richard Blechynden from Summerville, South Carolina. Visitors to the fair enjoyed the refreshing beverage, and sweet tea gradually gained popularity in the Southern states.

Another tale attributes the creation of sweet tea to the tea plantations in the Lowcountry, where the hot climate inspired the addition of sugar to iced tea to create a more thirst-quenching and enjoyable beverage. Regardless of its exact origin, sweet tea has become an iconic and beloved Southern tradition.

Southern Hospitality

It is often associated with hospitality, warm weather, and the cultural heritage of the American South. Today, sweet tea is a staple in Southern cuisine and is a South Carolina favorite that is enjoyed throughout the United States, with variations in sweetness levels depending on personal preferences.

Conclusion

As we wrap up our culinary tour through the Palmetto State, it's evident that South Carolina's traditional foods are not just a feast for the palate but a journey through the state's vibrant history and diverse cultural influences.

From the Lowcountry's seafood delights to the barbecue traditions that ignite taste buds, each dish reflects a story woven into the fabric of South Carolina's rich heritage.

Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. We hope that you enjoy this recipe and would want to share it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
John 6:35
-Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

The Best Instant Read Thermometer [2026]

January 30, 2024 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Whether you're a seasoned chef or an enthusiastic home cook, having the right tools at your disposal can make all the difference. Regarding accuracy, speed, and reliability in temperature measurement, the Thermoworks Thermapen stands out as the undisputed champion of the best instant read thermometer.

Picture this: a perfectly cooked steak with a caramelized crust and a juicy, tender interior. Achieving such culinary perfection requires meticulous control over temperature, and that's where the Thermoworks Thermapen becomes your kitchen companion. This instant-read thermometer isn't just a gadget; it's a game-changer that elevates your cooking experience to new heights.

For more tools that I recommend, check out this article on 5 Essential Kitchen Tools You Need.

In this blog post, we'll take a closer look at what makes the Thermoworks Thermapen the best instant-read thermometer on the market. From its cutting-edge technology to its user-friendly design, we'll delve into the features that set it apart and explore how it can revolutionize the way you approach cooking.

Why You Need an Instant-Read Thermometer

An instant-read thermometer is one of if not the most important kitchen tools for professional chefs and home cooks alike. This tool is an indispensable tool in the kitchen for several compelling reasons:

Precision Cooking

Instant-read thermometers provide accurate and instantaneous temperature readings, allowing you to achieve precision in your cooking. Whether you're grilling, baking, sous vide, roasting, deep frying, or pan-frying, knowing the exact internal temperature of your food is crucial for achieving the desired doneness.

In reality, cooking by temperature is better than cooking by time or cutting open the meat to see the color inside, as some home cooks do. Cutting into the meat releases the internal juices, which allows the meat to dry out.

Furthermore, cooking by time is not always accurate, as temperatures on ovens, grills, crock pots, stovetops, or other cooking devices can vary from brand to brand and even unit to unit.

Food Safety

Ensuring that meat and poultry reach a safe internal temperature is vital to eliminate harmful bacteria and pathogens. With this in mind, instant-read thermometers help you verify that your food has reached the recommended temperature, reducing the risk of foodborne illnesses.

Making sure that your food is cooked to the right temperature to imperative to kill bacteria which may be harmful if eaten. Not only is an instant-read thermometer great for providing accurate readings of food temperature for food safety, but it also helps to get the meat you are cooking to the desired temperature so you do not overcook it.

Consistent Results

Achieving consistency in your cooking is challenging without accurate temperature control. Furthermore, an instant-read thermometer ensures that your dishes are cooked consistently, eliminating the guesswork and providing reliable results every time.

Versatility

Instant-read thermometers are versatile tools suitable for various cooking methods and types of food. From checking the doneness of a steak to ensuring the perfect temperature for bread or candy making, these thermometers cover a wide range of culinary applications.

Additionally, this versatile tool can be employed for tasks such as gauging water temperatures, ensuring the ideal lukewarm conditions for baking bread, or precisely measuring the temperature of frying oil when preparing dishes like Crispy Southern Fried Catfish.

Preventing Overcooking

Overcooking can lead to dry and unappetizing meals. With an instant-read thermometer, you can pull your food off the heat at the exact moment it reaches the desired temperature, preventing overcooking and preserving moisture and flavor.

Ideal for Grilling

Grilling success often hinges on precise temperature control. Instant-read thermometers help you monitor the internal temperature of meat on the grill, ensuring that it reaches the ideal level for safety and taste.

The Best Instant Read Thermometer is made by ThermoWorks

In my view, ThermoWorks thermometers stand out as the top choice for instant-read thermometers on the market. This indispensable tool is renowned for its high-quality performance, earning endorsements from numerous restaurants and professional chefs.

Notably, it is also trusted by America's Test Kitchen, further solidifying its reputation in the culinary world.

The Thermoworks brand has earned its reputation as the best instant-read thermometer for a variety of reasons, and my favorite model is their Thermapen. Here are some of the reasons I love it:

Unmatched Speed and Accuracy

The Thermapen boasts an incredibly fast response time, providing accurate temperature readings within seconds. This rapid performance ensures that you can make real-time adjustments to your cooking process.

High Precision Design

Engineered with high-precision sensors, the Thermapen delivers precise temperature readings with minimal variance. This level of precision is crucial for achieving consistent and perfectly cooked results. Not only that, but the Thermoworks Thermapen has one of the fastest reading speeds.

This is so important when you are checking meat temps over a hot grill. The longer it takes to get a reading, the longer your hand is over the high temperatures.

User-Friendly Design

The Thermapen is designed with user convenience in mind. Its ease of use and intuitive design feature a simple one-handed operation. It has an easy-to-read display and an auto-rotating display for easy readability from any angle. This sets it apart from other brands of digital thermometers.

Durability and Build Quality

Crafted with durable materials and robust construction, the Thermapen is built to withstand the rigors of the kitchen. Its sturdy design ensures longevity, making it a reliable and long-lasting investment for a long time.

Versatility Across Various Culinary Applications

The Thermapen is versatile and suitable for a wide range of cooking applications. Whether you're grilling, roasting, baking, or candy making, this thermometer adapts to different culinary scenarios with ease.

Water-Resistant Design

The Thermapen is equipped with water-resistant housing and a rating of IP67. This adds an extra layer of protection against spills and splashes. This feature enhances the durability of the thermometer and makes it suitable for use in diverse kitchen environments.

Extended Battery Life

With efficient power management, the Thermapen offers an extended battery life of 2000 hours. This reduces the frequency of battery replacements. This ensures that the thermometer is ready for use whenever you need it.

Automatic On/Off Functionality

The Thermapen is designed with automatic on/off functionality, conserving battery life further. The thermometer activates when you unfold the probe and turns off when you close it, minimizing energy consumption.

Quality Assurance and Calibration

Thermoworks is known for its commitment to quality, and Thermapen is no exception. Each unit undergoes rigorous testing and calibration to meet high standards, ensuring that users receive a reliable and accurate tool.

Customer Satisfaction and Reviews

Positive reviews and widespread customer satisfaction attest to the excellence of the Thermapen. The thermometer has gained a loyal following in the culinary community, with users praising its performance and reliability.

Thermapen One

The thermapen One is the particular model of Thermapen that I love. According to the Thermoworks website, "With full readings in ONE second or less, Thermapen One approaches the speed of thought - allowing you to focus exclusively on the quality of your work. Achieve such speed and accuracy without sacrificing durability and usability."

The Thermapen One is the fastest-reading digital instant-read thermometer on the market, making it the best instant-read thermometer.

Why Thermapen One is the Best Instant Read Thermometer

This is a picture showing the Thermoworks Thermapen. It it is One of the best instant read thermometers.

Check Price

The Thermapen One is equipped with a myriad of features that set it apart as an exceptional instant-read thermometer:

Ultra-Fast Readings:
- The Thermapen One delivers lightning-fast temperature readings in one second, ensuring minimal wait time during the cooking process.
High-Precision Sensors:
- Engineered with advanced sensors, this thermometer provides precise and accurate temperature measurements for consistent cooking results.
Intelligent Backlit Display:
- Featuring an intelligent backlight, the display ensures easy readability in various lighting conditions, making it convenient for any kitchen environment.
Auto-Rotating Display:
- The Thermapen One's display automatically rotates, allowing for effortless reading from any angle and enhancing user convenience.
Water-Resistant Design:
- With a water-resistant housing, the thermometer is built to withstand spills and splashes, adding durability and longevity to its design.
Foldable Probe with Auto-On/Off:
- The foldable probe design not only ensures easy storage but also activates the thermometer when unfolded and powers it off when closed, conserving battery life.
Ergonomic Design:
- Designed with user comfort in mind, the Thermapen One boasts an ergonomic form factor, allowing for easy handling and precise control.
Certified Accuracy:
- The Thermapen One undergoes rigorous testing and calibration, providing users with a certified level of accuracy that is essential for precise temperature measurement.
Trusted Brand:
- As part of the Thermoworks brand, the Thermapen One inherits a legacy of quality and reliability, earning trust among culinary professionals and home cooks alike.

Exploring Limitations: Drawbacks and Considerations of the Thermapen One

Even though we think that the Thermoworks Thermapen One is the best instant-read meat thermometer, it's essential to consider some potential drawbacks:

Price Point: The Thermapen One is positioned as a premium product, and its cost may be higher compared to other instant-read thermometers on the market.
Non-locking Probe Design: The folding probe doesn't lock. While this isn't a deal breaker, it would be nice if the probe locked into multiple positions.

Conclusion

In the world of precision cooking, the Thermoworks Thermapen One emerges as a leading force, offering unparalleled speed, accuracy, and a suite of features that elevate the culinary experience. From its lightning-fast readings to its water-resistant design, this instant-read thermometer is a testament to Thermoworks' commitment to quality.

While the Thermapen One undoubtedly stands out as a top-tier kitchen tool, it's crucial to weigh the considerations. The premium price point may pose a challenge for some budgets, and the advanced features might be more than what every user needs. However, for those who seek the epitome of accuracy and reliability, the investment is well justified.

FAQ's

Can the Thermapen One be calibrated for accuracy?

The Thermapen One is generally calibrated during the manufacturing process to ensure accuracy. Users are advised to follow the manufacturer's guidelines for proper use and care, and in some cases, recalibration may be possible.

Is the Thermapen One suitable for beginners in the kitchen?

Absolutely! While the Thermapen One is a high-performance tool, its user-friendly design makes it accessible for both seasoned chefs and beginners alike. Its intuitive features and large display contribute to a positive user experience.

What sets the Thermapen One apart from other instant-read thermometers on the market?

The Thermapen One distinguishes itself with its ultra-fast readings, high-precision sensors, water-resistant design, and thoughtful features such as the intelligent backlight and auto-rotating display. Its combination of speed, accuracy, and durability sets it apart from many competitors.

Does the Thermapen One require frequent battery replacements?

The Thermapen One is designed with efficient power management, resulting in an extended battery life. While battery replacement is inevitable over time, users can expect a reasonable duration of use before needing to replace the batteries.

How durable is the Thermapen One?

The Thermapen One is crafted with durable materials and a robust design, making it well-suited for the demands of both professional and home kitchens. Its water-resistant feature adds an extra layer of protection against spills and splashes.

Where can I purchase the Thermapen One?

You can purchase one by following the affiliate link here.

How to Make Peach Tea (Easy Recipe)

December 12, 2023 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Welcome to the refreshing world of homemade Peach Tea, where the sweet and succulent flavors of Georgia peaches mingle perfectly with the classic charm of Southern Tea Company's Georgia Peach Tea Bags. Creating this delightful beverage is a breeze and a journey into the heart of Southern hospitality, bringing the warmth of a summer day to your glass.

This photo is used in the blog post on how to make peach tea.

So, let's dive into the world of how to make easy peach iced tea and discover how to transform ordinary tea into a sweet symphony of Southern charm and fruity bliss. Get ready to sip, relax, and savor the taste of summer in every glass!

If you enjoy this Peach Iced Tea recipe, I think you'll love this complete list of the 25 most refreshing Iced Tea recipes.

History of Southern Sweet Tea

I was born and raised in South Carolina. Some of the very first tea plantations were right here in the Palmetto State. Not only was South Carolina the first place to plant and raise tea, but it is also thought to have been the only state to grow tea commercially.

Many also say that sweet tea was born right here in our state of South Carolina as well. Check out this article from Southern Living about how South Carolina was the birthplace of Sweet Tea.

I love homemade iced tea so much, and it was about the only drink I had growing up. You can find out how I make my sweet iced tea by checking out this recipe on How to Make the Perfect Southern Sweet Tea.

Why Peach Flavor Iced Tea?

From my childhood days, I've always enhanced my tea with a hint of lemon. This practice is common among many Southerners throughout the Southern States, and it's a tradition for Southern restaurants to accompany tea with a fresh lemon slice. The allure of fresh peaches follows a similar pattern. When it comes to beating the heat on a scorching summer day, nothing quite matches the revitalizing sensation of peach iced tea!

Peach Iced Tea is a Twist on a Classic Flavor

Creating peach-flavored iced tea adds a delightful twist to the classic beverage, offering a unique and refreshing experience. There are several reasons why making this beverage can be a wonderful choice:

Distinctive Flavor: Peaches impart a sweet and slightly tangy flavor to the tea, creating a deliciously distinctive taste. The natural sweetness of peaches complements the traditional tea flavors, resulting in a well-balanced and satisfying beverage.
Seasonal Refreshment: Peaches are often associated with summertime, and peach iced tea is a perfect way to capture the essence of the season. The drink provides a cooling and hydrating option, making it ideal for hot days and outdoor gatherings.
Southern Tradition: In Southern cuisine, peaches are a beloved ingredient, and peach iced tea has become a Southern classic. Embracing this tradition adds a touch of regional charm and cultural flair to your beverage choices.
Versatility: This drink can be adapted to various preferences. Whether you prefer it sweetened or unsweetened, with or without lemon, the versatility of peach iced tea allows you to tailor it to your taste.
Health Benefits: Peaches bring nutritional benefits to the table, including vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. Incorporating this fruit into your iced tea not only enhances the flavor but also adds a nutritional boost to your beverage.
Eye-Catching Presentation: The vibrant color of peach iced tea makes it visually appealing. Serving this beverage with slices of fresh peach adds a touch of elegance to your table, making it a visually enticing option for guests.

How To Make Peach Tea

Peach-flavored tea is so yummy, and you are going to love this so much. There are many ways you can make this delicious drink, from steeping black tea bags, pureeing peach slices to flavor the tea, and making a simple syrup to sweeten the drink. But I have an easier way to make it. To make the peach tea recipe super easy, I like to use Southern Tea Company Georgia Peach tea bags. This makes the process super simple, and it has a nice peachy flavor without being fake or too strong.

Equipment Needed:

Small stock pot or Saucepan
Wooden or metal serving spoon
Measuring cup
Tea Pitcher
Southern Tea Company Georgia Peach Teabag

Note: For a rundown of brands I suggest, take a look at the Kitchen Essential Tools page.

Preparation

Start by adding four cups of water to the stock pot. Turn the burner on high and bring the water to a boil.

this is a photo of me adding water to a stock pot in order to make peach tea.

Once the water has boiled, turn off the burner. Add one family-size tea bag to the hot water.

This photo is a pot of water boiling in order to make sweet tea.

Let the tea bag steep for 9 minutes.

Mixing

Add 1 ¾ cups of cane sugar to a 1-gallon pitcher

This is a photo showing the steps to making Peach tea by adding in the sugar to a pitcher.

Pour hot tea over the sugar and stir with a wooden spoon or metal spoon.

This photo is showing the steps to making tea. In this step is pouring hot tea over the sugar.

Fill the pitcher the rest of the way up with cold water and refrigerate.

this photo is filling the pitcher the rest of the way up with water.

Serving a glass of refreshing Peach Iced Tea

Grab a few individual glasses and fill them full of ice cubes. Next, pour the refrigerated tea over the ice. If it is peach season and you have access to real peaches, add a few slices of fresh peaches to the glasses.

Note: If you do not have access to fresh peaches, you can use frozen peaches for the garnish.

Conclusion

In conclusion, crafting homemade peach tea emerges as the ultimate summer drink, perfectly suited for those hot summer days and balmy summer months. The delightful fusion of simple ingredients of traditional tea flavors with the sweet and tangy notes of peaches creates a delicious recipe that captures the essence of the season.

Whether it's enjoyed on lazy summer afternoons or served at gatherings, homemade peach tea stands as the drink of choice for those seeking a refreshing and satisfying beverage. So, as the mercury rises and the sun graces us with its warmth, elevate your summer experience with the timeless charm of a glass of homemade peach tea – a true embodiment of summer in every sip. Cheers to the simple joys of sipping this enchanting concoction under the sun!

Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe and would want to share it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
John 6:35
-Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

FAQ's

Can I use frozen peaches for the homemade peach tea?

Yes, for the garnish, you can use frozen peaches.

Can I use frozen peaches for the homemade peach tea? Yes, for the garnish, you can use frozen peaches.

It is not necessary, but if you want to have true Southern Peach Iced Tea, it needs to be sweetened.

Can I adjust how much sugar is in this recipe?

Yes, I would recommend ¾ of a cup of sugar on the lighter side, and up to 2 cups on the sweeter side. 1 ¾ cups of sugar, as this recipe mentions, hits the sweet spot. 2 cups of sugar will be sweet like McDonald's sweet tea. Adjust the amount of sugar to your liking.

How can I enhance the presentation of homemade peach tea?

Garnish your peach iced tea with fresh peach slices, a sprig of mint, or even a slice of lemon for an extra visual appeal. Serving over ice in stylish glasses adds to the overall presentation.

How to Make Easy Peach Iced Tea

Prep Time: 1 minute

Cook Time: 9 minutes

Additional Time: 9 minutes

Total Time: 19 minutes

In this simple guide, we will walk you through the steps to craft a pitcher of Peach Iced Tea that captures the essence of the South.

No Ratings

Ingredients

4 cups of water
1 Family Size Georgia Peach Teabag from Southern Tea Company
1 ¾ cup of white cane sugar

Instructions

Bring 4 cups of water to a boil, then turn the burner off.
Add in 1 family size Georgia Peach teabag from Southern Tea Company
Steep for 9 minutes.
Add sugar to a 1-gallon tea pitcher and pour hot tea over the sugar. Mix with a wooden spoon.
Fill the pitcher up the rest of the way with cold water, then refrigerate until chilled.
Serve the tea over ice and add in a few peach slices for a garnish.

Nutrition Information:

Yield:

Serving Size:

1
Amount Per Serving: Calories: 89Total Fat: 0gSaturated Fat: 0gTrans Fat: 0gUnsaturated Fat: 0gCholesterol: 0mgSodium: 3mgCarbohydrates: 23gFiber: 0gSugar: 23gProtein: 0g

How to Reheat a Smoked Ham: 3 Methods for Delicious Results

November 13, 2023 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Have you ever found yourself with a store-bought smoked ham, eager to impress your guests with a holiday feast but unsure about the perfect way to reheat it? Join us on a culinary journey as we explore three foolproof methods to learn how to reheat a smoked ham to perfection.

When you pick up that fully cooked smoked ham from the grocery store, all you need to do is reheat it for a delectable holiday spread. Before we start though, I want to make sure you know the difference between smoked ham and fresh ham, this matters because one is already cooked, and the other is not.

This is a image showing How to reheat a smoked ham.

What is Ham?

Ham is a type of meat that is typically obtained from the hind leg of a pig. It can be prepared in various ways, including curing, smoking, and sometimes cooking.

This image is showing what a spiral smoked ham looks like. This image is used to show what we are going to reheat vs a green or fresh ham that would need to be fully cooked. — Fully cooked smoked ham

There are different types of ham, with the most common being:

Fresh Ham (Green Ham): This is an uncured leg of pork. It is similar in appearance to a roast and is not preserved with curing salts. Fresh ham is typically cooked like other cuts of pork.
Cured Ham: Ham is often cured with a mixture of salt, sugar, and sometimes other flavorings. This curing process helps preserve the meat and gives it a distinct salty flavor. Cured ham can be further divided into various types, such as city ham, country ham, and prosciutto.
Smoked Ham: Some cured hams are also smoked to add a smoky flavor. This is common in many varieties, including American-style hams.
Cooked Ham: Some hams are fully cooked during processing, making them ready to eat or requiring only reheating before consumption. Cooked ham is often used for deli meat.

Frequently, ham can combine several of these characteristics, as exemplified by a Honey Baked Ham. In this case, it undergoes curing, smoking, and finally, a delectable glazing process.

This pictures shows pouring a glaze over a smoked ham that has been reheated.

People enjoy ham in various culinary dishes, including sandwiches, omelets, and quiches, and as the centerpiece of holiday feasts, showcasing its versatility as meat. The flavor, texture, and preparation methods of ham vary widely, making it a popular and widely consumed meat product in many parts of the world.

Ensuring You Have a Thoroughly Cooked Ham: Why It Matters

Given our discussion about a fully cured and cooked ham, it's crucial to verify that the ham you've acquired is indeed fully cooked and not in its uncooked state. When you visit a grocery store, you'll come across smoked ham, but you might also encounter fresh ham or what's known as "green" ham.

This is a close up of the smoked ham with the person pointing at "Fully Cooked". The purpose of this image is to make sure the audience knows the difference between a smoked ham that is fully cooked and a green or fresh ham that is raw and needs to be cooked. — Make sure you buy a fully cooked ham and not a fresh or "green" ham

Fresh or green ham refers to a ham that has not undergone the cooking or curing process.

According to Michigan State University, "You can identify if the ham has been processed as the package will say what type of ham it is." The label should also tell you if the ham needs to be cooked or not.

What is a smoked ham?

Although you may know what a smoked ham is, I thought it might be useful for some people to know exactly what and how it is. A smoked ham is a fully cooked ham that has been cured and then smoked.

Curing Process

The process typically involves taking a raw ham and curing it with a mixture of salt, sugar, and various seasonings. After curing, the ham is then smoked, which imparts a distinct smoky flavor and helps to preserve the meat.

Smoking Process

The smoking process can vary, and different types of wood or other flavorings may be used to add specific taste profiles to the ham. Smoking also contributes to the ham's characteristic pink color.

Ham Ready to be smoked | Photo Credit: Canva.com

Different ways it is used

Smoked ham can be found in various forms, including whole hams, ham steaks, and sliced ham for sandwiches or other dishes. It is a popular ingredient in many cuisines and is often served during holidays and special occasions such as Thanksgiving, Christmas, and Easter.

Picture from Canva showing the smoked ham being in the center of a holiday feast. — Photo Credit: Canva.com

Smoked ham is fully cooked

It is important to reiterate that smoked ham is fully cooked and this recipe is dedicated to showing 3 ways to reheat a smoked ham. As such, smoked ham can be eaten cold or heated, and it is known for its savory, salty, and smoky flavor.

A good example of this is Honey Baked Ham. Honey Baked Ham is a spiral-sliced ham that undergoes smoking and is often enjoyed both cold and hot.

How to Reheat a Smoked Ham: Best Practices and Techniques

Now that we know what a smoked ham is and why when we need to cook or reheat a ham depending on what type it is, let's go over my favorite 3 ways on how to reheat a smoked ham.

The first thing you need to know is the weight of the smoked ham. This will determine how long you cook the ham. The weight should be listed on the package; if not, you can weigh it beforehand.

This image is showing that you need to know the weight of your smoked ham before reheating it. The weight tells us how long we will need to reheat it for.

Method #1: Reheating a Smoked Ham on the Orion Cooker

By far my favorite method of how to reheat smoked ham is using the Orion Cooker. The main reason I love this method is the simplicity in which it works. I conducted an honest review of the Orion Cooker, and you can explore the details and discover why I'm impressed with it in my dedicated blog post.

picture of the orion cooker with charcoal lit.

I'll skip the lengthy explanation in this post and skip right to the straightforward instructions on using it.

Tools Needed:

Orion Cooker
Remote meat thermometer (monitors the internal temp of meat)
Instant Meat Thermometer
Silicon Gloves to remove Ham with

Instructions:

Preparations

Fill the bottom ring and top ring with match light charcoal. If using regular charcoal, make sure to soak the charcoal with lighter fluid.
Next, if you want to add a little extra smoke flavor and color, (which I recommend), add some wood chips to the outside edge of the drip pan at the bottom of the inside of the Orion Cooker.
Next, add your rack.
Remove all the packaging from the ham and then place your ham on the rack. If you have half ham or ¼ ham, place it on the rack with the flat side down and the fat cap up. If you have a whole ham, place it on the flattest side with the fat cap up. This allows the fat to drip down, basting the ham as it cooks.
Place meat prob from the remote meat thermometer into the ham. This will help to monitor the internal temperature.
Close the lid.

Cooking

Light the Charcoal and set your timer. Orion is a timer-based cooker. Your time starts when you light the charcoal. Trust the time and do not open the lid as this greatly affects the cooking time.
For an 8 to 9-pound ham, you will cook for 1hr 40 minutes or about 13 mins per lb.
Once time is reached, the remote BBQ alarm temp should be close to 140 degrees Fahrenheit. If this temp is reached earlier, you can remove ham at that time.
If you do not have a remote BBQ alarm (meat probe and thermometer) you can use an instant-read meat thermometer to check the internal temp after the time is done.
For reheating precooked ham, the 140-degree Fahrenheit range is a good serving temperature for ham slices but anything within 140 to 150 is adequate.

Note: Don't fret, the charcoal and lighter fluid never come in contact with the food. The food will seal inside the chamber of the Orion Cooker, while the charcoal will supply heat from the outside of the cooker.

Method #2 Reheating a smoked ham in a roaster oven

Using a roaster oven to reheat a smoked ham is a great choice and one that will make a very juicy ham. This method uses an appliance that is similar to a slow cooker, but on a larger scale to be able to fit a large ham.

This image shows a smoked ham sitting in a roaster oven ready to be reheated.

This method also works well for cooking fresh ham, boneless hams, other precooked ham, and even a whole turkey.

Tools Needed:

Roaster Oven
Remote BBQ alarm (monitors the internal temp of meat)
Instant Meat Thermometer
Silicon Gloves to remove Ham with

Preparations

Add 2 cups of water or chicken stock to the bottom pan then replace the rack.

This image is a person adding chicken stock to a roaster oven in order to reheat a smoked ham.

Preheat the oven to 325 degrees Fahrenheit.

This image is showing the temperature setting on a roaster oven.

Remove all the packaging from the ham and place on the rack.
Place meat prob from the remote meat thermometer into the ham. This will help to monitor the internal temperature.

This image shows a remote meat thermometer placed in the center of a smoked ham that is about to be reheated in order to be served.

Cooking

Place the ham on the rack with the fat cap up and close the lid.
Bake for 10-15 minutes per pound.
Once the meat probe reaches an internal temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit, remove the ham from the roasting oven. If you do not have a remote BBQ alarm (meat probe and thermometer) you can use an instant-read meat thermometer to check the internal temp.

This image is showing what the Thermoworks Smoke Remote BBQ alarm looks like. — Once the ham reaches 140 degrees, you are done.

Method #3 Reheating a smoked ham in the oven

The next and last method I am going to recommend is reheating a smoked ham in the conventional oven. The benefit of this option is it is the least expensive option as most people will already have an oven in their house. We will use a low heat and slow cooking time, along with a roasting pan to produce a flavorful and juicy ham.

This image shows someone putting a precooked ham in the oven in order to show how to reheat a smoked ham.

The oven produces great results, but in my opinion, the other two methods mentioned above are the best ways to cook a pre-cooked ham.

Tools Needed:

Roasting pan
Silicon Gloves to remove Ham with
Remote BBQ alarm (monitors the internal temp of meat)
Instant Meat Thermometer

Preparations:

The oven temperature we are using will be 325 degrees Fahrenheit. Preheat the oven to that temperature.
Place a cup of water or chicken stock in the bottom of the pan.

Place meat prob from the remote meat thermometer into the ham. This will help to monitor the internal temperature.

Next, put the ham on the rack in the pan and cover tightly with a single layer of heavy-duty aluminum foil.

Cooking:

Cook for 10-15 minutes per pound of ham until the meat thermometer reaches 140 degrees Fahrenheit.

Once the meat probe reaches an internal temperature of 140 degrees Fahrenheit, remove the ham from the roasting oven. If you do not have a remote BBQ alarm (meat probe and thermometer) you can use an instant-read meat thermometer to check the internal temp.

Note: If you do not have a roasting pan, you could use a baking dish.

Serving

Ham is typically served in slices. If you have a spiral-cut ham, you can serve the ham on a platter and let guest cut their own slice. You could also precut the slices of ham and serve them on a platter.

What to serve with smoked ham

Conclusion

In conclusion, adding a perfectly warmed pre-cooked ham to your holiday table is not just a good idea; it's the secret ingredient for creating a delicious meal that your guests will remember. The tender, flavorful, and moist holiday ham, carefully prepared in your roasting oven, Orion cooker, or conventional oven, will undoubtedly be the centerpiece of your holiday table.

Its exquisite taste and impressive presentation will make your holiday table complete. So, whether it's Thanksgiving, Christmas, Easter, or any special occasion, consider including a holiday ham as a delightful addition to your holiday festivities. Your holiday table and your guests will thank you for this delectable addition.

FAQ's

What can I do with leftover ham?

If you have leftover ham, cut the remaining ham off the bone and place it in an airtight container. It will be good in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days.

Can I freeze leftover ham?

Yes. Place in a freezer-safe container or freezer-safe ziplock bag. It will be good for 2 to 3 months in the freezer.

Can I use any pre-cooked ham for this recipe?

Yes, you can use various pre-cooked ham types, but ensure it is fully cooked and follow specific packaging instructions if available.

How do I prevent the ham from drying out during warming?

Covering the ham with foil when cooking in the oven with help with drying out. The other two methods do a great job of conserving moisture. Also, make sure to monitor the internal temperature as this is key to maintaining moisture. You do not want to overcook the ham.

What can I use to glaze the ham for added flavor?

You can use the ham's own juices to bast or glaze the ham, a glaze from the packaging, or a homemade glaze to enhance the flavor.

Can I use a roasting bag instead of foil?

Yes, you can use a roasting bag for a similar effect. Just follow the bag's instructions.

21 Unique Christmas Gifts for Cooks and Foodies (2026)

October 26, 2023 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

The holiday season is fast approaching, and what better way to celebrate than by delighting the culinary enthusiasts and food lovers in your life with extraordinary Christmas gifts? Whether they're a master chef or simply someone who appreciates the art of cooking, this curated list of 21 unique Christmas gifts for Cooks and Foodies is sure to bring joy to their hearts and creativity to their kitchens.

From innovative gadgets to delectable treats and kitchen essentials with a twist, we've scoured the culinary world to find the perfect presents that will make this holiday season a gastronomic delight. Get ready to embark on a culinary journey filled with inspiration, flavors, and the joy of giving. Let's Jump Right into it, shall we?

This is a featured picture showing two chefs, Christmas presents, and unique Christmas Gifts for cooks and foodies.

1. Instant Read Thermometer

In my kitchen, one of the most frequently employed tools is an instant-read thermometer. Whenever I prepare any type of meat, it becomes my trusted companion, ensuring that it attains the precise temperature required.

Thermoworks Thermapen One is a instant read thermometer.

Check Price

Not just for meat

Not only are they great for temping meat, but they are also useful for checking other things as well. I use it to check the temperature of the water when I am feeding my sourdough Starter.

I also use it to check the temperature of frying oil when cooking Southern-style catfish. There are just so many uses for it, which is why I think it is one of the best kitchen gift ideas for Christmas.

Thermoworks

I have tried a few brands over the years. A few have broken, and I still have one, but the one that I love the most is made by Thermoworks. They are a professional-grade company that is used by Chefs and home cooks alike.

What We Like

Super Fast: If you try a cheaper brand, you will find that it has a delay in the time it takes to display the temperature. Thermapen is super fast at displaying the temperature. This is important if you are standing over a blazing hot grill.
Professional: Thermoworks Thermapen is of professional quality and made to last.
Large Display: Thermapen has a nice, large display that is easy to read.

What We Don’t Like

Splash Proof: While this may seem like a pro, I wish it were waterproof instead of splashproof.
Premium Price: The price is higher than many instant-read thermometers, but this one is worth the price.

2. Orion Cooker

If you are looking for unique gifts for cooks, then this is a great gift for that special someone or foodie friend who likes to cook outdoors. The Orion cooker may be the perfect gift for them. The Orion Cooker has the remarkable ability to transform an ordinary cook into a culinary star, thanks to its user-friendly operation and the exceptional flavor it imparts to the food it prepares.

Check Price

The Orion cooker cooks with four basic methods. The first is indirect heat. The main principle it works on is convection cooking. The chamber is completely sealed from the outside. No air gets in or out.

The sleek design and quality of the unit make this a no-brainer. The unit is made of 100% stainless steel, so you never have to worry about it rusting. This thing should outlast me. Even the hardware is stainless steel.

The charcoal is on the outside of the cooker, and the chamber that the food is in is sealed. The indirect heat causes a convection current to swirl around the inside of the chamber as it builds up pressure. This indirect heat and convection cook the meat. It also seals in moisture and steam, which helps the meat retain moisture and helps to cook as well.

What We Like

Ease of use: This is the easiest cooker/smoker you will find.
Quality of construction
Set it and forget it

What we don't like

Lack of Crust/bark: Since it holds moisture so well, the meat doesn't form a good crust or bark.
Limited capacity: The original size doesn't hold a lot of meat if you're cooking for a group. They do offer a larger size unit that you can buy.
Clean up: The grease drips on the bottom, but there is a pan to catch it. You have to let the unit cool down some to get it out and clean it. This is just a minor disadvantage, as we love the Orion Cooker.

3. Bajio Sunglasses

You may be thinking, this item is weird to be on a list for unique gifts for cooks and foodies or home cooks, but follow me for a minute. If you love grilling, smoking meats, or cooking over a campfire, sunglasses make an awesome gift for that person.

Not only are sunglasses useful when cooking outside, but they are great to wear anytime you are outdoors to protect your eyes.

Check Price

True to their roots

The Brand that I have come to love is Bajio. The company is based in Florida, and according to its website, it was founded in New Smyrna Beach, Florida, and is against the international profiteers that are trying to destroy the outdoor industry.

It's worth noting that a vast majority of sunglass companies are under the ownership of a single corporate giant. Bajio, however, is challenging this status quo by charting its unique course. When it comes to quality, Bajio sunglasses can easily hold their own against renowned brands like Oakley, Costas, or Smith.

Assembled in the USA

One distinctive feature of Bajio is that their glasses are meticulously assembled in the USA, a testament to their commitment to producing high-quality eyewear. They're not ones to conform to industry norms set by others; instead, they're blazing their own trail.

These shades are tailor-made for various outdoor pursuits, whether it's fishing in the coastal flats, deep-sea fishing, or simply unwinding while tending to your smoker.

What's even better is that you have the option to choose between Polycarbonate and glass lenses, each delivering exceptional clarity. This flexibility ensures that you get the eyewear that perfectly suits your needs and preferences.

What we like:

Quality Construction
Clarity
Stylish

What we don't like

Price: Although the price point is similar to other brands in this category, I wish they were a little cheaper. I do understand, though,h that you pay for what you get.
Heavy: Although the glass lenses are far superior in clarity and durability, they come with added weight. In my opinion, it is worth the extra weight for the quality of the lenses, though.

4. Aerogarden

The Aerogarden is a standout among my cherished kitchen gadgets. It's hard to categorize it solely as a kitchen gadget because it's so versatile. Mine is placed near my stove, so it is convenient to get herbs from, but you can essentially put it anywhere you like.

Aerogarden. This is a picture of the Aerogarden hydroponic indoor herb garden.

Check Price

This innovative indoor herb garden is an exceptional gift for the passionate cook. In my opinion, it is one of the finest gifts for cooking enthusiasts, so I had to include this in this list of unique gifts for cooks and foodies!

If your relative or foodie friend loves cooking with fresh herbs and veggies, the AeroGarden may be the perfect gift for them. With the AeroGarden, they will be able to grow fresh herbs and veggies year-round right on their counter.

It is Automatic

The best part is that it is pretty much automatic. It has a built-in LED light, and the water circulates on a schedule, so everything is programmed to take care of itself. The only thing you have to do is add water and more nutrients once every two weeks. The AeroGarden makes a perfect kitchen gift idea for anyone who loves to cook or grow their food!

Outside view of AeroGarden with parts labeled.

inside view of water resevoir of the AeroGarden with parts labeled.

view of indicator lights panel on the front of the Aerogarden.

What We Like:

Easy-no fuss: One of the Easiest ways to add fresh veggies and herbs to your diet.
Virtually foolproof: Anyone can grow an abundance of herbs and veggies in the AeroGarden.
Convenient: Grow Herbs year-round right on your counter. You can have it close to your cooking area to have the freshest herbs possible for cooking.

What We Don’t Like:

Overcrowding: Because the plants grow so fast, they can get overcrowded quickly.
Maintenance: Although the AeroGarden is easy and foolproof to use, there is ongoing maintenance. When you have to replace the plants, you have to clean the whole system.
Price: While they are convenient, easy, and foolproof, they come with a price. They start at $100.00 for the cheapest and go up from there.

5. Cookbook

What great cook doesn't love a new cookbook? Cookbooks are a reasonable idea and one of the best gifts you can give.

There are so many great cookbook authors out there, and I have created a great list of my favorite Southern cookbooks that I love. One of my favorite cookbooks is Magnolia Table by Joanna Gaines.

This would make an ideal addition to any collection of cookbooks for home chefs.

Southern Cook book called Magnolia Table by Joanna Gaines

Check Price

If you have not heard of Joanna and Chip Gaines, you must be living under a rock. They became popular because of Joanna’s eye for detail in designing, which led to a super popular TV show called Fixer Upper.

Joanna Gaines is deeply rooted in her faith and family, which is why she loves to cook so much. According to her Bio, she believes in Home! This cookbook is filled with Southern comfort dishes that are sure to delight your family and give you that truly home-cooked meal they desire.

Favorite Recipes:

Chicken Pot Pie
Chocolate Chip Cookies
Fried Chicken

6. New Set of Pots and Pans

Most cooks already have a set of pots and pans, but maybe you are buying for a friend or relative who would love a nice quality set of pots and pans. Maybe your loved one's set of pots and pans has gotten old and needs replacing.

All Clad Anodized cookware is on of the great gift ideas for moms on mothers day.

Check Price

Having a nice set of pots and pans improves your cooking skills. It will make a good cook into a serious home cook. All-Clad is a quality brand that has been around for a while now. Their products are known by home chefs and professionals alike.

What we like:

Easy to clean: The non-stick coating on these All-Clad pots and pans makes for easy cleanup after cooking.
Stacks and Stores Neatly: The way the pans are designed, they nest into each other, which makes them stack and store neatly.
Versatile: These pans have a high working temperature, which enables them to go from the stovetop to the oven.

What we don’t like:

No pour spout: While we love the All-Clad pots and pans, we wish they had a pour spout on them to make pouring liquids, sauces, and gravies easier.
Can scratch: As with most non-stick pans, they tend to scratch if extra care is not taken.

7. Hot Sauce

Hot sauce makes a fantastic Christmas gift because it adds a spicy twist to the holiday season. It offers a unique and flavorful experience for those who enjoy culinary adventures. It's a versatile and thoughtful present that can spice up holiday dishes and delight the taste buds.

Check Price

Gator Hammock Hot Sauce is the ultimate Christmas gift for the hot sauce enthusiast in your life. Packed with flavor and a touch of heat, it's the perfect blend of spicy and savory, making it an exceptional addition to any culinary journey.

This is one of my all-time favorite hot sauces, and it ranks about a 6 on the heat scale from 1 to 10. Gator Hammock Gator Sauce has a very unique flavor that is vastly different from your average sauce. That is why I included it in my unique gifts for cooks and foodies.

This Christmas, give the gift of flavor that will leave them craving more and spicing up their holiday season in the most delicious way.

8. Knife Set

A knife set is a thoughtful and practical Christmas gift that keeps on giving. It's not just a set of kitchen tools; it's the key to culinary creativity. From effortlessly slicing through ingredients to crafting impressive dishes, a quality knife set enhances the joy of cooking.

Every time they use these precision blades, they will be reminded of your generosity and thoughtfulness. So, this Christmas, give the gift of precision, versatility, and culinary delight with a knife set that elevates every meal and fills their kitchen with festive cheer.

Check Price

A good knife set will include a few types of knives: A chef's knife is the first thing they will need in a knife set. This knife is for basic cutting and chopping. While a top-notch traditional chef's knife is essential, I also have a deep appreciation for the Nakiri, which is a Japanese knife. The Nakiri is great for making thin slices of vegetables.

Another type of knife that is useful is a paring knife. A paring knife is great for peeling fruits and vegetables as it is small and fits in your hand well. The last knife I would suggest getting is a bread knife.

One brand that I have come to love is Buck Knives. The quality and construction are made to last, and they are made in Japan, which is known for making quality knives.

9. Instant Pot

The Instant Pot is a multi-cooker that can replace several appliances such as a slow cooker, pressure cooker, rice cooker, and more. It is a popular kitchen appliance that has gained a lot of attention in recent years, and it can make a great Christmas gift for several reasons.

Instant Pot is a great gift idea for mom on Mother's Day.

Check Price

One of the big draws to an Instant Pot is how quickly it cooks foods that would normally take a long time to cook or tougher cuts of meat, such as roast beef.

Making boiled peanuts in my instant pot. — Making boiled peanuts in my Instant Pot

What we like:

Time-Saving: The Instant Pot replaces many of the kitchen appliances that you would normally use and cooks food a quickly time such as rice, beans, and tougher cuts of meat.
Versatility: The Instant Pot can cook a variety of dishes, from soups and stews to rice and pasta.
Convenience: The Instant Pot is easy to use and clean, which can be a big selling point for Moms who do not have a lot of time to spend in the kitchen.

What we don’t like:

Learning Curve: While the Instant Pot is easy to use, it has a lot of buttons, and it takes a little getting used to.
Bulky: The Instant Pot is available in a range of sizes; the larger models can be bulky and take up a lot of counter space.

10. Bread Machine

If you have followed me for any time, you know that I am a big fan of bread machines. I got one for a gift some 13 or 14 years ago and loved it. Bread machines make great gift ideas, but I think many times the bread recipe that comes with it is not very good, so the machine doesn’t get used.

Check Price

I know this was the case for me when I first received mine, so I got to looking for a bread recipe that I liked. Once I found one, I tweaked it to my liking, and I came up with this Homemade White Bread in the Bread Machine recipe.

Since my machine has recently ceased to function, I've decided that this will be the one I choose when I eventually acquire a replacement. From my thorough investigation, it seems like not only an excellent addition for my own needs but also a fantastic gift idea for Christmas!

What we like:

Stainless Steel: I love the fact that it is stainless steel and not plastic like many of the bread machines. I feel like this unit would be very durable.
Versatility: Not only can you bake bread, but you can cook other items as well. I love a versatile machine that serves dual purposes.
Easy to clean: This unit is easy to clean with the stainless steel exterior and the non-stick bread pan.

What we don’t like:

Bulky: As with many kitchen appliances, they tend to be bulky and take up a lot of counter space.
Noise: Most bread machines do make a lot of noise, but it is only when they are mixing.

11. Coffee

If your cherished coffee enthusiast is on your Christmas gift list, why not treat them to some exceptional coffee? When selecting coffee, I make it a point to seek out smaller brands that take pride in roasting their beans in small batches.

Check Price

In my experience, this approach yields the finest-tasting coffee that stays fresh and maintains its quality for an extended period after opening. Furthermore, I appreciate companies that demonstrate a commitment to causes or values that align with my own.

A perfect example of such a coffee company that I admire is Fire Department Coffee. Their dedication to quality and community engagement makes them a top choice for the discerning coffee lover.

12. Coffee Frother

If your loved one is a coffee connoisseur, they are going to adore this handy kitchen gadget! For someone who enjoys frothy, creamy milk in their coffee, this gadget does the trick and makes it an ideal Christmas gift.

Check Price

Also, a frother can be used for other things as well, such as blending protein powder or making DIY whipped cream. If they love egg omelets, the frother could be used to aerate the eggs for a fluffy omelet. It is the perfect addition to the kitchen.

The versatility of this little kitchen gadget is the main reason that I included it in my list of 21 unique Christmas gifts for Cooks and Foodies.

13. Great Scrape Grill Cleaner

Are you worried about getting metal bristles in your food from cleaning your grill? Great Scrape has solved that issue for you! This tool, called the Great Scrape, is the ideal gift for your loved one who likes to grill or cook out.

Check Price

There have been a lot of news reports on social media about metal bristles getting into people’s food when they clean their grills with old-fashioned metal-bristle brushes. I had the opportunity to review a great product that will take care of this issue for you. It is called the Great Scrape.

I use this every time I use my gas grill. The one I have, I have had since 2016, and it has held up great.

The great scrape is a wooden board with a wooden handle. The basis of how this works is that you get your grill very hot and burn grooves into the flat front of the wooden paddle. Then each time you are ready to use the grill, you slide the paddle up and down the grill grates, and the grooves clean themselves for you. It works great! One note: make sure you wear oven mitts when burning it in, as the grill will be very hot.

14. KitchenAid Stand Mixer

No kitchen is complete without a KitchenAid stand mixer. There are so many useful things you can do with a stand mixer; the sky is the limit.

The KitchenAid stand mixer is the quintessential kitchen workhorse, combining versatility, power, and timeless style. With a robust motor and a range of attachments, it effortlessly handles tasks from mixing and kneading to whipping and blending.

Check Price

Its iconic design is not just about aesthetics but also a symbol of quality and durability. Perfect for both novice bakers and seasoned chefs, the KitchenAid stand mixer is a culinary companion that brings precision, consistency, and efficiency to every kitchen, elevating the joy of cooking and baking.

A KitchenAid stand mixer is a fantastic gift idea for several reasons:

Versatility: It's an incredibly versatile kitchen appliance, capable of performing various tasks, from mixing and kneading dough to whipping cream and much more. This versatility makes it a valuable addition to any kitchen.
Time-Saver: A stand mixer saves a significant amount of time and effort when compared to manual mixing and kneading. This means less strenuous work in the kitchen, allowing the recipient to enjoy cooking and baking without the laborious hand mixing.
Consistency: Stand mixers ensure consistent results, which is essential for achieving precise baking and cooking outcomes. Whether it's cookies, bread, or cakes, the mixer guarantees uniform mixing and texture.
Quality Construction: KitchenAid is known for its durable and high-quality construction. A stand mixer is built to last, which means it's a long-term investment in the recipient's culinary adventures.
Attachment Options: KitchenAid offers a wide range of attachments, allowing the stand mixer to be used for even more tasks like pasta making, meat grinding, and more. This adaptability enhances the mixer's utility in the kitchen.
Stylish Design: KitchenAid mixers come in a variety of colors and designs, making them a stylish addition to any kitchen decor.
Gift-Worthy: The KitchenAid stand mixer is a popular and sought-after kitchen appliance, making it an impressive and thoughtful gift for anyone who loves cooking and baking.

15. Can Cooker

The CanCooker is another one of my favorite and unique gifts for cooks and foodies who love the outdoors and love to cook.

Check Price

The CanCooker is a unique and innovative cooking device designed for unconventional meal preparation. It's essentially a cylindrical, portable, and lightweight cooking vessel that resembles a can. The CanCooker uses steam to cook food, making it an ideal choice for outdoor cooking, camping, and other adventurous culinary experiences.

Here's how it works:

Steam Cooking: The CanCooker relies on steam to cook food. It operates on the principle of convection, with a vented lid that allows steam to circulate and cook the contents.
Versatility: You can use the CanCooker to prepare a wide range of dishes, from traditional stews and soups to seafood, vegetables, and even desserts. It's known for its ability to cook large quantities of food quickly.
Efficiency: One of the key benefits of the CanCooker is its speed. It can cook a complete meal in a fraction of the time it would take with traditional cooking methods.
Portability: The CanCooker is designed for portability, making it a great option for outdoor enthusiasts, campers, and those who enjoy cooking on the go.
Ease of Use: It's user-friendly, requiring minimal effort and attention during the cooking process.

The CanCooker is often used for cooking in the great outdoors, but it can also find a place in home kitchens. It's a unique and efficient way to prepare delicious, well-cooked meals, and it's particularly appreciated by those who value simplicity and speed in their cooking endeavors.

16. Bison Coolers

Like many of the gifts on this list, you've probably noticed that I'm an avid outdoor enthusiast who relishes the art of outdoor cooking whenever the opportunity arises. In the great outdoors, one indispensable item you absolutely must have is a reliable cooler to keep your food and beverages chilled while enduring extended journeys.

Check Price

Necessity

Owning a high-quality cooler is more than just a practicality; it's a necessity. Though they may seem a bit pricey, they're a wise investment that far outlasts their cheaper counterparts, ensuring that your ice stays frozen and your provisions stay fresh throughout your outdoor adventures.

Bison Coolers are the ultimate companions for outdoor enthusiasts and adventurers. Crafted for rugged durability, these coolers are designed to withstand the toughest conditions, keeping your contents perfectly chilled or hot for extended periods.

Quality

With a commitment to quality and eco-friendly practices, Bison offers a range of sizes to cater to various needs, making these coolers the go-to choice for camping, picnicking, tailgating, and more. When you choose Bison, you're choosing a cooler that's built to last, with the strength to keep your adventures cool and refreshing.

Choosing a Bison cooler as a Christmas gift for someone is a thoughtful and practical choice for several compelling reasons:

Durability: Bison coolers are known for their rugged construction, designed to withstand the toughest outdoor conditions. They are built to last, making them a long-term investment.
Insulation: These coolers offer exceptional insulation, which means they can keep contents cold (or hot) for an extended period. This is ideal for outdoor adventures, picnics, camping trips, and more.
Versatility: Bison coolers can be used for various purposes, from storing beverages and perishable items to keeping food fresh during outdoor activities.
Quality Materials: Bison coolers are made from high-quality materials, ensuring they are resistant to wear and tear and capable of enduring rough handling.
Eco-Friendly: Bison is committed to sustainability and environmental responsibility, making it a conscientious choice for those who care about the environment.
Range of Sizes: Bison offers coolers in various sizes to suit different needs, from small, portable options to larger models for extended trips.
Gift-Worthy: Bison coolers are a thoughtful and practical gift for anyone who enjoys outdoor adventures, tailgating, or simply appreciates well-designed and reliable gear.

17. Hitch Fire Portable Grills

For those who crave unique gifts, Hitch Fire grills offer a one-of-a-kind outdoor cooking experience. The cool thing about Hitch Fire is that it slides into the receiver hitch on your vehicle, making it portable but also functional. It is a great way to carry your grill with you when you are camping, tailgating, or on the go. It is the perfect gift for those who love being on the go but also want to cook.

Check Price

On-the-go cooking

Hitch Fire portable grills are the perfect solution for taking your love of grilling on the go. Designed for outdoor enthusiasts and adventure seekers, these innovative grills attach to your vehicle's hitch receiver, allowing you to grill wherever your journey takes you.

With a focus on quality, convenience, and durability, Hitch Fire grills are built to withstand the rigors of the open road while providing a reliable and enjoyable grilling experience. Whether you're tailgating, camping, or simply exploring the great outdoors, Hitch Fire portable grills are your ticket to savoring delicious grilled meals wherever you roam.

Hitch Fire grills take cooking outdoors to the next level, it is one of the most unique gifts for cooks who love the outdoors.

18. Black Stone Grill

The Blackstone grill is your gateway to a world of outdoor culinary possibilities. With its versatile design and ample cooking surface, it's the perfect tool for grilling, frying, and preparing a variety of delectable dishes.

Check Price

Built to last and user-friendly, this grill is tailor-made for outdoor enthusiasts and those who love to cook and entertain in the open air.

Cooking breakfast will never be the same

Your loved one will want to cook breakfast all the time if you buy them a Blackstone grill. They are fun to cook on and very versatile. From pancakes to smash burgers to pork chops, it is truly a great Christmas gift option.

The Blackstone grill makes an outstanding Christmas gift for several compelling reasons:

Versatility: It's a versatile cooking appliance that allows for grilling, frying, and cooking a variety of foods, from burgers and steaks to breakfast items like pancakes and eggs.
Outdoor Cooking: The Blackstone grill is designed for outdoor use, making it an ideal addition for those who love to cook and entertain outdoors, whether it's in the backyard, at the campsite, or during tailgating events.
Large Cooking Surface: Blackstone grills come in various sizes, with ample cooking surfaces to accommodate a range of dishes and larger quantities, making it perfect for gatherings and family get-togethers.
Durability: They are built to last, with sturdy construction and materials that can withstand the elements.
User-Friendly: Blackstone grills are designed for easy use, making outdoor cooking accessible for individuals of all skill levels.
Flavorful Results: The open-grate design and propane heat source result in a unique cooking experience that imparts a delicious, smoky flavor to food.
Gift-Worthy: A Blackstone grill is a thoughtful and practical gift for anyone who enjoys outdoor cooking, grilling, and creating delicious meals for family and friends.

Blackstone grills are favored by outdoor cooking enthusiasts, campers, tailgaters, and anyone who enjoys preparing meals in an outdoor setting. They offer a unique and flavorful cooking experience, making them a popular choice for those who value the taste of grilled or griddled dishes prepared in the great outdoors.

19. Solo Stove

The Solo Stove is a remarkable piece of outdoor equipment designed for outdoor enthusiasts and nature lovers. Its innovative design is centered around efficient wood-burning, allowing you to enjoy a cozy, smokeless fire while minimizing the environmental impact.

Check Price

Quality counts

Crafted from high-quality stainless steel, Solo Stoves are built to last and endure the elements. With a compact and portable design, they're perfect for backpacking, camping, or simply enhancing your outdoor experience. Whether you're roasting marshmallows with friends or enjoying a peaceful evening under the stars, a Solo Stove adds warmth, ambiance, and an eco-friendly touch to your outdoor adventures.

The Solo Stove makes an excellent Christmas gift for a foodie or someone who enjoys cooking, and here's why:

Versatile Cooking: While known for its efficient wood-burning capabilities for creating a warm and inviting campfire, the Solo Stove also serves as an outdoor cooking tool. It allows for roasting marshmallows, grilling, and even pot cooking, giving the recipient the chance to cook and enjoy delicious meals outdoors.
Smokeless Design: The Solo Stove's unique design minimizes smoke production, making it a pleasant and hassle-free experience for cooking and enjoying the outdoors.
Quality Materials: It's built from high-quality stainless steel, ensuring durability and longevity, so the gift will be appreciated for many years to come.
Portability: The compact and lightweight design of the Solo Stove allows for easy transportation, making it a perfect addition to camping trips, picnics, or other outdoor cooking adventures.
Connection to Nature: The Solo Stove provides a direct connection to nature and the great outdoors, which can be particularly appealing to those who have a passion for cooking and savoring food in natural settings.
Memorable Experiences: It not only provides a means for cooking but also offers the opportunity to create memorable experiences, such as open-air dining, cooking over a crackling fire, and enjoying the ambiance of the great outdoors.
Eco-Friendly: The Solo Stove's wood-burning feature aligns with sustainable and eco-friendly principles, which can resonate with those who value environmentally conscious practices.

20. Le Creuset Dutch Oven

The Le Creuset Dutch Oven is a culinary icon, renowned for its superior craftsmanship and vibrant enamel finishes. Crafted with precision, this versatile cookware is perfect for simmering, roasting, baking, and more.

Check Price

Heat retention and durability

Its exceptional heat retention ensures even cooking, while the timeless design adds a touch of elegance to any kitchen. A Le Creuset Dutch Oven is not just a cooking vessel; it's a symbol of culinary excellence and a treasured heirloom for generations to come.

The enamel coating allows for easy cleaning compared to that of a traditional cast-iron Dutch oven.

Heirloom quality

Whenever the opportunity arises to give the gift of cast iron cookware, seize it. Cast iron's durability allows it to be passed down through the ages, a quality that sets it apart from Teflon cookware.

In addition, it's noteworthy that both professional chefs and home cooks across the globe rely on the same Dutch oven, making it a truly exceptional and timeless culinary essential.

The Le Creuset Dutch Oven is an outstanding Christmas gift for serious home cooks for several compelling reasons:

Exceptional Quality: Le Creuset is renowned for its top-tier craftsmanship and durable materials, making it a kitchen investment that will last for years.
Versatility: This Dutch Oven is incredibly versatile, capable of handling a wide range of cooking techniques, from braising and roasting to simmering and baking. Serious home cooks will appreciate its adaptability.
Even Cooking: Its excellent heat retention and even heat distribution ensure consistent cooking results, ideal for creating complex, flavorful dishes.
Timeless Design: The Dutch Oven's elegant design and vibrant enamel finishes add a touch of sophistication to any kitchen. It's not just a practical tool; it's a statement piece.
Culinary Exploration: For serious home cooks, this kitchen workhorse encourages culinary exploration, allowing them to master a variety of recipes and techniques.
Heritage and Tradition: Le Creuset Dutch Ovens are often passed down through generations, making them a cherished family heirloom that symbolizes culinary passion and tradition.
Gift-Worthy: The Le Creuset Dutch Oven is a highly desirable kitchen item, and receiving it as a gift is sure to be a joyous and treasured moment for any serious home cook.

21. Amazon Prime

When thinking about great gift ideas, Amazon Prime is one that comes to mind. What I like about this idea is that your loved one can use the Prime membership to purchase items they like and get free Prime shipping.

Amazon Prime is a subscription service offered by Amazon, one of the world's largest online retailers. It provides members with various benefits and features designed to enhance their shopping and entertainment experiences.

Check Price

Some of the key features of Amazon Prime include:

Free Two-Day Shipping: Prime members have access to free, expedited shipping on eligible items, with delivery in as little as two days in many areas.
Amazon Prime Video: Subscribers can stream a vast library of movies, TV shows, and original content through Amazon Prime Video.
Amazon Prime Music: This feature offers access to a diverse catalog of music for streaming and offline listening.
Amazon Prime Reading: Members can borrow eBooks, magazines, and more from the Prime Reading library at no extra cost.
Amazon First Reads: Subscribers have early access to new book releases and exclusive deals on Kindle eBooks.
Twitch Prime: Gamers can enjoy free in-game loot, monthly channel subscriptions, and other gaming-related perks on Twitch, Amazon's gaming platform.
Amazon Family: Prime members can access family-oriented features, such as family discounts, baby registry benefits, and more.
Amazon Photos: Prime members receive secure and unlimited photo storage, along with 5 GB of additional file storage.
Prime Wardrobe: This feature allows customers to try on clothing and accessories before purchasing them.
Early Access to Deals: Prime members get early access to Amazon's Lightning Deals and exclusive discounts.

Conclusion

In conclusion, finding the perfect Christmas gift for the cooks and foodies in your life just got a whole lot easier. This list of 21 unique and thoughtful gift ideas has something for every culinary enthusiast, from cutting-edge kitchen gadgets to Sunglasses and tools that elevate their cooking experience.

Whether you choose a beautifully crafted Dutch oven, a high-quality chef's knife, or a Prime subscription, your gift will not only delight their taste buds but also show that you've put thought and care into your selection. This holiday season, let your gift be a source of inspiration for their culinary adventures, making their time in the kitchen even more enjoyable and memorable. From our kitchen to yours, we wish you a joyful and flavorful holiday season. Happy cooking and happy gifting!

Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe sharing it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
John 6:35
-Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

Step-By-Step Dehydrating Fresh Figs at Home (Easy How To)

October 18, 2023 by Ronnie Williams Leave a Comment

Dehydrating fresh figs at home is a delightful and practical way to preserve the sweet and succulent flavors of this seasonal fruit for year-round enjoyment. Whether you have an abundance of fresh figs from your garden or simply wish to savor their unique taste long after the fig season, the process of dehydrating figs is surprisingly simple and rewarding.

In this step-by-step guide, we will walk you through the process of transforming plump, ripe figs into a delicious, shelf-stable snack that can be used in various culinary creations. By the end of this tutorial, you'll have a batch of dehydrated figs ready to add a burst of natural sweetness to your dishes, making them an excellent addition to your pantry.

So, gather your fresh figs, and let's embark on this journey of turning this exquisite fruit into a delightful, preserved treat.

What is Dehydrating?

Before we can look at dehydrating figs, we must first look at why we dehydrate foods and what dehydrating is in the first place. Dehydrating is a drying process that takes the moisture out of the food. The reason you may wish to dehydrate foods such as fruits or meats is to preserve them for eating later on.

Dehydrating foods is one of the oldest forms of food preservation. The history of dehydrating foods dates back thousands of years and has been an important method of food preservation across various cultures. Back then, ancient civilizations would dry food in direct sunlight to remove the moisture so food would last. It was an important part of living. Fast forward to modern times, people still love dehydrating food to preserve it.

Here are a few more reasons why you may want to dehydrate food:

Prolonged Shelf Life: Dehydrating food reduces the water content, which inhibits the growth of bacteria, yeasts, and molds that cause spoilage. This allows food to be stored for an extended period without refrigeration.
Reduced Weight and Volume: Removing moisture significantly reduces the weight and volume of the food, making it more convenient for storage and transportation, especially for hikers, campers, and those in emergency preparedness situations.
Reduced Food Waste: Dehydration is an excellent way to preserve surplus or excess produce when fruits and vegetables are in season. It prevents them from going to waste and allows you to enjoy them throughout the year.
Nutrient Retention: When done properly, dehydrating food can retain a majority of its nutritional value, including vitamins and minerals. While some nutrients may be lost in the process, it's often a more nutrient-dense option compared to other preservation methods.
Convenience: Dehydrated foods are lightweight and portable, making them convenient for outdoor activities like camping, hiking, and backpacking. They require minimal preparation and cooking, as rehydration can be as simple as adding hot water.
Improved Flavor: Dehydration can concentrate the flavors of food, resulting in an intense and sometimes sweeter taste.
Homemade Snacks: Dehydrating allows you to create your own healthy, preservative-free snacks like fruit chips, jerky, or dried herbs.
Emergency Preparedness: Dehydrated food is a staple in emergency preparedness kits as it can provide a source of nutrition during disasters or when access to fresh food is limited.

Common foods that are often dehydrated include fruits, vegetables, herbs, meats (for jerky), and even cooked grains or pasta. Dehydrating food can be done using various methods, including air drying, sun drying, oven drying, or using specialized food dehydrators.

Figs Are A Perfect Fruit to Dehydrate

One of the downfalls of figs is it is a delicate fruit, and lacks good shelf stability. This is why you seldom find them on grocery store shelves; they simply don't withstand shipping and storage.

Consequently, dehydrating figs emerges as the ideal solution. By dehydrating these fruits, you not only increase their longevity but also secure a supply for future use, particularly during bumper harvests.

Growing up in the South, there are many common fruits and veggies you see around a homestead.

We moved to the place that I called home for 26 years when I was 4 years old. As stated in my Muscadine Jelly Recipe, a few things were present when we showed up. One of those things was a muscadine trellis with a huge vine and also a couple of fig trees.

My backyard orchard at my house | Fig Tree in the Foreground

I loved going out there to pick fresh figs from the tree and eat them. But you can only eat so many fresh figs before they start to get overripe.

If you own fig trees, you're likely familiar with the annual abundance of ripe figs. Fig season is short-lived and a bunch seem to ripen all at once. So they make the perfect fruit to dehydrate for future use.

Best Variety of Figs to Use

When it comes to dehydrating figs, some fig varieties are better suited than others due to their flavor, texture, and overall characteristics. Here are a few fig varieties that are considered excellent for dehydrating:

Black Mission Figs: Black Mission figs are one of the most popular fig varieties for drying. They have a sweet and rich flavor, and their dark skin adds a beautiful color to the dried figs.
Calimyrna Figs: Calimyrna figs, also known as Turkish figs, are another excellent choice for drying. They have a nutty and slightly honeyed flavor that intensifies during the drying process.
Brown Turkey Figs: Brown Turkey figs are a versatile fig variety and are good for both fresh consumption and drying. They have a sweet and mild flavor.
Adriatic Figs: Adriatic figs, also known as White Kadota figs, have a honey-like sweetness. They dry well and maintain a delicate flavor.
Kadota Figs: Kadota figs are another variety with honey-like sweetness and make excellent dried figs.
Texas Everbearing Figs: These figs are known for their exceptional sweetness, which is enhanced during the drying process. They are particularly well-suited for making dried figs.

Brown Turkey Fig from my backyard orchard

When selecting figs for drying, it's essential to choose ripe figs that are not overly mushy. Ripe figs are sweeter and more flavorful, which will result in better-tasting dried figs.

Experiment with these ideas to find the best ways to incorporate dehydrated figs into your favorite dishes and discover new flavor combinations.

How To Dry Figs in a Dehydrator

Before we begin, you will need a few tools and ingredients. The most important tool is a dehydrator. You can use an oven, but a dehydrator works best for this method.

What You Need To Dehydrate Figs

Ingredients:

Fresh Whole Figs

Equipment Needed to Make Dehydrated Figs:

Knife
Large Pot
Wire Strainer
Glass Jars or Airtight container
Tea Cloth
Parchment Paper
Food Dehydrator: See Below for more information

Note: To see a created list of items and brands we recommend for canning and preserving, check out our dedicated page here.

Food Dehydrator Information

There are many dehydrators on the market from the very basic to commercial units. A basic one will do but the issue with them is they are hard to control the temperature and time. The more fancier dehydrators have more bells and whistles that help make this job easier.

The very basic dehydrator heats from the bottom as the more expensive ones heat from the back. This method tends to provide more even heat distribution. If the unit heats from the bottom, the trays closest to the bottom will dehydrate faster so it is important to rotate your trays every few hours if that is the type you have.

Lem Dehydrator | Middle of the road in features

Also, the more expensive units have temperature control and this is important if you plan to use the dehydrator for other foods such as meat which requires a higher temperature than fruit or herbs.

The last thing to consider is time. The more expensive units can be set to run a certain time, after that they cut off. This is a nice feature to have to keep from over-dehydrating your food.

Here are my recommendations for a dehydrator from least expensive to most:

Basic dehydrator: This unit heats from the bottom but does have an adjustable heat setting. It does not have a timer setting.
Middle-of-the-road dehydrator: This is the unit that I use at the moment. This unit has digital control for heat and has a time setting. The downside is it heats from the bottom.
Dehydrator with bells and whistles: This is the Excalibur Dehydrator and the one that I would personally buy if I were to buy a new one. They are highly recommended, heat from the back, have stainless steel trays with small holes in them, digital temp setting, and timer control. They are also highly recommended amounts for most homesteaders and people who preserve food.

Washing and Inspecting:

Check the figs to make sure there are no bugs, bad spots, or brown spots. Also, do not use any that are overripe. Only select the best quality fruit for dehydrating. Make sure to handle the figs carefully so you do not bruise them.

Also, there is a bug called a fig wasp that likes to bore into figs in some areas. The fig wasps are not in all areas so check your area to see if this applies to you.

Once you have checked your fruit over, the next thing to do is to wash the figs. If this applies to you make sure to look them over good for holes in the fruit.

Blanching Figs:

The next thing we are going to do is to water-blanch the figs. According to the Complete Dehydrator Cookbook, This is a pretreatment method that is also called "checking" or "Crazing" and will create fine, microscopic cracks in the skin of the figs. This helps the fruit to dry more evenly. To do this, take a large pot of water and bring it to a boil. Dip the fruit in the boiling water using a wire strainer for 30 seconds and quickly remove them. Dry them off with a paper towel or tea cloth.

Preparation:

Now that the figs have been blanched the next thing to do is prepare them. If the figs are small, they can be dehydrated whole, but if they are medium to large, you will want to cut them. Remove the stem, even from the whole figs. Cut the medium to large size ones in half or quarter them.

This is a picture of me removing Stems from fresh figs in order to prepare them for dehydrating. — Remove Stems

This is a picture of me using a sharp knife to cut the figs in half in order to prepare the figs to dehydrate. — Remove Stems

Dehydrating Figs:

Place figs on the dehydrator trays and arrange them in a single layer. If you have trays with large holes, you can use parchment paper to line the trays.

Put the wire rack or plastic trays into the dehydrator and set the temperature to 125 to 135 degrees Fahrenheit.

Drying Time:

Drying time will vary from 8 hours to 24 hours. You are looking for a product that is firm and has a slightly chewy texture. You should be able to bend the fruit without it cracking or breaking and it shouldn't be sticky. Larger fruit takes a longer time to dry.

This is a picture of dehydrated figs. This is what the figs should look like when they are done.

Many factors can affect the drying time such as the room temperature of the area, humidity in the area, etc.

How to Store Dehydrated Figs

Use an airtight container that is clear such as a quart-size glass jar with a lid such as a mason or ball jar. You may also use a clear plastic food storage container. Store the figs in an airtight container in a cool dry place. It is also best to store them in a dark place out of direct sunlight.

This is a picture of storing figs. I am placing the figs in a ziplock bag. — Placing dried figs in a clear ziplock bag

Conditioning Dehydrated Figs

During the initial week of fig storage, it's crucial to undertake a conditioning phase. This entails daily stirring or gently shaking the container to redistribute the figs. The purpose of this practice is to facilitate moisture equalization among the figs.

Occasionally, one fig may contain slightly more moisture than another. By periodically mixing them within the container, moisture redistributes, gradually achieving equilibrium. This essential step plays a key role in preventing the onset of mold and the proliferation of harmful bacteria, ensuring the figs remain in optimal condition.

If you happen to notice any moisture on the inside of the container, you will want to remove the figs and continue to dehydrate the batch.

Ways to use Dried Figs

Dehydrated figs are a versatile ingredient that can be used in a variety of culinary applications. They have a sweet and concentrated flavor, making them a great addition to both sweet and savory dishes.

Here are some ways to use dehydrated figs:

Snacking: Dehydrated figs make for a delicious and nutritious snack on their own. Simply eat them as a healthy alternative to candy or other sugary treats.
Rehydrate and Use in Baking: You can rehydrate dehydrated figs by soaking them in warm water or fruit juice for about 30 minutes. Once they are plump and soft, use them in baking recipes such as fig muffins, fig cakes, fig cookies, or fig bread.
Trail Mix: Combine dehydrated figs with nuts, seeds, and other dried fruits to create your customized trail mix. It's a great energy-boosting snack for hiking or on-the-go.
Breakfast: Chop or slice dehydrated figs and add them to your morning oatmeal, yogurt, or cereal for a sweet and fruity twist.
Salads: Rehydrated and chopped figs can be added to salads for a sweet contrast. They pair well with greens, nuts, cheese, and vinaigrette dressings.
Cheese Platter: Dehydrated figs are a popular addition to cheese platters. They complement a variety of cheeses, including goat cheese, blue cheese, and brie.
Compotes and Chutneys: Simmer dehydrated figs with water, sugar, and spices to create a fig compote or chutney. These can be used as condiments for meats, cheese, or as a spread.
Smoothies: Add a few dehydrated figs to your smoothie for a natural sweetness and flavor boost. They work well with ingredients like yogurt, bananas, and spinach.
Stuffing: Chopped or rehydrated figs can be used as part of a stuffing for poultry, like chicken or turkey, or in vegetarian stuffed peppers.
Marinades and Glazes: Blend rehydrated figs with other ingredients to create a flavorful marinade or glaze for meat or vegetables. This is especially delicious for roasted or grilled dishes.
Fig Bars: Make homemade fig bars by blending rehydrated figs and spreading the mixture between layers of pastry or oat-based dough. Bake until golden brown.
Fig Jam or Spread: Simmer dehydrated figs with sugar, lemon juice, and a little water to create your fig jam or spread. Enjoy it on toast, in sandwiches, or as a condiment for various dishes.
Desserts: Incorporate dehydrated figs into desserts like rice pudding, panna cotta, or ice cream for a sweet, fruity addition.
Energy Bars: Make homemade energy bars by blending rehydrated figs with nuts, seeds, and other healthy ingredients. Press the mixture into a pan, chill, and cut into bars.

Happy Dehydrating

Let me know how these Dehydrated figs turn out for you in the comments below! I'd love to hear from you!

Thanks for stopping by Southern Food Junkie. It is our hope that you enjoy this recipe and would want to share it with friends, family, and coworkers. Make sure to take time to give thanks to the creator, God, by which all blessings flow.
John 6:35
-Ronnie | Let's Get Food Junked

Step-By-Step Dehydrating Fresh Figs at Home (Easy How To)

Prep Time: 10 minutes

Active Time: 8 hours

Total Time: 8 hours 10 minutes

Dehydrating fresh figs at home is a delightful and practical way to preserve the sweet and succulent flavors of this seasonal fruit for year-round enjoyment. Whether you have an abundance of fresh figs from your garden or simply wish to savor their unique taste long after the harvest season, the process of dehydrating figs is surprisingly simple and rewarding.

5.0 Stars (111 Reviews)

Tools

Food dehydrator
Knife
Large pot
Wire strainer
Glass jars or food storage containers

Instructions

Washing and Inspecting

Also, there is a bug called a fig wasp that likes to bore into figs in some areas. The fig wasps are not in all areas so check your area to see if this applies to you. Once you have checked your fruit over, the next thing to do is to wash the figs. If this applies to you make sure to look them over good for holes in the fruit.

Blanching

Preparation

Dehydrate

Place figs on the dehydrator trays and arrange them in a single layer. If you have trays with large holes, you can use parchment paper to line the trays. Put the wire rack or plastic trays into the dehydrator and set the temperature to 125 to 135 degrees Fahrenheit.

Drying time

There are many factors that can affect the drying time such as the room temperature of the area, humidity in the area, etc.

Storing and Conditioning

If you happen to notice any moisture on the inside of the container, you will want to remove the figs and continue to dehydrate the batch.

Why You'll Love This Jalapeño Pimento Cheese

Ingredients You'll Need

Freshly Grated Cheese Makes a Difference

Why I Use Pickled Jalapeños in Pimento Cheese

How to Make Jalapeño Pimento Cheese

1. Shred the cheese

2. Make the pimento cheese base

3. Fold in the shredded cheese

4. Refrigerate before serving

What Does Jalapeno Pimento Cheese Taste Like?

Let Your Pimento Cheese Rest Before Serving

What to Serve With Jalapeno Pimento Cheese

How to Store Homemade Pimento Cheese

More Southern Sandwich Spreads to Try

Jalapeño Pimento Cheese FAQs

A New Favorite Pimento Cheese Recipe

Ingredients

Instructions

Notes

Did you make this recipe?

Why You'll Love This Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese

Ingredients You'll Need

Why Smoked Gouda Works So Well in Pimento Cheese

Grate the Cheese for the Best Texture

How to Make Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese with Bacon

1. Make the creamy pimento cheese base

2. Grate and add the cheeses

3. Mix everything together

What Does Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese Taste Like?

What to Serve With Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese

Can You Make Pimento Cheese Ahead of Time?

How to Store Homemade Pimento Cheese

More Southern Sandwich Spreads to Try

Smoked Gouda Pimento Cheese FAQs

A Southern Classic With a Smoky Twist

Ingredients

Instructions

Notes

Did you make this recipe?

Why I Made This Instant Pot Pot Roast

I Fell Down the BeanTok Rabbit Hole

How This Beef and Black Beans Recipe Came Together

Why You'll Love This Recipe

Ingredients You'll Need

Why Add Black Beans to Pot Roast?

What Cut of Beef Is Best for Instant Pot Pot Roast?

Should You Brown a Chuck Roast Before Pressure Cooking?

How Long Do You Cook a 2.5-Pound Chuck Roast in the Instant Pot?

Should You Cook the Potatoes and Carrots With the Roast?

How Long Do Potatoes and Carrots Take in the Instant Pot?

When Should You Add Black Beans to Pot Roast?

An Easy High-Protein Meal Prep for Work

Is This a Low-Carb Pot Roast?

Can I Use Chicken Broth Instead of Beef Broth?

How to Store Pot Roast for Meal Prep

Easy Instant Pot Pot Roast Recipe

Ingredients

Instructions

Notes

Did you make this recipe?

More Easy Meal Prep Recipes

Final Thoughts

Where to Eat in Maggie Valley, NC

Joey's Pancake House

Maggie Valley Sandwich Shop

Pop's Butts on the Creek

Frankie's Italian Trattoria

J. Arthur's Restaurant

Maggie Valley Restaurant

BrickHouse Burgers & Pizza

Why Maggie Valley Is So Special to Me

What About Restaurants Near Maggie Valley?

More Maggie Valley Restaurants Are Coming

Our Visit to Haywood Smokehouse in Waynesville, NC

Location and Parking

Wait Time and Seating

Atmosphere and Service

What Kind of BBQ Does Haywood Smokehouse Serve?

What We Ordered at Haywood Smokehouse

Dry-Rubbed Ribs